Home

1761-UM003 - Rockwell Automation

1. The Following Probable Cause Recommended Action Error Exists No input No Line Power Verify proper line voltage and connections to the power or controller power supply Power Supply This problem can occur intermittently if power supply is error Overloaded overloaded when output loading and temperature varies If the LEDs indicate The uunaanga Following Probable Cause Recommended Action Error Exists mm POWER Hardware Processor Cycle power Contact your local Allen Bradley RUN faulted Memory Error representative if the error persists m FAULT FORCE Loose Wiring Verify connections to the controller 14 3 e2 e o lt o 2 Q gt 2 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual If the LEDs indicate The Following Probable Cause Recommended Action Error Exists Application Hardware 1 Monitor Status File Word S 6 for major error code fault Software Major 2 Remove hardware software condition causing fault Fault Detected 3 Press F10 to clear the fault 4 Attempt a controller REM Run mode entry If unsuccessful repeat recommended action steps above or contact your local Allen Bradley distributor Refer to the following key to determine the statu
2. Source A N7 11 16 0 Source B 100 1 4 102 000 Thousands 1 4 increments have occurred GEQ GRTR THAN OR EQUAL Source A N7 11 17 0 Source B 102 1 4 change Thousands drill bit NOW GEQ 0 0 GRTR THAN OR EQUAL Source A N7 11 6 0 Source B 105 100 000 102 000 change 1 4 1 4 drill increments increments bit have have soon occurred occurred B3 B3 0 0 Path SSS ayaa SS SSeS SSeS lesessso esessce ese Sssees de w O 16 4 100 000 102 000 1 28 1 4 1 4 second increments increments free have have running occurred occurred clock bit B3 B3 S 4 PERSP Eum eme ege es sees J eem UNE aim 16 17 7 More rungs are added to this subroutine at the end of chapters 8 and 9 Q This branch accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Therefore do not include this branch if you are using a 16 I O controller 7 10 Using Math Instructions 8 Using Math Instructions This chapter contains general information about math instructions and explains how they function in your logic program Each of the math instructions includes information on what the instruction symbol looks like typical execution time for the instruction e
3. 14 3 This rung accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Do not include this rung if you are using a 16 1 O controller E 14 Rung 7 3 Converts the BCD thumbwheel value from BCD to integer integer values thumbwheel to ensure that the conversion only occurs on valid BCD value can occur while the operator This is due to input filter propagation delay differences between controll that thumbwhe er invalid BCD values el operates upon Application Example Programs This rung also is the 4 input circuits that provide the BCD input value qst pass bit Rung 7 4 previous scan s BCD input value EQU EQUAL Source A N7 13 0 Source B N7 14 0 eet ecesaeeceeeeeak Math Overfl Bit 8 0 debounced BCD value FRD FROM BCD Source N7 14 0000 Dest N7 12 0 PES SEEN SSA Math OW Error Bit 625 U 1 0 this scan s BCD input value MOV MOVE Source N7 1 Dest N7 1 Peecteee ose caches S Ensures that the operator cannot select a paper thickness of 0 the drill bit life calculation could be defeated resulting in poor allowed quality holes due to a dull drill bit used to calculate drill bit wear is 1 4 in debounced BCD value EQU EQUAL Source A N7 12 0 Source B 0 FESTER SRA debounced BCD value Source Dest
4. B 25 o o es 3 i Qo _ tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual False Execution True Execution Mnemonic Time approx Time approx Memory Usage Name Instruction Type user words useconds useconds FRD 5 52 56 88 1 00 Convert from Data Handling BCD GEQ 6 60 23 60 1 50 Greater Than or Comparison Equal GRT 6 60 23 60 1 50 Greater Than Comparison HSC 21 00 21 00 1 00 High Speed High Speed Counter Counter HSD 7 00 8 00 1 25 High Speed High Speed Counter Counter Interrupt Disable HSE 7 00 10 00 1 25 High Speed High Speed Counter Counter Interrupt Enable HSL 7 00 66 00 1 50 High Speed High Speed Counter Counter Load IIM 6 78 35 72 1 50 Immediate Input Program Flow with Mask Control INT 0 99 1 45 0 50 Interrupt Application Specific Subroutine IOM 6 78 41 59 1 50 Immediate Program Flow Output with Mask Control JMP 6 78 9 04 1 00 Jump to Label Program Flow Control JSR 4 25 22 24 1 00 Jump to Program Flow Subroutine Control LBL 0 99 1 45 0 50 Label Program Flow Control LEQ 6 60 23 60 1 50 Less Than or Comparison Equal LES 6 60 23 60 1 50 Less Than Comparison B 26 Programming Reference False Execution True Execution Mem rv Us g Mnemonic Time approx Time approx vee Name Instruction Type user words seconds seconds LIM 7 69 36 93 1 50 Limit Test Compa
5. 24V de user supply needed if not connected to a MicroLogix 1000 controller 1747 CP3 24V dc or Weer supplied 1761 CBL ACOO MicroLogix DH 485 Network 1 DB 9 RS 232 port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 port EI DH 485 port Recommended Tools To connect a DH 485 network you need tools to strip the shielded cable and to attach the cable and terminators to the AIC Advanced Interface Converter We recommend the following equipment or equivalent Description Part Number Manufacturer Shielded Twisted Pair Cable 3106A or 9842 Belden Stripping Tool 45 164 Ideal Industries 1 8 Slotted Screwdriver Not Applicable Not Applicable 3 6 Connecting the System DH 485 Communication Cable The suggested DH 485 communication cable is either Belden H3106A or 9842 The cable is jacketed and shielded with one or two twisted wire pairs and a drain wire One pair provides a balanced signal line and one additional wire is used for a common reference line between all nodes on the network The shield reduces the effect of electrostatic noise from the industrial environment on network communication o Lo G gt o Ln G I The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments daisy chained together The total length of the cable segments cannot exceed 1219 m 4000 ft When cutting cable segments make them long enough to route them from one AIC to the next w
6. TIMER ON DELAY EN DN Timer T4 0 DN Time Base 0 01 Preset 10 Accum 0 HoH SSS See Sees Rung 2 2 Calculates and stores the number of counts that have occurred since the last time that it was executed as true in N7 1 last time last rate measurement timer t4 0 expiration The LES instruction allows for 10 counts of backlash to occur you can adjust as needed The add instruction is configured for a 1000 count encoder using N7 2 generated each Z reset Rate Period Counts last rate Expiration Bit measurement period T4 0 SUB 4 SUBTRACT DN Source A C5 0 ACC 0 Source B N7 0 0 Dest N7 1 0 a R If Counts last rate Counts last rate negative measurement period measurement period math flag S 0 XBES 2 2 ADD xeu LESS THAN ADD 3 Source A N7 1 Source A N7 2 0 1000 Source B 10 Source B N7 1 0 HESS SSS Se He EI Dest N7 1 0 Posse SSR SS see ep Change this register to match the number of counts o o e LU t o _ tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual E 32 1 second Frequency has now in Hertz elapsed Chil 4MOV MOVE DN Source N7 3 0 Dest N7 4 0 Last timeout value storage register ASS La MOVE MOV Source C5 0 ACC 0 Dest N7 0 o Determine
7. 2 0 STI Pending Status When set this bit indicates that the STI timer has timed out and the STI routine is waiting to be executed This bit is cleared upon starting the STI routine ladder program exit of the REM Run or Test mode or execution of a true STS instruction Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable B 10 Programming Reference Address Bit Classification Description S 2 1 STI Enabled Status and Static Configuration This bit may be set or reset using the STS STE or STD instruction If set it allows execution of the STI if the STI setpoint S 30 is non zero If clear when an interrupt occurs the STI subroutine does not execute and the STI Pending bit is set The STI Timer continues to run when this bit is disabled The STD instruction clears this bit If this bit is set or reset editing the status file online the STI is not affected If this bit is set the bit allows execution of the STI If this bit is reset editing the status file offline the bit disallows execution of the STI 2 2 STI Executing Status When set this bit indicates that the STI timer has timed out and the STI subroutine is currently being executed This bit is cleared upon completion of the STI routine ladder program or REM Run or Test mode S 2 3 to 2 4 Reserved NA NA 8 2 59 Incoming Command Pending Bit Status This bit is set when the p
8. 2 Rung 2 4 o o e LU i m tc E 35 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Spray Booth Application Example The following application example illustrate the use of bit shift and FIFO instructions in an automated paint spraying operation For a detailed explanation of e XIC and OTE instructions see chapter 6 e EQU and LIM instructions see chapter 7 e FFU and FFL instructions see chapter 9 e BSL instruction see chapter 11 Paint Spray Booth I Position 1 3 4 GAR AGG Bar Code Reader 1 0 2 3 4 Input Proximity Switch 1 0 1 Paint Sprayer Signals B3 0 B3 1 B3 2 B3 3 Spray Enable 0 0 3 Lo Lo Blue Paint Gun 0 0 0 N7 3 N7 2 N7 1 N7 0 Yellow Paint Gun 0 0 1 wo e pe p m l Red EGNL LIN Red Paint Gun 0 0 2 E 36 Application Example Programs Spray Booth Operation Overview An overhead conveyor with part carriers hooks carries parts froma previous operation to the spray booth Before the part enters the spray booth 2 items are checked on the conveyor The first check is for part presence and the second check is for the needed color This information is stored and accessed later when the part carrier is in the paint spraying area A proximity switch is used to check for the presence of a part on the carrier and a barcode reader is used to determine color choice When the part carrier reaches the spraying area the previously
9. I 0 5 Analog Input 1 Voltage 1 0 7 Analog Input 3 Current Input words 0 and 1 contain discrete input data Unused inputs in the discrete inputs image space are reset during each input scan Input words 2 and 3 are reserved and are not updated by the controller These inputs have no direct effect on controller operation but they can be modified like other data bits Input words 4 7 contain the status of the four analog input channels respectively Analog input image words are cleared at Going To Run GTR For enabled channels the analog input image is updated on a cyclical basis Output word 0 contains discrete output data Output words 1 3 are reserved output image space Unused outputs in both the discrete output image space and the reserved output image space have no direct effect on controller operation But these outputs can be modified like other data bits Output word 4 holds the value of the analog output channel I O Configuration Using Analog The analog input channels are single ended unipolar circuits and can be individually enabled or disabled The default is all input channels enabled The two voltage inputs accept 10 5V dc and the two current inputs accept 21 mA The analog output channel is also a single ended circuit You can configure either voltage 0V dc to 10V dc or current 4 to 20 mA output operation The default is voltage output The output must be configured for either voltage
10. how to use the instruction In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling E machine that shows the math instructions in use e Math Instructions z a Instruction Purpose Page Mnemonic Name ADD Add Adds source A to source B and stores the result in 8 4 the destination SUB Subtract Subtracts source B from source A and stores the 8 5 result in the destination MUL Multiply Multiplies source A by source B and stores the result 8 8 in the destination DIV Divide Divides source A by source B and stores the resultin 8 9 the destination and the math register DDV Double Divide Divides the contents of the math register by the 8 10 source and stores the result in the destination and the math register CLR Clear Sets all bits of a word to zero 8 11 SQR Square Root Calculates the square root of the source and places 8 11 the integer result in the destination SCL Scale Data Multiplies the source by a specified rate adds to an 8 12 offset value and stores the result in the destination 8 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual About the Math Instructions These instructions perform the familiar four function math operations The majority of the instructions take two input values perform the specified arithmetic function and output the result to an assigned memory location For example both the ADD and SUB instructions take a pair of input values add or subtr
11. 4 2 2 SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN 9 10 File N7 50 DN Mask FFFF Dest N7 7 Control R6 4 Length 5 Position 0 PIS SSS euer EV force the sequencer to increment on next scan R6 4 D pru Oo re us A This rung accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Do not include this rung if you are using a 16 l O controller 11 25 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 4 2 This rung is identical to the previous rung except that it is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 5 hole position hole hole 5 hole selector selector preset switch switch sequencer bit 0 bit 19 LO TsO SQO SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN 9 10 File N7 55 DN Mask FFFF Dest N7 7 Control R6 5 Length 7 Position 0 force the sequencer to increment on the next scan R6 5 U EN _ This rung accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Do not include this rung if you are using a 16 1 0 controller 11 26 Using Application Specific Instructions Rung 43300 This rung is identical to the 2 previous rungs except that it is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 7 hole position hole hole 7 hole selector selector preset switch switch sequencer
12. External Power Selection Cable Length Connections from to AIC Power Supply A V Switch Setting Required 1747 CP3 3m 9 8 ft SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processor channel 0 port 1 yes external CBL 9 45cm 17 7 in 1761 CBL ACOO EL PC COM port port 1 yes external PanelView 550 through NULL modem adapter port 1 yes external DTAM Plus DTAM Micro port 1 yes external Port 1 on another AIC port 1 yes external il eG Hl 1761 CBL ASO9 1761 CBL AS03 External Power Selection Cable Length Connections from to AIC Power Supply E y D Switch Setting Required 1761 CBL ASO3 3m 9 8 ft SLC 500 Fixed port3 yes external 1761 CBL AS09 9 5m 31 17 ft SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 processors PanelView 550 RJ45 port port 3 yes external fa HO T7 1761 CBL HM022 d 1761 CBL AMOO me RE SS OBLAHo2 External Power Selection Cable Length Connections from to AIC Power Supply h h Switch Setting Required 1761 CBL AMOO 45cm 17 7 in MicroLogix 1000 port 2 no cable 1761 CBL HM02 2m 6 5 ft 1761 CBL AHO2 2m 6 5 ft port 2 on another AlC port 2 yes external External power supply required unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable Series B or higher cables are required for hardware handshaking 3 14 Connecting the System 1761 CBL AP00 1761 CBL P
13. illie er rer rr eee 2 22 Wiring Your Analog Channels 000 00 eee eee eee 2 23 Analog Voltage and Current Input and Output Ranges 2 24 Wiring Your Controller for High Speed Counter Applications 2 25 3 Connecting the System Connecting the DF1 Protocol 0 00 e eee eee 3 2 toc i MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual toc ii Connecting to a DH 485 Network ssooseereerrerr ers re rr rr rna 3 6 Connecting the AIC isses eI E ebur AE A rr rr rr 3 10 Establishing Communication lille 3 19 Programming Programming Overview Principles of Machine Control soseeeeereerrerr rer rr eee 4 2 Understanding File Organization llle 4 4 Understanding How Processor Files are Stored and Accessed 4 6 Addressing Data Flles 5 RE ARERUE rss sr sr rss 4 10 Applying Ladder Logics to Your Schematics 4 14 Developing Your Logic Program A Model 4 15 Using Analog VO IMAGG ss entation f vera recent der mr ae Sf SR Ke eu bet ee Set heed 5 2 VO Configuration scere RUE REX RING RUPEE X ERR Rn 5 3 Input Filter and Update Times s sososseseerseeeer rss eee ee 5 3 Converting Analog Data ssosrseesreesrer reser rr rr rr ee 5 5 Using Basic Instructions About the Basic Instructions eost bx ex xe rr rss ss kee ees 6 2 Bit Instructions Overview llle elles 6 3 Examine if Closed XICO s ore uf aed eee enm d RP RISE B
14. e how to use the instruction In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling E machine that shows the data handling instructions in use 3 e Data Handling Instructions Instruction Purpose Page Mnemonic Name TOD Convert to BCD Converts the integer source value to BCD 9 3 format and stores it in the destination FRD Convert from BCD Converts the BCD source value to an integer 9 4 and stores it in the destination DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Decodes a 4 bit value 0 to 15 turning on 9 8 the corresponding bit in the 16 bit destination ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Encodes a 16 bit source to a 4 bit value 9 9 Searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit and looks for the first set bit The corresponding bit position is written to the destination as an integer COP and Copy File and Fill File The COP instruction copies data from the 9 10 FLL source file to the destination file The FLL instruction loads a source value into each position in the destination file 9 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Instruction Purpose Page Mnemonic Name MOV Move Moves the source value to the destination 9 15 MVM Masked Move Moves data from a source location to a 9 16 selected portion of the destination AND And Performs a bitwise AND operation 9 18 OR Or Performs a bitwise inclusive OR operation 9 19 XOR Exclusive Or Pe
15. 97 True False OTL 4 97 3 16 OTU 4 97 3 16 ve i 91 fe ATTENTION Using fatal error conditions physical outputs are turned off Once a the error conditions are cleared the controller resumes operation using the data table value of the operand Using OTL When you assign an address to the OTL instruction that corresponds to the address of a physical output the output device wired to this screw terminal is energized when the bit is set turned on or enabled When rung conditions become false after being true the bit remains set and the corresponding output device remains energized When enabled the latch instruction tells the controller to turn on the addressed bit Thereafter the bit remains on regardless of the rung condition until the bit is turned off typically by a OTU instruction in another rung 6 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using OTU When you assign an address to the OTU instruction that corresponds to the address of a physical output the output device wired to this screw terminal is de energized when the bit is cleared turned off or disabled The unlatch instruction tells the controller to turn off the addressed bit Thereafter the bit remains off regardless of the rung condition until it is turned on typically by a OTL instruction in another rung One Shot Rising OSR diOSR Execution Times usec when True False 13 02
16. Analog Current Input Range 50mA 21mA 21mA 50mA Underrange Operating Range Overrange Note The analog voltage inputs are protected to withstand the application of 24V dc without damage to the controller The analog current inputs are protected to withstand the application of 50 mA without damage Analog Voltage Output Range OV dc 10V de Operating Range Analog Current Output Range 4mA 20 mA Operating Range Note The analog outputs are protected to withstand the short circuiting of the voltage or current outputs without damage to the controller For information on analog signal and data word values using the nominal transfer function formula see page 5 5 2 24 Wiring Your Controller Wiring Your Controller for High Speed Counter Applications To wire the controller for high speed counter applications use input terminals 1 0 I 1 1 2 and I 3 Refer to chapter 12 for information on using the high speed counter Shielded cable is required for high speed input signals 0 3 when the filter setting is set to either 0 10 ms or 0 075 ms We recommend Belden 9503 or equivalent for lengths up to 305 m 1000 ft Shields should be grounded only at the signal source end of the cable Ground the shield to the case of the signal source so energy coupled to the shield will not be delivered to signal source s electronics o A G gt o Ln G I 2 25 MicroLogix 1000 P
17. o True False 147 87 6 78 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits d o m With this Bit The Controller a S 0 0 Carry C always resets S 0 1 Overflow V sets if division by zero or overflow is detected otherwise resets On overflow the minor error flag is also set The value 32 767 is placed in the destination If S 2 14 math overflow selection bit is set then the unsigned truncated overflow remains in the destination S 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets undefined if overflow is set 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative otherwise resets undefined if overflow is set Changes to the Math Register The unrounded quotient is placed in the most significant word the remainder is placed in the least significant word 8 9 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Double Divide DDV The 32 bit content of the math register is divided by the 16 bit source value and the rounded quotient is placed in the destination If the remainder is 0 5 or greater the destination is rounded up This instruction typically follows a MUL instruction that creates a 32 bit result Execution Times usec when True False 157 06 6 78 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C always resets S 0 1 Overflow V sets if division by zero or if result is greater than 32 767 or less than 32 768 otherwise
18. 11 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual When the register shifts and input conditions go false the enable done and error bits are reset Bit Address is the address of the source bit The status of this bit is inserted in either the first lowest bit position BSL or last highest bit position BSR Length size of bit array is the number of bits in the bit array up to 1680 bits A length value of 0 causes the input bit to be transferred to the UL bit A length value that points past the end of the programmed file causes a major error to occur Ifyou alter a length value with your ladder program make certain that the altered value is valid The instruction invalidates all bits beyond the last bit in the array as defined by the length up to the next word boundary Effects on Index Register S 24 11 4 The shift operation clears the index register S 24 to zero Using Application Specific Instructions Bit Shift Left BSL m oo When the rung goes from false to true the controller sets the enable bit EN bit 15 nie gt jerm 1 and the data block is shifted to the left to a higher bit number one bit position The E specified bit at the bit address is shifted into the first bit position The last bit is shifted out of the array and stored in the unload bit UL bit 10 The shift is Execution Times completed immediately usec when For wraparound operation set the bit address to the las
19. fe fe n e Read Write read indicates that the local processor processor in which the instruction is located is receiving data write indicates that the processor is sending data Target Device identifies the type of command used to establish communication The target device can be a MicroLogix 1000 controller or SLC family processor using SLC commands or a common interface file by selecting the CIF format Valid options are SLC500 ML1000 Allows communication between a MicroLogix 1000 controller and any other MicroLogix 1000 controller or SLC 500 family processor 485CIF common interface file Allows communication between a MicroLogix 1000 controller and a non MicroLogix 1000 SLC 500 device The CIF data is automatically delivered to integer file 9 in SLC 500 processors or file 7 in MicroLogix 1000 controllers The 485CIF protocol is also used for PLC 2 type messages to PLC 5 processors Control Block Address an integer file address that you select It consists of 7 integer words containing the status bits target file address and other data associated with the MSG instruction Control Block Length fixed at seven elements This field cannot be altered 13 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 13 4 Note When running a MicroLogix 1000 program on an SLC 5 03 or SLC5 04 processor or on channel 0 of an SLC 5 05 processor the MSG control block length increases from 7 to
20. z 1 p 22 e a 13 19 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual This run starts messaging each REM Run or RUN mode entry by clearing the EN bit of the first MSG instruction 11 N7 0 2 0 y r 15 15 This rung sets the timeout value when using a SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processor this rung and rung 2 2 are not required because you can enter the value 6 into the Timeout value field in the MSG instruction block TON N7 0 N7 0 N7 0 2 1 L 3 t TIMER ON DELAY 15 12 13 Timer T4 0 Time Base 0 01 Preset Same as above rung N7 120 N7 20 N7 120 t 3 2 2 I7 TIMER ON DELAY 15 12 13 Timer T l Time Base 0 01 Preset 600 The MSG instruction energizes upon entry into the REM Run or RUN mode No input conditions are required S10 Msc 2 3 READ WRITE MESSAGE Read write WRITE Target Device sicso0 m1000 Control Block NT 0 Control Block Length 7 The MSG instruction is energized when the previous MSG instruction completes 10 N7 0 MSG READ WRITE MESSAGE Read write READ Target Device sicsoo m iooo Comtrol Block N7 20 Control Block Length 7 24 2 5 2 6 13 20 Troubleshooting Your System 1 4 Troubleshooting Your System This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller Topics include understanding the controller LED status controller error recovery model identifying controll
21. F fault messages 14 7 fault recovery procedure 14 6 fault routine 14 6 FFL FIFO Load 9 25 FFU FIFO Unload 9 25 FIFO and LIFO instructions FIFO Load FFL 9 25 FIFO Unload FFU 9 25 LIFO Load LFL 9 26 LIFO Unload LFU 9 26 overview 9 23 effects on index register S 24 9 24 entering parameters 9 23 FIFO Load FFL 9 25 operation 9 25 FIFO Unload FFU 9 25 operation 9 25 file indicator 4 13 file organization data files 4 6 program files 4 4 file types C 2 Fill File FLL 9 10 using 9 12 entering parameters 9 12 filter input 5 3 filter response times A 9 filtering input channel 5 4 FLL Fill File 9 10 FRD Convert from BCD 9 4 G general specifications A 3 GEQ Greater Than or Equal 7 4 Greater Than GRT 7 4 Greater Than or Equal GEQ 7 4 grounding the controller 2 2 GRT Greater Than 7 4 H hardware features 1 3 heat protection 1 13 highspeed counter wiring 2 25 12 7 HighSpeed Counter HSC 12 6 entering parameters 12 6 types of 12 7 bidirectional counter 12 10 bidirectional counter with reset and hold 12 10 bidirectional counter with reset and hold with a quadrature encoder 12 14 up counter 12 8 up counter with reset and hold 12 8 what happens when going to REM Run 12 25 highspeed counter instructions 12 2 about 12 2 HighSpeed Counter HSC 12 6 HighSpeed Counter Interrupt Disable HSD 12 23 HighSpeed Counter Interrupt Enable HSE 1
22. Installing Your Controller The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the controller It is intended for any situation where the operator must quickly de energize I O devices only When inspecting or installing terminal connections replacing output fuses or working on equipment within the enclosure use the disconnect to shut off power to the rest of the system o Lo G gt o Ln G I Note Do not control the master control relay with the controller Provide the operator with the safety of a direct connection between an emergency stop switch and the master control relay Using Emergency Stop Switches When using emergency stop switches adhere to the following points Do not program emergency stop switches in the controller program Any emergency stop switch should turn off all machine power by turning off the master control relay e Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and labeling of emergency stop switches Install emergency stop switches and the master control relay in your system Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient rating for your application emergency stop switches must be easy to reach e In the following illustration input and output circuits are shown with MCR protection However in most applications only output circuits require MCR protection The following illustrations show the Master Control Relay wired in a grounded system Note The
23. L 9 i 3 L I i L i L ee Hee ee Ln o Count L L L I L I I L L I L I L I o fae Operation For the Bidirectional Counters both high and low presets are used The low preset value must be less than the high preset value or an error INVALID PRESETs LOADED TO HIGH SPEED COUNTER 37H occurs When the HSC instruction is first executed true the Instruction accumulator is loaded to the hardware accumulator e Instruction high preset is loaded to the hardware high preset Any instruction accumulator value between 32 768 and 32 767 inclusive can be loaded to the hardware After the first true HSC instruction execution data can only be transferred to the hardware accumulator via an RES or RAC instruction or to the hardware high and low presets via the HSL instruction The Following Condition Occurs when either the hardware accumulator transitions from the hardware high preset 1 to the hardware high preset or A high preset is reached the hardware accumulator is loaded with a value greater than or equal to the hardware high preset or the hardware high preset is loaded with a value that is less than or equal to the hardware accumulator 12 15 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 12 16 When a high preset is reached the HP bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file program file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IH bit is set and th
24. Refer to proper grounding VERIFY WRITE by the controller the read failed This may guidelines in chapter 2 FAILURE have been caused by noise Start up your system Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists 00419 EXTRA OUTPUT An extra output bit was set when the Extra Set S 0 8 or change your BIT S TURNED Output Select S 0 8 bit in the status file application to prevent these bits ON was reset For 16 point controllers this from being turned on includes bits 6 15 For 32 point controllers Correct the program reload and this includes bits 12 15 enter the REM Run mode Valid for Series A C discrete only Calling Allen Bradley for Assistance If you need to contact Allen Bradley or local distributor for assistance it is helpful to obtain the following prior to calling 2 c O o X o a Q gt 2 controller type series letter firmware FRN number on controller s side label controller LED status controller error codes found in S 6 of status file 14 11 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual A Hardware Reference A 1 This appendix lists the controller Specifications dimensions replacement parts For AIC specifications see the Advanced Interface Converter AIC and DeviceNet Interface DNI Installation Instructions Publication 1761 5 11 Hardware Reference Controller Specifications
25. Controller Types Catalog Number Description 1761 L16AWA 10 pt ac input 6 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L32AWA 20 pt ac input 12 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L20AWA 5A 12 pt ac input 4 pt analog input 8 pt relay output 1 pt analog output ac power supply controller 1761 L10BWA 6 pt de input 4 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L16BWA 10 pt dc input 6 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L20BWA 5A 12 pt dc input 4 pt analog input 8 pt relay output 1 pt analog output ac power supply controller 1761 L32BWA 20 pt de input 12 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L10BWB 6 pt de input 4 pt relay output dc power supply controller 1761 L16BWB 10 pt de input 6 pt relay output dc power supply controller 1761 L20BWB 5A 12 pt dc input 4 pt analog input 8 pt relay output 1 pt analog output dc power supply controller 1761 L32BWB 20 pt dc input 12 pt relay output dc power supply controller 1761 L16BBB 10 pt dc input 4 pt FET and 2 pt relay outputs dc power supply controller 1761 L32BBB 20 pt de input 10 pt FET and 2 pt relay outputs dc power supply controller 1761 L32AAA 20 pt ac input 10 pt triac and 2 pt relay outputs ac power supply controller A 2 o o es eh i o Y 3 tc MicroLogix
26. Execution Times usec when True False 61 13 33 67 LFU Instruction Execution Times usec when True False 64 20 35 08 Using Data Handling Instructions When rung conditions change from false to true the controller sets the LFL enable bit EN This loads the contents of the Source N7 10 into the stack element indicated by the Position number 9 The position value then increments The LFL instruction loads an element at each false to true transition of the rung until the stack is filled 34 elements The controller sets the done bit DN inhibiting further loading When rung conditions change from false to true the controller sets the LFU enable bit EU This unloads data from the last element loaded into the stack at the position value minus 1 placing it in the Destination N7 11 The position value then decrements The LFU instruction unloads one element at each false to true transition of the rung until the stack is empty The controller then sets the empty bit EM 9 27 e2 lt i fe fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Data Handling Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example This section provides ladder rungs to demonstrate the use of data handling instructions The rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example described in appendix E You will be adding to the subroutine in file 7 that was started
27. TOD 6 78 49 64 1 00 Convert to BCD Data Handling TOF 31 65 39 42 1 00 Timer Off Delay Basic TON 30 38 38 34 1 00 Timer On Delay Basic XIC 1 72 1 54 0 75 Examine If Basic Closed XIO 1 72 1 54 0 75 Examine If Open Basic XOR 6 92 33 64 1 50 Exclusive Or Data Handling User Interrupt Latency The user interrupt latency is the maximum time from when an interrupt condition occurs e g STI expires or HSC preset is reached to when the user interrupt subroutine begins executing assumes that there are no other interrupt conditions present If you are communicating with the controller the maximum user interrupt latency is 872 us If you are not communicating with the controller the maximum user interrupt latency is 838 us B 29 o o es LU t o _ tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Estimating Memory Usage for Your Control System Use the following to calculate memory usage for your control system 177 110 Total Memory Usage 1024 Total Memory Usage from above Total Memory Remaining Note B 30 Determine the total instruction words used by the instructions in your program and enter the result Refer to the table on page B 25 Multiply the total number of rungs by 0 75 and enter the result Do not count the END rungs in each file To account for controller overhead use 177 To account for application data use 110 Total steps through 4 This is t
28. amp either the Target Node is not there or it does not respond because the MSG packet was corrupted in transmission 13 9 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual El When a NAK occurs the EW bit is cleared at the next end of scan Note that the NR bit will only be set for DH 485 and NAK conditions An error code 02H Target Node is busy is received which causes the NR bit to be set The ER bit is also set which indicates that the MSG instruction failed Monitor the NR bit If it is set indicating that the Target Node is busy you may want to initiate some other process e g an alarm or a retry later The NR bit is cleared when the rung logic preceding the MSG changes from false to true When an ACK occurs the Target Node sends one of three responses shown in Step 6 E Following the successful receipt of the packet the Target Node sends a reply packet The reply packet will contain one of the following responses I have successfully performed your write request I have successfully performed your read request and here is your data I have not performed your request because of an error At the next end of scan following the Target Node s reply the MicroLogix 1000 controller examines the MSG packet from the target device If the reply contains T have successfully performed your write request the DN bit is set and the ST bit is cleared The MSG instruction is complete If the MSG rung is false the
29. how to use the instruction In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling machine that shows the program flow control instructions in use Program Flow Control Instructions Instruction Purpose Page Mnemonic Name JMP and Jump to Label and Jump forward or backward to the specified label 10 2 LBL Label instruction JSR SBR Jump to Jump to a designated subroutine and return 10 4 and RET Subroutine Subroutine and Return from Subroutine MCR Master Control Turn off all non retentive outputs in a section of 10 7 Reset ladder program TND Temporary End Mark a temporary end that halts program 10 8 execution SUS Suspend Identifies specific conditions for program 10 8 debugging and system troubleshooting IIM Immediate Input Program an Immediate Input with Mask 10 9 with Mask IOM Immediate Output Program an Immediate Output with Mask 10 9 with Mask 10 1 e2 E E E i fe fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual About the Program Flow Control Instructions Use these instructions to control the sequence in which your program is executed Jump JMP and Label LBL Use these instructions in pairs to skip portions of the ladder program JMP If the Rung Containing the ILL Jump Instruction is THEN the Program Execution Times True Skips from the rung containing the JMP instruction to the usec when
30. wy Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1000 User Programmable Controllers Manual Bulletin 1761 Controllers Table of Contents Table of Contents Preface mmm enes P 1 Who Should Use this Manual lesser P 1 Purpose of this Manual 0 0002 rr rr sr sr rss ss ee P 1 Common Techniques Used in this Manual 200005 P 5 Allen Bradley SUPPOIt sseseeerrerrerr rer rr rr rer rr rr str ees P 5 Hardware 1 Installing Your Controller Compliance to European Union Directives sssseerserserrs ers rea 1 2 Hardware Overview si ach 0rs eke p eR C EIN pe a el eek e EGRE 1 2 Master Control Relay i v sen ERG er rer rr rr rr rr Kee 1 4 Using Surge Suppressors usse kde ea ey howe Ba ee oe 1 8 Safety Considerations soseeeseerrerreer reses ees 1 10 Power Considerations lt 2 a24 2 cesar eb LEE PU rr ERE 1 12 Preventing Excessive Heat 0 0 e eee eee 1 13 Controller Spacing ess daw ede ti rese be aes ca RAE Dawa 1 14 Mounting the Controller 0 0 0 0 cece eee 1 15 2 Wiring Your Controller Grounding Guidelines 0 00 cee ees 2 2 Sinking and Sourcing Circuits 0 aasa esaea 2 3 Wiring Recommendations 0 0 0 cee ee 2 4 Wiring Diagrams Discrete Input and Output Voltage Ranges 2 7 1761 L32AWA Wiring Diagram 2 0 0 ee 2 9 Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Controllers 2 22 Grounding Your Analog Cable
31. 1000 controllers You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic If you do not obtain the proper training before using this product Purpose of this Manual This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1000 controllers It describes the procedures you use to install wire program and troubleshoot your controller This manual explains how to install and wire your controllers gives you an overview of the MicroLogix 1000 controller system e provides the MicroLogix 1000 controllers instruction set contains application examples to show the instruction set in use See your programming software user manual for information on programming your MicroLogix M 1000 controller For information on using the Hand Held Programmer with the MicroLogix 1000 controllers see the MicroLogix 1000 with Hand Held Programmer HHP User Manual Publication 1761 6 2 P 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Contents of this Manual Tab Chapter Title Contents Describes the purpose background and scope of this Preface manual Also specifies the audience for whom this manual is intended 1 Installing Your Provides controller installation procedures and system Controller safety considerations Hardware 2 Wiring Your Controller Provides wiring guidelines and diagrams 3 Connecting the Gives information on wiring your contro
32. 1761L32BWB 2 15 analog 2 24 installing the micro controller 1 1 instruction execution time worksheet B 31 instruction memory usage worksheet B 30 instruction set C 1 integer file N7 4 6 interrupt latency STL 11 18 user B 29 interrupt priorities 11 19 IOM Immediate Output with Mask 10 9 isolated link coupler installing 3 7 J JMP Jump 10 2 JSR Jump to Subroutine 10 4 Index 8 Jump JMP 10 2 entering parameters 10 2 using 10 2 Jump to Subroutine JSR 10 4 nesting subroutine files 10 5 using 10 5 L Label LBL 10 2 entering parameters 10 2 using 10 3 ladder logic applying to your schematics 4 14 developing your logic program 4 15 LBL Label 10 2 LEDs 14 2 error with controller 14 3 normal controller operation 14 2 LEQ Less Than or Equal 7 4 LES Less Than 7 3 Less Than LES 7 3 Less Than or Equal LEQ 7 4 LFL LIFO Load 9 26 LFU LIFO Unload 9 26 LIFO Load LFL 9 26 operation 9 26 LIFO Unload LFU 9 26 operation 9 26 LIM Limit Test 7 6 Limit Test LIM 7 6 entering parameters 7 6 logical address 4 10 logical addresses specifying using mnemonics 4 12 M machine control principles of 4 2 manuals related P 3 Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ 7 5 entering parameters 7 5 Masked Move MVM 9 16 entering parameters 9 16 operation 9 17 updates to arithmetic status bits 9 16 Master Control Relay 1 4 Master Control Reset MCR 10 7 maste
33. 2400 Baud Rate 9600 48009 9600 19200 and 38400 Valid range is 0 254 decimal for MicroLogix 1000 Series C and later Node Address discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog Not configurable for 1 MicroLogix 1000 Series A and B discrete Parity None No Parity Stop Bits None 1 Applicable only to MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers Q If retentive communication data is lost default is 1200 for MicroLogix 1000 Series A B or C discrete only For MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog if retentive communication data is lost baud rate defaults to 9600 N 255 for MicroLogix 1000 Series A and B discrete N 6 for MicroLogix 1000 Series C and later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog D 2 Understanding the Communication Protocols Parameter Options Default Error Detection None CRC DLE NAK retries None N retries DLE ENQ retries None N retries ACK Timeout None 1s pe None Enabled Control Line None No Handshaking Embedded Responses None Enabled Applicable only to MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers Q If retentive communication data is lost default is 1200 for MicroLogix 1000 Series A B or C discrete only For MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog if retentive communication data is lost baud rate defaults
34. 9 4 example 9 6 updates to arithmetic status bits 9 4 Convert to BCD TOD 9 3 changes to the math register 9 3 example 9 4 updates to arithmetic status bits 9 3 converting analog data 5 5 Converting Analog Input Data 5 5 5 6 COP Copy File 9 10 Copy File COP 9 10 using 9 11 entering parameters 9 11 Count Down CTD 6 18 using status bits 6 19 Count Up CTU 6 17 using status bits 6 18 counter instructions Count Down CTD 6 18 Count Up CTU 6 17 overview 6 15 addressing structure 6 16 Index entering parameters 6 15 how counters work 6 17 Reset RES 6 20 CTD Count Down 6 18 CTU Count Up 6 17 D data files 4 6 addressing 4 10 organization 4 6 types 4 10 file indicator 4 13 data handling instructions 9 2 about 9 2 Convert from BCD FRD 9 4 Convert to BCD TOD 9 3 Copy File COP 9 10 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD 9 8 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC 9 9 FIFO and LIFO instructions overview 9 23 Fill File FLL 9 10 in the paper drilling machine application example 9 28 move and logical instructions overview 9 13 DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 9 8 DDV Double Divide 8 10 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD 9 8 entering parameters 9 8 updates to arithmetic status bits 9 8 developing your logic program a model 4 15 DF1 fullduplex protocol configuration parameters D 2 connecting 3 2 description D 2 example system configuration D 4 using amodem 3 3 D 9 DF1 halfduplex protocol
35. B3 506 sers pe OSR Optional Analog Input Software Calibration MOV e9 9Be e2 6e Bode MOVE Source ANALOG IN Dest LO CAL VALUE ar a A MOV ny umm MOVE Source ANALOG IN Dest HI CAL VALUE Sh a a eee a Rees aen taie SUBS SS SS SSS eae CSS SUBTRACT Source A HI_CAL VALUE 0 Source B LO CAL VALUE 0 Dest CAL_SPAN 0 dpi ee S Sere eee eS Se XSUB 2 4 024 SUBTRACT x Source A SCALE HI 0 Source B SCALE LO 0 Dest SCALE SPAN 0 gene peditem mte de iet MUL MULTIPLY Source A SCALE SPAN 0 Source B 10000 10000 Dest N7 96 0 PES SSeS SSeS ares seni XDDV 2 2s 2 DOUBLE DIVIDE Pecan Source CAL SPAN 0 Dest SLOPE X10K 0 Poe Se arem ee een o o e eh pus o _ tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 2 3 CONVERSION ENABLE F 6 MUs aten score MULTIPLY Source A LO CAL VALUE 0 Source B SLOPE X10K 0 Dest N7 98 0 diocesi A e A ASEE DDV E meann e DOUBLE DIVIDE 4 Source 10000 10000 Dest N7 99 0 PEETER SUB SUBTRACT Source A SCALE LOW 0 Source B N7 99 0 Dest OFFSET 0 Set erie ee hes els Overflow Trap S2 5 0 ENAS NESS RR U FSC Aste sacs Sere ese aS SCALE fats Source A ANALOG_IN Rate 10000 SLOPE X10K Offset TuS
36. HP Accumulator gt High Preset Bit LP Accumulator Low Preset Bit IV Overflow Caused High Speed Counter Interrupt Bit IN Underflow Caused High Speed Counter Interrupt Bit IH High Preset Reached Caused Interrupt Bit IL Low Preset Reached Caused Interrupt Bit PE High Speed Counter Interrupt Pending Bit LS High Speed Counter Interrupt Lost Bit IE High Speed Counter Interrupt Enable Bit e2 E E E i fe fe n Counter preset and accumulated values are stored as signed integers Using Status Bits The high speed counter status bits are retentive When the high speed counter is first configured bits 3 7 14 and 15 are reset and bit 1 IE is set Counter Up Enable Bit CU bit 15 is used with all of the high speed counter types If the HSC instruction is true the CU bit is set to one If the HSC instruction is false the CU bit is set to zero Do not write to this bit 12 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Counter Down Enable Bit CD bit 14 is used with the Bidirectional Counters modes 3 8 If the HSC instruction is true the CD bit is set to one If the HSC instruction is false the CD bit is set to zero Do not write to this bit High Preset Reached Bit DN bit 13 For the Up Counters modes 1 and 2 this bit is an edge triggered latch bit This bit is set when the high preset is reached You can reset this bit with an OTU instruction or by executing an RAC or RES i
37. Refer to pages 2 23 through 2 25 for additional information on analog wiring ae 14 30 VDC rir og Analog o VDC VDC Channels D DC 6 8 1 9 IA 14 0 IAT IA IA IA 2 IAS 4 Leconte SHD v V9 Q0 SHD 14 e OT OA OA0 OAD oQ 85 261 V r A VAC vc VAC vac ln Lt LN f ypc 00 voc OM voc OR OB ypc O4 Of O6 O7 USED SHD Vu C Analog Channel gt 1761 L20BWA 5A Discrete Input Voltage Range OV dc OV dc 5V dc 14V de 26 4V de 55 C 131 F 5V de 14V de 30V de 30 C 86 F Off On 1761 L20BWA 5A Relay Output Voltage Range 0V ac 0V dc 5V ac 264V ac 5V dc 125V dc Operating Range 2 20 1761 L20BWB 5A Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Wiring Your Controller Note Refer to page 2 4 for additional discrete configuration options co G Refer to pages 2 23 through 2 25 for additional information on analog wiring O I a 14 30 VDC Me ag 14 30 VDC ge E Analog VDC VDC VDC VDC 4 Channels 19 o A1 IA 14 0 IA IA2 IAS IA SHD V V SHD I bl C vac l VAC VAC l wor OA OA0 OAO OA voc Of vpc O2 O8 yoo O4 Ol Of O7 USED SHD Vs It Analog Channel 1761 L20BWB 5A Discrete Input Voltage Range 0V dc 5V dc 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F On 1761 L20BWB 5A Relay Output Voltage Range 0V ac 0V dc 5V ac 264V ac 5V dc 125V dc
38. S 5 0 Overflow Trap Dynamic Configuration When this bit is set by the controller it indicates that a mathematical overflow has occurred in the ladder program See S 0 1 for more information If this bit is ever set upon execution of the END or TND instruction major error 0020 is declared To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a math instruction ADD SUB MUL DIV DDV NEG SCL TOD or FRD take appropriate action and then clear bit S 5 0 using an OTU instruction with S 5 0 S 5 1 Reserved NA NA S 5 2 Control Register Error Dynamic Configuration The LFU LFL FFU FFL BSL BSR SQO SQC and SQL instructions are capable of generating this error When bit S 5 2 is set it indicates that the error bit of a control word used by the instruction has been set If this bit is ever set upon execution of the END or TND instruction major error 0020 is declared To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a control register instruction take appropriate action and then clear bit 5 2 using an OTU instruction with S 5 2 Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable B 16 Programming Reference Address Bit Classification Description 5 3 Major Error Detected Dynamic When set the major error code S 6 While Executing Configuration repres
39. This is done because the debounces the Note changing the BCD If this were Therefore the minimum paper thickness zd n ob H 5 l c 12 9 0 ob md lt b a MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 7 5 Keeps a running total of how many inches of paper have been drilled with the current drill bit to the running total executes every time the rung is true DEPTH limit switch for more than 1 program scan Every time a hole is drilled kept in 1 4 ins converted value of the BCD thumbwheel on inputs I 0 11 I 0 14 Drill Drill Wear 1 4 in Depth LS OSR 1 increments I 0 B3 ADD sasa h 2eeeee OSR ADD 4 24 Source A N7 12 0 Source B N7 10 0 Dest N7 10 0 Rung 7 6 When the number of 1 4 in increments surpasses 1000 finds out increments are past 1000 and stores in N7 20 in increments and re initializes the 1 4 in many increments were beyond 1000 1 4 in increments Source A Source B E 16 Add 1 to the total of SUB SUBTRACT Source A N7 10 0 Source B 1000 Dest N7 20 0 1 4 in Thousands ADD ADD Source A 1 Source B N7 11 0 Dest N7 11 o adds the thickness in 1 4 ins The OSR is necessary because the ADD and the drill body wo
40. after the first 2 seconds of Start up your system operation Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists 0009 FATAL The controller software has detected an Cycle power on your unit INTERNAL invalid condition within the hardware during Download your program and re HARDWARE power up processing within the first 2 initialize any necessary data ERROR seconds of operation Start up your system Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists 0010 INCOMPATIBLE The downloaded program is not configured If you want to use a micro controller PROCESSOR for a micro controller with the program reconfigure your controller with your programming software choose Bul 1761 0016 STARTUP The system has powered up in the REM Either reset bit S 1 9 if this is PROTECTION Run mode Bit S 1 13 is set and the user consistent with your application AFTER fault routine is run before beginning the first requirements and change the POWERLOSS scanofthe program mode back to REM Run or S 1 9 IS SET clear S 1 13 the major fault bit 0018 USER An incompatible program was downloaded Check the configuration and make PROGRAM IS Either the program does not have the sure the correct processor is INCOMPATIBLE correct number of files or it does not have selected WITH the correct size data files The default f you want to use a micro OPERATING program is loaded controller with the program SYST
41. and direction inputs F4 Pulse and direction Bidirectional operation uses both pulse Count Direction Reset Hold with external reset and hold and direction inputs with external reset and hold inputs F5 Up and down Bidirectional operation uses both pulse UpT Downt Not Used Not Used and direction inputs F6 Up and down Bidirectional operation uses both pulse UpT Down Resetf Hold with external reset and hold and direction inputs with external reset and hold inputs F7 Encoder Bidirectional operation uses quadrature A B Not Used Not Used encoder inputs F8 Encoder Bidirectional operation uses both A B Z Hold with external reset and hold quadrature encoder inputs with external reset and hold inputs One difference between Up Counters and Bidirectional Counters is that for Bidirectional Counters the accumulator and preset values are not changed by the high speed counter when the presets are reached The RAC and HSL instructions must be used for this function The Up Counters clear the accumulator and re load the high preset values whenever the preset is reached 12 7 e2 E E E fe fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using the Up Counter and the Up Counter with Reset and Hold Operation Up counters are used when the parameter being measured is uni directional such as material being fed into a machine or as a tachometer reco
42. and the current position in the file You should not use the control address for any other instruction 15 18 11 08 00 EN DN ER FD Length of sequencer file Position Using Application Specific Instructions Status bits of the control structure include Found Bit FD bit 08 SQC only When the status of all non masked bits in the source address match those of the corresponding reference word the FD bit is set This bit is assessed each time the SQC instruction is evaluated while the rung is true Error Bit ER bit 11 is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S5 2 is also set Both bits must be cleared Done Bit DN bit 13 is set by the SQO or SQC instruction after it has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false Enable EN bit 15 is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates the SQO or SQC instruction is enabled Length is the number of steps of the sequencer file starting at position 1 The maximum number you can enter is 104 words Position 0 is the startup position The instruction resets wraps to position 1 at each cycle completion e2 c E E i fe fe n Position is the word location or step in the sequencer file from to which the instruction moves data You may use
43. condition occurs It is reset when the interrupt is disabled This bit is also set when the high speed counter is first configured Do not write to this bit 12 5 e2 E E E 5 fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual High Speed Counter HSC HSC HIGH e Count High Accum Use this instruction to configure the high speed counter Only one HSC instruction VE Le can be used in a program The high speed counter is not operational until the first er C5 Preset yea eof Execution Times True False usec when 21 true execution of the HSC instruction When the HSC rung is false the high speed counter is disabled from counting but all other HSC features are operational The Counter address of the HSC instruction is fixed at C5 0 After the HSC is configured the image accumulator C5 0 ACC is updated with the 00 21 00 Current hardware accumulator value every time the HSC instruction is evaluated as true or false Entering Parameters 12 6 Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Type indicates the counter selected Refer to page 12 7 for making your high speed counter selection Each type is available with reset and hold functionality High Preset is the accumulated value that triggers a user specified action such as updating outputs or generating a high speed counter interrupt Accumulator is the number of acc
44. functions Master Control Relay MCR A mandatory hardwired relay that can be de energized by any series connected emergency stop switch Whenever the MCR is de energized its contacts open to de energize all application I O devices mnemonic A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex or lengthy set of information modem Modulator demodulator Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a communication line modes Selected methods of operation Example run test or program negative logic The use of binary logic in such a way that 0 represents the voltage level normally associated with logic 1 for example 0 5V 1 OV Positive is more conventional for example 1 5V 0 OV network A series of stations nodes connected by some type of communication medium A network may be made up of a single link or multiple links nominal input current The current at nominal input voltage normally closed Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de energized or the switch is de activated they are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated In ladder programming a symbol that will allow logic continuity flow if the referenced input is logic 0 when evaluated normally open Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is de energized or the switch is de activated They are closed when the relay is energized or the switch is
45. or LFU instruction points past the length parameter does not CROSSED DATA the end of a data file point past the data file FILE Reload the program and enter the BOUNDARIES REM Run mode 0034 NEGATIVE A negative value was loaded to a timer If the program is moving values to VALUE IN preset or accumulator the accumulated or preset word of TIMER PRESET a timer make certain these values OR are not negative ACCUMULATOR Reload the program and enter the REM Run mode 0035 ILLEGAL The program contains a Temporary End Correct the program INSTRUCTION TND instruction in file 3 4 or 5 when itis e Reload the program and enter the TND IN being used as an interrupt subroutine REM Run mode INTERRUPT FILE 0037 INVALID Either a zero 0 or a negative high preset Check to make sure the presets PRESETS was loaded to counter C5 0 when the are valid LOADED TO HSC was an Up counter or the high preset Correct the program reload and HIGH SPEED was lower than or equal to the low preset enter the REM Run mode COUNTER when the HSC was a Bidirectional counter 14 10 Troubleshooting Your System Piror Advisory Code M Description Recommended Action essage Hex 0038 SUBROUTINE A RET instruction is in the main program Remove the RET instruction RETURN file file 2 Reload the program and enter the INSTRUCTION REM Run mode RET IN PROGRAM FILE 2 0040 OUTPUT When outputs were written and read back
46. s H9 04 NOT NOT AC 0 1 ve 1 3 AC 1 4 jo Wr 1 9 USED USED COM COM 85 264 VAC 7 r E vc I vac VAC vac l vac L1 BIN voc 0 0 voc OM voc O voc 0 3 voc OA 0 5 MOOIOO OO OOOO OOO CB S ES CR cA CR VAC2 VDC 1 VDC2 VDC 3 VAC 1 VAC 2 VDC 1 VDC 2 VDC 3 VAC I COM COM COM COM COM 1761 L16AWA Input Voltage Range OV ac 20V ac 79V ac 132V ac Off On 1761 L16AWA Output Voltage Range 0V ac 5V ac 264V ac 0V dc 5V dc 125V dc 2 Operating Range 2 8 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L32AWA Wiring Diagram 79 132V ac HL 79 132Vac 3 o Lo G gt o Ln G I T AC ISED COM vc l vc 1 vic 1 v c vac l voc O0 vpc OM voc O OB wpc O4 OF o6 OF voc OB OM oho Omi 1761 L32AWA Input Voltage Range OV ac 20V ac 79V ac 132V ac Off On 1761 L32AWA Output Voltage Range 0V ac 5V ac 264V ac 0V dc 5V dc 125V dc Operating Range 2 9 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1761 L10BWA Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration 1761 L10BWA Input Voltage Range 24V D L DC OUT J ip AMEN 14 30V DC NOT NOT NOT NOT USED USED USED USED VAC VAC l voc 92 voco 3 Refer to page 2 3 f
47. 0 O teeni kisasa ly 599 Teen ese 15 5 2 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 6 2 When the drill is retracting after drilling a hole the body of the drill will actuate the DRILL HOME limit switch When this happens the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned off the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is turned off to indicate the drilling process is complete and the conveyor is restarted Drill Drill Drill Home LS Retract Retract Z O 0 0 essa cee 52 l ksss ea SNRA SRA NER ae SU HAES aa D A Drill Sequence Start B3 U 32 Conveyor Start Stop Using Comparison Instructions 7 Using Comparison Instructions This chapter contains general information about comparison instructions and explains how they function in your application program Each of the comparison instructions includes information on what the instruction symbol looks like typical execution time for the instruction e how to use the instruction i In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling E machine that shows the comparison instructions in use 2 Comparison Instructions s Instruction Purpose Page Mnemonic Name EQU Equal Test whether two values are equal 7 3 NEQ Not Equal Test whether one value is not equal to a second 7 3 value LES Less Than Test whether one value is less than a second 7 3 value LEQ Less Than or
48. 1 0 Vt 1 2 1 3 DC 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 18 1 9 1140 1 1 2 143 144 WS We Wir Wes 1 9 r DC IN vc l VAC vc TONS voc OM voc O2 O3 vnc O4 Of Ol O7 voc O8 Ol ONO OM 1761 L32BWB Input Voltage Range 0V dc 5V dc 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F On 1761 L32BWB Output Voltage Range 0V ac 5V ac 264V ac 0V dc 5V dc 125V dc Operating Range 2 15 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1761 L32AAA Wiring Diagram 79 132V ac a 79 132Vac 3 VAC vic vic voc O0 vpc OM ypc OR OB ypo OM o5 VAC 1761 L32AAA Input Voltage Range OV ac 20V ac 79V ac 132V ac 1761 L32AAA Output Voltage Range OV ac 85V ac 264V ac Operating Range 2 16 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L16BBB Wiring Diagrams Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 4 for additional configuration options E 14 30V DC j 1430VD0 O voc VDC voc VDC COM i am NOT NOT D USED USED COM poes TAN vic I wc p 24V NOT C DC voc 00 ypc Oh 24v O O8 Of Of 24V USED 1761 L16BBB Input Voltage Range 0V dc 5V dc 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F On 1761 L16BBB Output Voltage Range 0V dc 20 4V dc 26 4V dc Operating Range 2 17 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1761 L32BBB Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 4 for addi
49. 1 14 troubleshooting 14 2 type 1 2 wiring 2 4 wiring diagram 2 15 32bit addition and subtraction 8 6 example 8 6 math overflow selection bit S 2 14 8 6 A accessing processor files normal operation 4 8 power up 4 9 Add ADD 8 4 updates to arithmetic status bits 8 4 ADD Add 8 4 addressing data files 4 10 indexed 4 12 logical 4 10 using mnemonics 4 12 addressing modes C 2 direct addressing C 2 immediate addressing C 2 indexed addressing C 3 AIC applying power to 3 17 attaching to the network 3 18 connecting 3 10 isolated modem 3 12 network 3 12 pointtopoint 3 11 installing 3 18 recommended user supplied components 3 16 selecting cable 3 14 AllenBradley contacting for assistance P 5 14 11 AllenBradley Support P 5 analog I O configuration 5 3 I O image 5 2 input current range 2 24 input filter and update times 5 3 input software calibration F 1 input voltage range 2 24 output current range 2 24 output voltage range 2 24 voltage and current ranges 2 24 Index analog channels wiring 2 23 analog controllers 1 2 minimizing electrical noise 2 22 analog input specifications A 7 analog output specifications A 8 And AND 9 18 updates to arithmetic status bits 9 18 AND And 9 18 application example programs paper drilling machine E 2 using the MSG instruction 13 13 application specific instructions 11 2 about 11 2 bit shift instructions overview 11 3 Bi
50. 2 Master Control Reset MCR 10 7 Return RET 10 4 Subroutine SBR 10 4 Suspend SUS 10 8 Temporary End TND 10 8 programming overview 4 1 protection methods for contacts 1 8 protocol switching automatic 3 19 Index publications related P 3 Purpose of this Manual P 1 Q quadrature encoder input 12 14 R RAC HighSpeed Counter Reset Accumulator 12 22 related publications P 3 relay contact rating table A 7 relays surge suppressors for 1 10 remote packet support D 21 replacement parts controller A 12 RES Reset 6 20 Reset RES 6 20 resetting the highspeed counter accumulator 12 21 operation 12 21 RET Return 10 4 Retentive Timer RTO 6 13 using status bits 6 13 Return RET 10 4 nesting subroutine files 10 5 using 10 6 RS232 communication interface D 1 RTO Retentive Timer 6 13 S Safety Considerations Disconnecting Main Power 1 11 overview 1 10 Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit 1 12 Power Distribution 1 11 Safety Circuits 1 11 SBR Subroutine 10 4 Scale Data SCL 8 12 Index 11 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual application example 8 13 entering parameters 8 12 updates to arithmetic status bits 8 12 SCL Scale Data 8 12 Selectable Timed Disable STD 11 20 example 11 20 using 11 20 Selectable Timed Enable STE 11 20 example 11 20 using 11 20 Selectable Timed Interrupt STI function basic programming procedure 11
51. 23 60 6 60 Entering Parameters The Low Limit Test and High Limit values can be word addresses or constants restricted to the following combinations Ifthe Test parameter is a constant both the Low Limit and High Limit parameters must be word addresses Ifthe Test parameter is a word address the Low Limit and High Limit parameters can be either a constant or a word address True False Status of the Instruction If the Low Limit has a value equal to or less than the High Limit the instruction is true when the Test value is between the limits or is equal to either limit If the Test value is outside the limits the instruction is false as shown below False True False 32 768 32 767 Low Limit High Limit Example low limit less than high limit Low High Instruction is True Instruction is False Limit Limit when Test value is when Test value is 5 8 5 through 8 32 768 through 4 and 9 through 32 767 7 6 Using Comparison Instructions If the Low Limit has a value greater than the High Limit the instruction is false when the Test value is between the limits If the Test value is equal to either limit or outside the limits the instruction is true as shown below True False True 32 768 32 767 High Limit Low Limit Example low limit greater than high limit LOW High Instruction is True when Test value is nstruction is False Limit Limit when Test value is
52. 24 15 The actual address used by the instruction is N7 25 F oi Instruction Valid Addressing Re Instruction Description Parameters Mode s Valid File Types Valid Value Ranges ADD Add source A immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max source B immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct AND Logical AND source A immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct source B immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct BSL Bit Shift Left file indexed direct O I S B N Not Applicable control direct R element level Not Applicable bit address direct O 1 SB T C R N Not Applicable bit level length contained in the 0 2048 control register BSR Bit Shift Right file indexed direct O I SB N Not Applicable control direct R element level Not Applicable bit address direct O 1 SB T C R N Not Applicable bit level D Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses C 3 o o es co i o _ 3 tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual x Instruction Valid Addressi
53. 5 22 fe o X o aS a gt 2 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Identifying Controller Faults While a program is executing a fault may occur within the operating system or your program When a fault occurs you have various options to determine what the fault is and how to correct it This section describes how to clear faults and provides a list of possible advisory messages with recommended corrective actions Automatically Clearing Faults You can automatically clear a fault when cycling power to the controller by setting either one or both of the following status bits in the status file e Fault Override at Powerup bit S 1 8 Run Always bit S 1 12 ATTENTION Clearing a fault using the Run Always bit S 1 12 causes the controller to immediately enter the REM Run mode Make sure you fully understand the use of this bit before incorporating it into your program Refer to page B 8 for more information Refer to appendix B for more information on status bits Note You can declare your own application specific major fault by writing your own unique value to S 6 and then setting bit S 1 13 to prevent reusing system defined codes The recommended values for user defined faults is FF00 to FFOF Manually Clearing Faults Using the Fault Routine 14 6 The occurrence of recoverable or non recoverable user faults causes file 3 to be executed If the fault is recoverable the subroutine can be
54. 6 5 yi 6 0 Machine RUN Latch B3 e SSS e es aS 0 78 Beginning a Subroutine in File 7 Using Comparison Instructions This section of ladder keeps track of the total inches of paper the current drill bit has drilled through As the current bit wears out a light illuminates on the operator panel below to warn the operator to change the drill bit For 32 I O controllers If the operator ignores this warning too long this ladder shuts the machine down until the operator changes the bit OPERATOR PANEL Start I 1 6 Stopl1 7 Change Tool Soon 0 3 4 Thumbwheel for Tool Change Reset Thickness in 1 4 3 Hole I 1 11 1 1 14 Keyswitch 1 1 8 Change Tool Now 0 3 6 5 Hole 1 1 9 1 1 10 7 9 D pru Oo O s A MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 7 09 This rung examines the number of 1 4 thousands that have accumulated over the life of the current drill bit If the bit has drilled between 100 000 101 999 1 4 increments of paper then the change drill light illuminates steadily When the value is between 102 000 103 999 then the change drill light will flash at a 1 28 second rate When the value reaches 105 000 then the change drill light flashes and the change drill now light illuminates 1 4 100 000 Thousands 1 4 increments have occurred GEQ B3 GRTR THAN OR EQUAL
55. 767 indexed direct address B immediate direct O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct D Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses C 14 Understanding the Communication Protocols D Understanding the Communication Protocols Use the information in this appendix to understand the differences in communication protocols The following protocols are supported from the RS 232 communication channel e DFI Full Duplex and DF1 Half Duplex Slave All MicroLogix 1000 controllers support the DF1 full duplex protocol Series D or later and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers also support DF1 half duplex slave protocol e DH 485 Series C or later and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers can communicate on DH 485 networks using an AIC Advanced Interface Converter For information about required network connecting equipment see chapter 3 Connecting the System RS 232 Communication Interface RS 232 is an Electronics Industries Association EIA standard that specifies the electrical mechanical and functional characteristics for serial binary communication It provides you with a variety of system configuration possibilities RS 232 is a definition of electrical characteristics it is not a protocol One of the biggest benefits of the RS 232 interface is that it lets you integrate telephone and radio modems into
56. Attaching the AIC 1 3 18 Take care when installing the AIC in an enclosure so that the cable connecting the MicroLogix 1000 controller to the AIC does not interfere with the enclosure door Carefully plug the terminal block into the DH 485 port on the AIC you are putting on the network Allow enough cable slack to prevent stress on the plug Provide strain relief for the Belden cable after it is wired to the terminal block This guards against breakage of the Belden cable wires Connecting the System Establishing Communication When you connect a MicroLogix 1000 controller to a network it automatically finds which protocol is active DF1 or DH 485 and establishes communication accordingly Therefore no special configuration is required to connect to either network o Lo G gt o Ln G I However to shorten the connection time you can specify which protocol the controller should attempt to establish communication with first This is done using the Primary Protocol bit S 0 10 The default setting for this bit is DF1 0 If the primary protocol bit is set to DF1 the MicroLogix 1000 controller will attempt to connect using the configured DF1 protocol either full duplex or half duplex slave To have the controller first attempt DH 485 communication set this bit to 1 For DH 485 networks that will only contain MicroLogix controllers at least one controller must have its primary protocol bit set to 1 so tha
57. B are equal the instruction is logically true If these values are not equal the instruction is logically false Source A must be a word address Source B can be either a constant or word address Negative integers are stored in two s complement form Execution Times usec when True False 21 52 6 60 Not Equal NEQ te E E i o2 fe n Use the NEQ instruction to test whether two values are not equal If source A and source B are not equal the instruction is logically true If the two values are equal the instruction is logically false Source A must be a word address Source B can be either a constant or word address Execution Times Negative integers are stored in two s complement form usec when True False 21 52 6 60 Less Than LES Use the LES instruction to test whether one value source A is less than another source B If the value at source A is less than the value of source B the instruction is logically true If the value at source A is greater than or equal to the value of source B the instruction is logically false Execution Times usec when Source A must be a word address Source B can be either a constant or word address Negative integers are stored in two s complement form True False 23 60 6 60 7 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Less Than or Equal LEQ LEQ LESS THAN Sosrce A OM EQUAL fcerce B
58. Bit Shift Instructions Overview 0 0000 eee 11 3 Bil Shift Let BSW ins tice a tos tied ee Sonde ery ERU d dte d 11 5 Bit Shift Right BSR Alevoe tees thue talus ers rr rr sr rr fda 11 6 Sequencer Instructions Overview llle 11 7 Sequencer Output SQO and Sequencer Compare SQC 11 7 Sequencer Load SQL 200 e eee ee eee 11 14 Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function Overview 11 17 Selectable Timed Disable STD and Enable STE 11 20 Selectable Timed Start STS 0020s 11 22 Interrupt Subroutine INT 000 ser rr eee 11 22 Table of Contents Application Specific Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example ii ara ss ske sedda a State oie cade ved ane NN ok de 11 23 12 Using High Speed Counter Instructions About the High Speed Counter Instructions 12 2 High Speed Counter Instructions Overview usus 12 2 High Speed Counter HSC 0 000 eee 12 6 High Speed Counter Load HSL 0 0c rer eens 12 18 High Speed Counter Reset RES 000 eee eee 12 21 High Speed Counter Reset Accumulator RAC 12 22 High Speed Counter Interrupt Enable HSE and Disable HSD 12 23 Update High Speed Counter Image Accumulator OTE 12 24 What Happens to the HSC When Going to REM Run Mode 12 25 High Speed Counter Instruction in the Paper Drilli
59. Bulgaria e Canada e Chile e China PRC e Colombia e Costa Rica e Croatia e Cyprus e Czech Republic e Denmark Ecuador e Egypt e El Salvador e Finland e France e Germany e Greece e Guatemala e Honduras e Hong Kong e Hungary e Iceland e India e Indonesia e Ireland e Israel Italy Jamaica e Japan e Jordan e Korea e Kuwait e Lebanon e Malaysia e Mexico e Netherlands e New Zealand e Norway e Pakistan e Peru e Philippines e Poland e Portugal Puerto Rico e Qatar e Romania e Russia CIS e Saudi Arabia e Singapore e Slovakia e Slovenia e South Africa Republic e Spain e Sweden e Switzerland e Taiwan e Thailand Turkey United Arab Emirates e United Kingdom e United States e Uruguay e Venezuela e Yugoslavia Allen Bradley Headquarters 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Publication 1761 UM003B EN P June 2015 Supersedes Publication 1761 6 3 July 1998 Copyright 2015 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved
60. EN bit is cleared the next time the MSG instruction is scanned If the reply contains I have successfully performed your read request and here is your data the data is written to the appropriate data table the DN bit is set and the ST bit is cleared The MSG instruction function is complete If the MSG rung is false the EN bit is cleared the next time the MSG instruction is scanned If the reply contains I have not performed your request because of an error the ER bit is set and the ST bit is cleared The MSG instruction function is complete If the MSG rung is false the EN bit is cleared the next time the MSG instruction is scanned MSQ Instruction Error Codes Note Any MSG instruction that is in progress during a network protocol switch will not be processed and will be discarded For more information on network protocol switching see page 3 19 When an error condition occurs the error code is stored in the lower byte of the first control word assigned to the MSG instruction 13 10 Using the Message Instruction Error Code Description of Error Condition 02H Target node is busy 03H Target node cannot respond because message is too large 04H _ Target node cannot respond because it does not understand the command parameters OR the control block may have been inadvertently modified 05H Local processor is offline possible duplicate node situation 06H Target node cannot resp
61. If you are using a MSG instruction it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero not be used Poll Timeout is disabled if set to zero D 6 Understanding the Communication Protocols Parameter Description Default Delay time before transmission Required for 1761NET AIC physical half duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs delay time to change from transmit to 0 receive mode The valid range is 0 255 and can be set in increments of 5 ms Pre send Time Delay Specifies the number of times a slave device will attempt to resend a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the master device For use in noisy environments where message packets may become corrupted in transmission The valid range is 0 255 Slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued Saves modem transmission power when there is no message to transmit Toggles between Yes No and No Message Retries EOT Suppression LIII T Rockwell Software WiNtelligent LINX RSLinx 2 0 or higher SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 or PLC 5 processors configured for DF1 Half RS 232 Duplex Master DF1 Protocol MicroLogix 1000 SLC 5 03 Processor MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controller Modular Controller Programmable Controller Programmable Controller SLC 500 Series D Series D Series D Fixed I O Controller with 1747 KE Interface Module o o es LU t o _ tc D 7 MicroLogi
62. Operating Range 2 21 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Controllers Inputs on analog employ digital high frequency filters that significantly reduce the effects of electrical noise on input signals However because of the variety of applications and environments where analog controllers are installed and operating it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by the input filters Several specific steps can be taken to help reduce the effects of environmental noise on analog signals e install the MicroLogix 1000 system in a properly rated i e NEMA enclosure Make sure that the MicroLogix 1000 system is properly grounded use Belden cable 8761 for wiring the analog channels making sure that the drain wire and foil shield are properly earth grounded at one end of the cable route the Belden cable separate from any other wiring Additional noise immunity can be obtained by routing the cables in grounded conduit A system may malfunction due to a change in the operating environment after a period of time We recommend periodically checking system operation particularly when new machinery or other noise sources are installed near the MicroLogix 1000 system Grounding Your Analog Cable Use shielded communication cable Belden 8761 The Belden cable has two signal wires black and clear one drain wire and a foil shield The drain w
63. Outputs ACC and Interrupt Subroutine resume their previous state apply the following Rung 2 0 No action required Remember that all OUT instructions are zeroed when entering the REM Run mode Use SET RST instructions in place of OUT instructions in your conditional logic requiring retention Sil HSL HSC LOAD 15 Counter c5 0 Source N7 0 Length 5 Rung 2 1 HSC Viet A eek Se A Re te et a eri m i ied eS ah HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Encoder Res H1d CD Counter C5 0 DN High Preset 1000 Accum 0 12 26 Using High Speed Counter Instructions Example 2 To enter the REM Run mode and retain the HSC ACC value while having the HSC Outputs and Interrupt Subroutine reassert themselves apply the following Rung 2 0 Unlatch the C5 0 HP and C5 0 LP bits during the first scan BEFORE the HSC instruction is executed for the first time Sl XHSBhzees e eeeem HSC LOAD 15 Counter C5 0 Source N7 0 Length 5 SRA SSE SRS e R 221 ung S 1 C5 0 sel ERNA RNA ERNA U 15 HP E C5 0 U o LP o a Rung 2 2 tHSO o esse oR Heiter Se Ete r pw ces ene emot aries NS NG ee rs i HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Encoder Res Hld CD Counter C5 0 DN High Preset 1000 A
64. Programmable Controllers User Manual Timer On Delay TON mn Use the TON instruction to delay the turning on or off of an output The TON a instruction begins to count timebase intervals when rung conditions become true As long as rung conditions remain true the timer increments its accumulated value ACC each scan until it reaches the preset value PRE The accumulated value is reset when rung conditions go false regardless of whether the timer has timed out Execution Times usec when True False 38 34 30 38 Using Status Bits This Bit Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Timer Done Bit DN bit 13 accumulated value is equal to or greater than the preset value rung conditions go false Timer Enable Bit EN bit 14 rung conditions are true rung conditions go false Timer Timing Bit TT bit 15 rung conditions are true and the accumulated value is less than the preset value rung conditions go false or when the done bit is set When the controller changes from the REM Run or REM Test mode to the REM Program mode or user power is lost while the instruction is timing but has not reached its preset value the following occurs Timer Enable EN bit remains set Timer Timing TT bit remains set e Accumulated value ACC remains the same 6 10 Using Basic Instructions On returning to the REM Run or REM Test mode the following can happ
65. ST Message Length in elements transmitting message enabled EN control bit N7 0 8 address ERROR CODE 0 Error Code Desc MSG Instruction Status Bits 13 6 The right column in the display above lists the various MSG instruction status bits These are explained below Time Out Bit TO bit 08 Temporarily set this bit 1 to error out error code 37 an existing MSG instruction This bit has no effect unless the ST bit has first been set due to receiving an ACK an acknowledge Your application must supply its own timer whose preset value is the MSG timeout value This bit is reset on any false to true MSG rung transition Negative Response Bit NR bit 09 is set if the target processor is responding to your message but can not process the message at the present time The NR bit is reset at the next false to true MSG rung transition that has a transmit buffer available It is used to determine when to send retries The ER bit is also set at this time Use this feedback to initiate a retry of your message at a later time This bit is used with DH 485 protocol only Enabled and Waiting Bit EW bit 10 is set on any false to true MSG rung transition This bit is reset when an ACK or NAK no acknowledge is received or on any true to false MSG rung transition Note The operation of the EW bit has changed since Series C Error Bit ER bit 12 is set when message transmission has failed The ER bit is reset the next time the MS
66. Sinking Inputs Sourcing Inputs 14 30 VDC VDC 4 for Sourcing VDC for Sourcing VDC for Sinking VDC for Sinking 1 16 118 17 119 Sourcing Inputs Sinking Inputs 14 30 VDC mA VDC for Sourcing VDC for Sourcing VDC for Sinking MO 1 1 2 143 114 145 116 147 1 8 I9 Wiring Recommendations 2 4 ATTENTION Before you install and wire any device disconnect power to the controller system The following are general recommendations for wiring your controller system e Each wire terminal accepts 2 wires of the size listed below Wire Type Wire Size 2 wire maximum per terminal screw Solid 14 to 22 AWG Stranded 16 to 22 AWG Wiring Your Controller Refer to page 2 25 for wiring your high speed counter Note The diameter of the terminal screw heads is 5 5 mm 0 220 in The input and output terminals of the micro controller are designed for the following spade lugs o gt o A G I Call out Dimension 6 35 mm 0 250 in E 10 95 mm 0 431 in maximum L 14 63 mm 0 576 in maximum W 6 35 mm 0 250 in X 3 56 mm 0 140 in E C X 9 91 mm 0 390 in maximum We recommend using either of the following AMP spade lugs part number 53120 1 if using 22 16 AWG or part number 53123 1 if using 16 14 AWG Note If you use wires without lugs make sure the wires are securely captured by the pressure plat
67. Some programming devices support short addressing This allows you to eliminate the file number and file delimiter from addresses For example N7 2 N2 T4 12 ACC T12 ACC B3 2 12 B2 12 Consult your programming device s user manual for information on addressing capabilities MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual You can also address at the bit level using mnemonics for timer counter or control data types The available mnemonics depend on the type of data See chapters 6 through 13 for more information Specifying Indexed Addresses The indexed address symbol is the character Place the character immediately before the file type identifier in a logical address You can use more than one indexed address in your ladder program Enter the offset value in word 24 of the status file S 24 All indexed instructions use the same word S 24 to store the offset value The processor starts operation at the base address plus the offset You can manipulate the offset value in your ladder logic before each indexed address operation When you specify indexed addresses follow these guidelines Make sure the index value positive or negative does not cause the indexed address to exceed the file type boundary e When an instruction uses more than two indexed addresses the processor uses the same index value for each indexed address e Set the index word to the offset value you want immediately before enabling an instruction th
68. The accumulated counts are retained when the rung conditions again become false The accumulated count is retained until cleared by a reset RES instruction that has the same address as the counter reset Using Status Bits And Remains Set Until This Bit Is Set When One of the Following Count Down Underflow Bit accumulated value wraps a RES instruction having UN bit 11 around to 32 768 from the same address as the 32 767 and continues CTD instruction is enabled 97 counting down from there OR the count is S incremented greater than or equal to 32 767 with a CTU instruction Done Bit DN bit 13 accumulated value is equal the accumulated value S to or greater than the becomes less than the preset value preset Count Down Enable Bit CD rung conditions are true rung conditions go false bit 14 OR a RES instruction having the same address as the CTD instruction is enabled The accumulated value is retained after the CTD instruction goes false or when power is removed from and then restored to the controller Also the on or off status of counter done overflow and underflow bits is retentive The accumulated value and control bits are reset when the appropriate RES instruction is executed The CD bits are always set prior to entering the REM Run or REM Test modes 6 19 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Reset RES RES Execution Times usec w
69. Type Encoder Res Hld CD Counter C5 0 DN Preset 100 Accum 2 Rung 2 6 When the pick and place head reaches either its home position to pick up a part or its destination bin to drop off a part start up a dwell timer The purpose of this is to keep the head stationary long enough for the gripper to either grab or release the part Bin Location Dwell Timr Reached C5 0 TON 4 TIMER ON DELAY EN HP Timer T4 0 DN Time Base 0 01 Preset 100 Accum 100 Home Position Reached C5 0 deese 255 LP E 26 Application Example Programs Rung 2 7 When the pick and place head is positioned over the proper bin turn off the forward motor At the same time the high speed counter will tell the gripper to release the part and start the dwell timer After the dwell time has expired start up the reverse motor to send the head back to its home position to pick up another part Bin Motor Location FORWARD Reached Che 0 0 U HP a Dwell Motor Done REVERSE T4 0 Oro xzass N Li DN 2 Rung 2 8 When the pick and place head is positioned at its home position turn off the reverse motor At the same time the high speed counter will tell the gripper to grab the next part and start the dwell timer After the dwell time
70. activated In ladder programming a symbol that will allow logic continuity flow if the referenced input is logic 1 when evaluated offset The steady state deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point Glossary offline Describes devices not under direct communication For example when programming in APS one shot A programming technique that sets a bit for only one program scan online Describes devices under direct communication For example when APS is monitoring the program file in a controller operating voltage For inputs the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state For outputs the allowable range of user supplied voltage output device A device such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil that receives data from the controller overall accuracy The worst case deviation of the output voltage or current from the ideal over the full output range is the overall accuracy For inputs the worst case deviation of the digital representation of the input signal from the ideal over the full input range is the overall accuracy This is expressed in percent of full scale processor A Central Processing Unit See CPU processor file The set of program and data files used by the controller to control output devices Only one processor file may be stored in the controller at a time program file The area within a processor file that contains the ladder logic program program mode When the
71. as a push button or pilot light are wired to throughput The time between when an input turns on and the corresponding output turns on true The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung update time For analog inputs the time between updates to the memory of the analog controller of the digital value representing the analog input signal For analog outputs the time from the digital code being received at the analog controller to the analog output signal of the digital code being output at the terminals of the output channel upload Data is transferred to a programming or storage device from another device user interrupt poll While executing the user program the controller firmware checks for user interrupts that need servicing watchdog timer A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle If the watchdog runs past its programmed time period it will cause a fault workspace The main storage available for programs and data and allocated for working storage write To copy data to a storage device For example the processor WRITEs the information from the output data file to the output modules G 7 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Notes G 8 Index Numerics 1761L10BWA features 1 3 grounding 2 2 input voltage range 2 10 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 10 preventing excessive heat 1
72. be a constant value or you can vary the mask by assigning a direct address Bits in the destination that correspond to zeros in the mask are not altered 9 17 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual And AND in the destination Execution Times usec when The value at source A is ANDed bit by bit with the value at source B and then stored True False 34 00 6 78 Truth Table Dest A AND B A B Dest 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant however both sources cannot be a constant The destination must be a word address Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C always resets 0 1 Overflow V always resets S 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign S sets if most significant bit is set otherwise resets 9 18 Using Data Handling Instructions The value at source A is ORed bit by bit with the value at source B and then stored in the destination BITWISE INCLUS OR csrce A Scarce B Dent Execution Times usec when True False 33 68 6 78 Truth Table Dest AORB A B Dest 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant however both sources cannot be a constant The destination must be a word address Updates to Arithmetic Status Bi
73. bit array shifts the 11 5 BSR Bit Shift Right pattern of data through the array and unloads the last bit of data in the array The BSL shifts data to the left and the BSR shifts data to the right SQO and Sequencer Output Control sequential machine operations by 11 7 SQC and Sequencer transferring 16 bit data through a mask to Compare image addresses SQL Sequencer Load Capture referenced conditions by manually 11 14 stepping the machine through its operating sequences STD and Selectable Timer Output instructions associated with the 11 20 STE Interrupt Disable Selectable Timed Interrupt function STD and and Enable STE are used to prevent an STI from occurring during a portion of the program STS Selectable Timer Initiates a Selectable Timed Interrupt 11 22 Interrupt Start 11 1 e2 E E E i fe fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Instruction Purpose Page Mnemonic Name INT Interrupt Associated with Selectable Timed Interrupts or 11 22 Subroutine HSC Interrupts About the Application Specific Instructions These instructions simplify your ladder program by allowing you to use a single instruction or pair of instructions to perform common complex operations In this chapter you will find a general overview preceding groups of instructions Before you learn about the instructions in each of these groups we suggest that you read the overview This c
74. by signal type Bundle wiring with similar electrical characteristics together Separate input wiring from output wiring Label wiring to all devices in the system Use tape shrink tubing or other dependable means for labeling purposes In addition to labeling use colored insulation to identify wiring based on signal characteristics For example you may use blue for de wiring and red for ac wiring Wiring Your Controller Wiring Diagrams Discrete Input and Output Voltage Ranges The following pages show the wiring diagrams discrete input voltage ranges and 2 discrete output voltage ranges Controllers with de inputs can be wired as either S sinking or sourcing configurations Sinking and sourcing does not apply to ac O inputs G am Note This symbol denotes a functional earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for non safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement ATTENTION The 24V dc sensor power source should not be used to power output circuits It should only be used to power input devices e g sensors switches Refer to page 2 3 for information on MCR wiring in output circuits 2 7 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1761 L16AWA Wiring Diagram lt 79 132V ac gt lt 79 132V ac L2 N Li L2 N Li oe _e e 9 L4 eleleeeeee Cia s S o OS o Hoe
75. condition of your equipment is of primary importance We recommend reviewing the following safety considerations Installing Your Controller Disconnecting Main Power ATTENTION Explosion Hazard Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off and the area is known to be non hazardous o i gt o Ln G I The main power disconnect switch should be located where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it In addition to disconnecting electrical power all other sources of power pneumatic and hydraulic should be de energized before working on a machine or process controlled by a controller Safety Circuits ATTENTION Explosion Hazard Do not connect or disconnect connectors while circuit is live unless area is known to be non hazardous Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons like overtravel limit switches stop push buttons and interlocks should always be hard wired directly to the master control relay These devices must be wired in series so that when any one device opens the master control relay is de energized thereby removing power to the machine Never alter these circuits to defeat their function Serious injury or machine damage could result Power Distribution There are some points about power distribution that you should know e The master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine motion by removing power to the m
76. counters the high preset must be greater than the True False low preset or an error INVALID PRESETs LOADED TO HIGH SPEED COUNTER 37H occurs 66 00 7 00 The Counter referenced by this instruction has the same address as the HSC instruction counter and is fixed at C5 0 Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Source is an address that identifies the first of five data words used by the HSL The source can be either an integer or binary file element Length is the number of elements starting from the source This number is always 5 Operation The HSL instruction allows you to configure the high speed counter to instantaneously and automatically update external outputs whenever a high or low preset is reached The physical outputs are automatically updated in less than 30 us The physical turn on time of the outputs is not included in this amount The output image is then automatically updated at the next poll for user interrupts or IOM instruction whichever occurs first With this instruction you can change the high preset for the up counters or both the high and low presets for Bidirectional Counters during run You can also modify the output mask configuration during run The source address is either an integer or binary file element For example if N7 5 is selected as the source address the additional parameters for the execution of this instruction would appear as sho
77. executed true the Instruction accumulator is loaded to the hardware accumulator Instruction high preset is loaded to the hardware high preset After the first true HSC instruction execution data can only be transferred to the hardware accumulator via an RES or RAC instruction or to the hardware high and low presets via the HSL instruction Any instruction accumulator value between 32 768 and 32 767 inclusive can be loaded to the hardware The Following Condition Occurs when either the hardware accumulator transitions from the hardware high preset 1 to the hardware high preset or e2 E E E fe fe n A high preset is reached the hardware accumulator is loaded with a value greater than or equal to the hardware high preset or the hardware high preset is loaded with a value that is less than or equal to the hardware accumulator When a high preset is reached the HPbitis set e High speed counter interrupt file program file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IH bit is set and the IL IV and IN bits are reset Unlike the Up Counters the accumulator value does not get reset and the high preset value does not get loaded from the image to the hardware high preset register The Following Condition Occurs when either the hardware accumulator transitions from the hardware low preset 1 to the hardware low preset or A low preset is reached the hardware accu
78. extra protection from physical damage and electrical interference If you route the cable through conduit follow these additional recommendations Use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical interference You can use aluminum conduit in non critical areas P Use plastic connectors to couple between aluminum and ferromagnetic conduit Make an electrical connection around the plastic connector use pipe clamps and the heavy gauge wire or wire braid to hold both sections at the same potential Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the building earth ground Do not let the conduit touch the plug on the cable Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit The conduit should contain only serial communication cables Install the conduit so that it meets all applicable codes and environmental specifications For more information on planning cable routes see Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Publication Number 1770 4 1 Understanding the Communication Protocols Software Considerations Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on network performance number of nodes on the network addresses of those nodes baud rate The following sections explain network considerations and describ
79. file instructions and also indexed addressing make sure that you monitor and or load the correct offset value prior to using an indexed address Otherwise unpredictable operation could occur resulting in possible personal injury and or damage to equipment Numeric Constants You can enter numeric constants directly into many of the instructions you program The range of values for most instructions is 32 768 through 32 767 These values can be displayed or entered in several radixes The radixes that can be displayed are Integer Binary e ASCII e Hexadecimal 4 13 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual When entering values into an instruction or data table element you can specify the radix of your entry using the amp special operator The radixes that can be used to enter data into an instruction or data table element are Integer amp N e Binary amp B e ASCII amp A e Hexadecimal amp H e BCD amp D e Octal amp O Numeric constants are used in place of data file elements They cannot be manipulated by the user program You must enter the offline program editor to change the value of a constant Applying Ladder Logics to Your Schematics The logic you enter into the micro controller makes up a ladder program A ladder program consists of a set of instructions used to control a machine or a process Ladder logic is a graphical programming language based on electrical relay dia
80. flag is also set The value 32 768 or 32 767 is placed in the destination If S 2 14 math overflow selection bit is set then the unsigned truncated overflow remains in the destination S 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets S 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative otherwise resets 84 Using Math Instructions Subtract SUB SUB SUBTRACT Source A Use the SUB instruction to subtract one value Source B from another source A and H place the result in the destination Source A and B can either be a word address or Source B constant Dest Execution Times usec when True False 92 33 52 6 78 E f z Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits O 0 s With this Bit The Controller a S 0 0 Carry C sets if borrow is generated otherwise resets S 0 1 Overflow V sets if underflow otherwise reset On underflow the minor error flag is also set The value 32 768 or 32 767 is placed in the destination If S 2 14 math overflow selection bit is set then the unsigned truncated overflow remains in the destination 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative otherwise resets 8 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 32 Bit Addition and Subtraction You have the option of performing 16 bit or 32 bit signed integer addition and subtraction This is fac
81. from the FIFO stack in the same order as they were entered Operation Instruction parameters have been programmed in the FFL FFU instruction pair shown below 22 FIFO LOAD Destination Position z Source FIFO N7 11 N7 12 0 Control 90 Length N7 13 1 im vtm FFU instruction unloads N7 14 2 ou data from stack N7 12 at 3 o position 0 N7 12 Q FFU 4 FIFO UNLOAD r FIFO IN 5 34 words are allocated i EM 6 for FIFO stack starting at Linge N7 12 ending at N7 45 Position 7 Source 8 N7 10 I 9 FFL instruction loads data into stack 47 12 at the next available position 9 in this case N7 45 33 Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 FFL Instruction When rung conditions change from false to true the controller sets the FFL enable Execution Times bit EN This loads the contents of the Source N7 10 into the stack structure usec when indicated by the Position number 9 The position value then increments True False The FFL instruction loads an element at each false to true transition of the rung until 61 13 33 67 the stack is filled 34 elements The controller then sets the done bit DN inhibiting further loading MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual FFU Instruction Execution Times usec when When rung conditions change from false to true the controller sets the FFU enable bit EU This
82. has expired start up the forward motor to send the head out to its drip off bin Home Motor Position REVERSE Reached C520 0 0 U HP 2 Dwell Motor Done REVERSE T4 0 0 0 2265 far Li DN uH Rung 2 9 END Data Table Addresses Data Radix Decimal N7 0 I 0 100 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 N7 10 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 0 0 o o e LU t o _ tc E 27 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual RPM Calculation Application Example The following application example illustrates how to calculate the frequency and RPM of a device such as an encoder connected to a high speed counter The calculated values are only valid when counting up For a detailed explanation of XIC XIO CTU and TON instructions see chapter 6 LES instruction see chapter 7 CLR MUL DIV DDV ADD and SUB instructions see chapter 8 MOV instruction see chapter 9 RPM Calculation Operation Overview E 28 This is done by manipulating the number of counts that have occurred in the high speed counter accumulator CO ACC over time To determine this you must provide the following application specific information N7 2 Counts per Revolution i e the number of encoder pulses per revolution i e the number of pulses until reset This value is entered in whole counts For e
83. illustrations only show output circuits with MCR protection In most applications input circuits do not require MCR protection however if you need to remove power from all field devices you must include MCR contacts in series with input power wiring 1 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Schematic Using IEC Symbols rc rc N 230V ac Fuse MCR 230V ac 1 0 Circuits Isolation Operation of either ofthese contacts will remove Transformer power from the adapter external I O circuits stopping machine motion i Master Control Relay MCR Cat No 700 PK400A1 Start Suppressor m Cat No 700 N24 xi 230V ac x2 Emergency Stop Push Button Overtravel end i Limit Switch eee MCR Fuse 230V ac l O Circuits dc Power Supply fuse EC S8OEN 60660 MCR 24N ac Lo Hi d VO Circuits Line Terminals Connect to 230V ac terminals of Power Supply Line Terminals Connect to 24V dc terminals of Power Supply Installing Your Controller Schematic Using ANSI CSA Symbols L1 L2 2 230V ac s Ke p E di 230V ac Output Circuits Isolation Operation of either ofthese contacts will remove p Transformer power from the adapter external I O circuits stopping machine motion Master Control Relay MCR xi 115V ac x2 Cat No 700 PK400A1 Emergency Stop Suppressor E Fuse Push Button Overtravel Start Cat No 700 N24 Limit S
84. in chapter 7 Rung 7 29 This rung moves the single digit BCD thumbwheel value into an internal Integer register This is done to properly align the four BCD input signals prior to executing the BCD to Integer instruction FRD The thumbwheel is used to allow the operator to enter the thickness of the paper that is to be drilled The thickness is entered in 1 4 increments This provides a range of 1 4 to 2 25 BCD bit 0 FRD bit O I 0 N7 14 11 0 BCD bit 1 FRD bit 1 0 N7 14 12 1 BCD bit 2 FRD bit 2 I 0 N7 14 13 BCD bit 3 FRD bit 3 I 0 N7 14 14 3 This rung accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Therefore do not include this rung if you are using a 16 I O controller Using Data Handling Instructions Rung 7 3 This rung converts the BCD thumbwheel value from BCD to Integer This is done because the controller operates upon integer values This rung also debounces the thumbwheel to ensure that the conversion only occurs on valid BCD values Note that invalid BCD values can occur while the operator is changing the BCD thumbwheel This is due to input filter propagation delay differences between the 4 input circuits that provide the BCD input value l st previous debounced pass scan s BCD va
85. increments A setpoint of zero disables the STI function Note The setpoint value must be a longer time than the execution time of the STI subroutine file or a minor error bit is set Operation After you restore your program and enter the REM Run or REM Test mode the STI begins operation as follows 1 The STI timer begins timing 2 When the STI interval expires the program scan is interrupted and the STI subroutine file is scanned the STI timer is reset 3 If while executing the STI file 5 another STI interrupt occurs the STI pending bit S 2 0 is set 11 17 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 4 If while an STI is pending the STI timer expires the STI lost bit S 5 10 is set 5 When the STI subroutine scan is completed scanning of the program resumes at the point where it left off unless an STI is pending In this case the subroutine is immediately scanned again 6 The cycle repeats For identification of your STI subroutine include an INT instruction as the first instruction on the first rung of the file STI Subroutine Content The STI subroutine contains the rungs of your application logic You can program any instruction inside the STI subroutine except a TND instruction IIM or IOM instructions are needed in an STI subroutine if your application requires immediate update of input or output points End the STI subroutine with an RET instruction JSR stack depth is limited to 3
86. instruction is executed if the bit addressed is on 1 then the instruction is evaluated as false 1 54 1 72 Bit Address State XIO Instruction 0 True 1 False Examples of devices that turn on or off include e motor overload normally closed N C wired to an input 11 0 10 anoutput wired to a pilot light addressed as O0 0 4 atimer controlling a light addressed as T4 3 DN Output Energize OTE Execution Times usec when True False 4 48 4 43 Use an OTE instruction in your ladder program to turn On a bit when rung conditions are evaluated as true An example of a device that turns on or off is an output wired to a pilot light addressed as 00 0 4 OTE instructions are reset when e You enter or return to the REM Run or REM Test mode or power is restored The OTE is programmed within an inactive or false Master Control Reset MCR zone Note A bit that is set within a subroutine using an OTE instruction remains set until the subroutine is scanned again 6 4 Using Basic Instructions Output Latch OTL and Output Unlatch OTU OTL and OTU are retentive output instructions OTL can only turn on a bit while OTU can only turn off a bit These instructions are usually used in pairs with both AL instructions addressing the same bit u Your program can examine a bit controlled by OTL and OTU instructions as often as necessary Execution Times usec when
87. interrupt latency 11 17 storing processor files download 4 7 power down 4 8 power up 4 9 STS Selectable Timed Start 11 22 SUB Subtract 8 5 Subroutine SBR 10 4 nesting subroutine files 10 5 using 10 6 Subtract SUB 8 5 updates to arithmetic status bits 8 5 surge suppressors 1 8 for contactor 1 10 for motor starters 1 10 for relays 1 10 recommended 1 10 SUS Suspend 10 8 Suspend SUS 10 8 entering parameters 10 8 system configuration DH485 connection examples D 18 system connection 3 1 T Temporary End TND 10 8 timer file T4 4 6 timer instructions overview addressing structure 6 8 entering parameters 6 7 Retentive Timer RTO 6 13 Timer OffDelay TOF 6 11 Timer OnDelay TON 6 10 Timer OffDelay TOF 6 11 using status bits 6 11 Timer OnDelay TON 6 10 using status bits 6 10 timing diagram message instruction 13 8 TND Temporary End 10 8 TOD Convert to BCD 9 3 TOF Timer OffDelay 6 11 TON Timer OnDelay 6 10 troubleshooting automatically clearing faults 14 6 contacting AllenBradley for assistance P 5 14 11 controller error recovery model 14 5 determining controller faults 14 2 identifying controller faults 14 6 manually clearing faults 14 6 understanding the controller LED status 14 2 using the fault routine 14 6 Index U understanding file organization 4 4 addressing data files 4 10 numeric constants 4 13 processor file overview 4 4
88. is less than the value of source B the instruction is logically false Source A must be a word address Source B can be either a constant or word address Negative integers are stored in two s complement form Using Comparison Instructions Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ ine Use the MEQ instruction to compare data of a source address with data of a reference H sourco address Use of this instruction allows portions of the data to be masked by a separate Mask word Compare Execution Times usec when True False 23 60 6 60 Entering Parameters Source is the address of the value you want to compare e2 lt i fe fe n e Mask is the address of the mask through which the instruction moves data The mask can be a hexadecimal value constant Compare is an integer value or the address of the reference If the 16 bits of data at the source address are equal to the 16 bits of data at the compare address less masked bits the instruction is true The instruction becomes false as soon as it detects a mismatch Bits in the mask word mask data when reset they pass data when set 7 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Limit Test LIM IM Use the LIM instruction to test for values within or outside a specified range B Low Lim depending on how you set the limits Test High Lim Execution Times usec when True False
89. mode change attempt into REM Run or REM Test Also clear S 6 to avoid the confusion of having an error code but no fault condition Note Do not re use error codes that are defined later in this appendix as application specific error codes Instead create your own unique codes This prevents you from confusing application errors with system errors We recommend using error codes FFOO to FFOF to indicate application specific major errors Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable B 9 o o en eb i o Y 3 tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Address Bit Classification Description S 1 14 OEM Lock Static Configuration Using this bit you can control access to a controller file To program this feature select Future Access Disallow when saving your program When this bit is cleared it indicates that any compatible programming device can access the ladder program provided that password conditions are satisfied 1 15 First Pass Status Use this bit to initialize your program as the application requires When this bit is set by the controller it indicates that the first scan of the user program is in progress following power up in the RUN mode or entry into a REM Run or REM Test mode The controller clears this bit following the first scan This bit is set during execution of the startup protection fault routine Refer to S 1 9 for more information
90. modem to initiate or disconnect a phone call so this must be done from the site of the remote modem Leased Line Modems Leased line modems are used with dedicated phone lines that are typically leased from the local phone company The dedicated lines may be in a point to point topology supporting full duplex communications between two modems or in a point to multipoint topology supporting half duplex communications between three or more modems In the point to point topology configure the MicroLogix 1000 controllers for DF1 full duplex protocol as long as the modems used do not require DTR or RTS to be high in order to operate In the point to multipoint topology configure the MicroLogix 1000 controllers for DF1 half duplex slave protocol with the control line parameter set to Half Duplex Modem o o en 3 i o _ 3 tc D 9 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Radio Modems Line Drivers Radio modems may be implemented in a point to point topology supporting either half duplex or full duplex communications or in a point to multipoint topology supporting half duplex communications between three or more modems In the point to point topology using full duplex radio modems configure the MicroLogix 1000 controllers for DF1 full duplex protocol as long as the modems used do not require DTR or RTS to be high in order to operate In the point to point topology using half duplex radio modems or point to
91. negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S5 2 is also set Both bits must be cleared Done Bit DN bit 13 is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer load file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false Enable Bit EN bit 15 is set on a false to true transition of the SQL rung and reset on a true to false transition D pru Oo O sm 11 15 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Operation Instruction parameters have been programmed in the SQL instruction shown below Input word I 0 0 is the source Data in this word is loaded into integer file N7 30 by the sequencer load instruction SQL SEQUENCER LOAD EN File N7 30 Source I 1 0 DN Control R6 4 Length 4 Position 2 External Inputs Associated with Source I 1 0 1 0 15 8 7 0 00 0000 0101 0000 1010 01 ON 02 Sequencer Output File B10 1 03 ON Word Step 04 N 7 30 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 05 31 1010 0010 1111 0101 1 06 Lx 32 1111 0101 0100 1010 2 4 Current Step 07 33 0101 0101 0101 0101 3 08 4 ON 34 0000 1111 0000 1111 4 09 10 le ON 11 12 13 14 15 When rung conditions change from false to true the SQL enable bit EN is set The control element R6 4 increments to the next posi
92. node is program owner has sole access to all files Error codes 1A and 1B valid for Seriec C discrete only 13 11 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Note For 1770 6 5 16 DF1 Protocol and Command Set users The MSG error code reflects the STS field of the reply to your MSG instruction Codes EO EF represent EXT STS codes 0 F Codes FO FC represent EXT STS codes 10 1C 13 12 Using the Message Instruction Application Examples that Use the MSG Instruction Example 1 Application example 1 shows how you can implement continuous operation of a message instruction MSG READ WRITE MESSAGE 1 Read vrite WRITE Target Device 500cPU Control Block N7 0 Control Block Length N7 0 N7 0 D D o pum oO MSG instruction status bits 12 ER 13 DN 15 EN Operation Notes Bit S 0 11 ensures that the MSG instruction will only be processed when the active protocol is DH 485 Bit S 1 7 ensures that DH 485 is communicating before sending the MSG Bit B3 1 enables the MSG instruction When the MSG instruction done bit N7 0 13 is set it unlatches the MSG enable bit N7 0 13 is set it unlatches the MSG enable bit N7 0 15 so that the MSG instruction will be re enabled in the next scan This provides continuous operation The MSG error bit will also unlatch the enable bit This provides continuous operation even if an error occurs 13 13 MicroLogix 100
93. of the controller on the DIN rail meets the recommended spacing requirements Refer to controller dimensions in appendix A Mounting a Protective Wrap 2 Hook the top slot over the DIN rail ae M Template A 3 While pressing the controller against AN the rail snap the controller into p position 4 Leave the protective wrap attached CT d 20146 until you are finished wiring the controller 22828 B I Call out Dimension JEn A E 3 DIN A 84 mm 3 3 in 333 Rail i E i C B 33 mm 1 3 in PEERS C 16 mm 63 in To remove your controller from the DIN rail 1 Place a screwdriver in the DIN rail latch at the bottom of the controller 2 Holding the controller pry downward on the latch until the controller is released from the DIN rail DIN Rail 20147 1 16 Installing Your Controller Using Mounting Screws To install your controller using mounting screws Note Leave the protective wrap attached until you are finished wiring the controller Mountin 1 Use the mounting template from E didis the MicroLogix 1000 Programmable A Controllers Installation Instructions publication 1761 5 1 2 or MicroLogix 1000 Analog Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions publication 1761 5 1 3 that was shipped with your controller Remove the mounting template Mount the controller Secure t
94. online with the controller e Static Configuration Use these words bytes or bits to select controller options while in the offline program mode prior to downloading the user program Address Bit Classification Description S 0 Arithmetic and Scan The arithmetic flags are assessed by the Status Flags controller following the execution of certain math and data handling instructions The state of these bits remain in effect until certain math or data handling instructions in the program are executed 0 0 Carry Status This bit is set by the controller if a mathematical carry or borrow is generated Otherwise the bit remains cleared This bit is assessed as if a function of unsigned math When a STI high speed counter or Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 0 is restored when execution resumes Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable o o en ch i o Y 3 tc B 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Address Bit Classification Description S 0 1 Overflow Status This bit is set by the controller when the result of a mathematical operation does not fit in its destination Otherwise the bit remains cleared Whenever this bit is set the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is also set except for the ENC bit Refer to S 5 0 When a STI high speed counter or Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your
95. or current not both This is determined by the output configuration When in the Run mode and the output is configured for voltage the voltage output terminal is active and the current output terminal is inactive Similarly when in the Run mode and the output is configured for current the current output terminal is active and the voltage output terminal is inactive When the system is not in Run mode both the voltage and current outputs are inactive Input Filter and Update Times The MicroLogix analog input filter is programmable The slower the filter setting the more immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise The more immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise the slower the inputs will be to update Similarly the faster the filter setting the less immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise The less immune the analog inputs are to electrical noise the faster the inputs will be to update Programmable Filter Characteristics 1st Notch Freq Filter Bandwidth Settling Time Resolution Hz 3 dB Freq Hz mSec Bits 10 2 62 100 00 16 50 13 10 20 00 16 60 15 72 16 67 16 250 65 50 16 00 15 60 Hz is the default setting 5 8 e2 E E E 5 fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual The total update time for each channel is a combination of the Update Time and the Settling Time When more than one analog input channel is enabled the maxim
96. packet again After two retries a total of three tries the initiator will attempt to find a new successor The allowable range of the node address of an initiator is 0 to 31 The allowable address range for all responders is 1 to 31 There must be at least one initiator on the network o S c el i o Y tc D 11 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual DH 485 Configuration Parameters When the system mode driver is DH 485 Master the following parameters can be changed Parameter Description Default Baud Rate Toggles between the communication rate of 9600 and 19200 19200 This is the node address of the processor on the DH 485 Nade Address network The valid range is 1 31 i Max Node This is the maximum node address of an active processor fixed Address at 31 Set the node addresses of the devices on the network to 31 low sequential numbers for best performance Token Hold Determines the number of transactions allowed to make each Factor DH 485 token rotation fixed at 1 DH 485 Network Initialization Network initialization begins when a period of inactivity exceeding the time of a link dead timeout is detected by an initiator on the network When the time for a link dead timeout is exceeded usually the initiator with the lowest address claims the token When an initiator has the token it will begin to build the network The network requires at least one initiator to
97. polls by the DF1 master or replies to received messages will not reset the timer A poll with a command is required to reset the timer For DH 485 the bit is reset as soon as the DH 485 link layer determines that no other devices are active on the link Application Note For DF1 half duplex you can use this bit to enable a timer via an XIO instruction to sense whether the DF1 master is actively communicating to the slave The preset of the timer is determined by the total network timing Address Bit 81 7 Comms Active 8 1 8 Fault Override at Powerup Static Configuration When set this bit causes the controller to clear the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 and Minor error bits S 5 0 to S 5 7 on power up if the processor had previously been in the REM Run mode and had faulted The controller then attempts to enter the REM Run mode Set this bit offline only Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable B 6 Programming Reference Address Bit Classification Description S 1 9 Startup Protection Static Configuration When this bit is set and power is cycled while Fault the controller is in the REM Run mode the controller executes the user fault routine prior to the execution of the first scan of your program You have the option of clearing the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 to resume operation in the REM Run mode If the user fault routine does not reset bit 1 13 the fault mode re
98. program the original value of S 0 1 is restored when execution resumes 8 0 2 Zero Status This bit is set by the controller when the result of certain math or data handling instructions is zero Otherwise the bit remains cleared When a STI high speed counter or Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 2 is restored when execution resumes S 0 3 Sign Status This bit is set by the controller when the result of certain math or data handling instructions is negative Otherwise the bit remains cleared When a STI high speed counter or Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 3 is restored when execution resumes S 0 4 to S 0 7 Reserved NA NA S 0 8 Extend I O Configuration Static Configuration This bit must be set by the user when unused outputs are written to If reset and unused outputs are turned on the controller will fault 41H 0 9 Reserved NA NA 0 10 Primary Protocol Static Configuration This bit defines the protocol that the controller will initially use when attempting to establish communication where 0 DF1 default setting 1 DH 485 Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable B 4 Programming Reference Address Bit Classification Description S 0 11 Active Protocol Status This bit is updated by the controlle
99. resets On overflow the minor error flag is also set The value 32 767 is placed in the destination S 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets S 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative otherwise resets undefined if overflow is set Changes to the Math Register Initially contains the dividend of the DDV operation Upon instruction execution the unrounded quotient is placed in the most significant word of the math register The remainder is placed in the least significant word of the math register 8 10 Using Math Instructions Clear CLR CLR n Use the CLR instruction to set the destination to zero All of the bits reset CLEAR Dest Execution Times usec when True False 20 80 4 25 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits E With this Bit The Controller E 3 S 0 0 Carry C always resets 0 1 Overflow V always resets a S 0 2 Zero Z always sets S 0 3 Sign S always resets Square Root SQR soa When this instruction is evaluated as true the square root of the absolute value of the iar source is calculated and the rounded integer result is placed in the destination The instruction calculates the square root of a negative number without overflow or Execution Times faults In applications where the source value may be negative use a comparison usec when instruction to evaluate the source value to determine if the destination may be invali
100. source and destination must be word addresses Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C always resets 0 1 Overflow V always resets S 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets S 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative most significant bit is set otherwise resets 9 21 D 3 Oo re X MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Negate NEG Use the NEG instruction to change the sign of a value If you negate a negative value the result is a positive if you negate a positive value the result is a negative The destination contains the two s complement of the source The source and destination must be word addresses Execution Times usec when True False 29 48 6 78 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C clears if 0 or overflow otherwise sets 0 1 Overflow V sets if overflow otherwise reset Overflow occurs only if 32 768 is the source On overflow the minor error flag is also set The value 32 767 is placed in the destination If 2 14 is set then the unsigned truncated overflow remains in the destination 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative otherwise resets 9 22 Using Data Handling Instructions FIFO and LIFO Instructions Overview FIFO instructi
101. specifying indexed addresses 4 12 specifying logical addresses 4 10 using the file indicator 4 13 up counter operation 12 8 up counter with reset and hold operation 12 8 update times analog inputs 5 3 updating the highspeed counter accumulator 12 24 user interrupt latency B 29 V valid addressing modes C 1 varistors recommended 1 9 voltage ranges discrete 2 7 Ww wire types 2 4 wiring analog channels 2 23 wiring diagrams 2 7 1761L10BWA 2 10 1761L10BWB 2 13 1761L16AWA 2 8 1761L16BBB 2 17 1761L16BWA 2 11 1761L16BWB 2 14 1761L20A WASA 2 19 1761L20BWASA 2 20 1761L20BWBSA 2 21 1761L32AAA 2 16 1761L32BBB 2 18 Index 13 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1761L32BWA 2 12 1761L32BWB 2 15 wiring recommendations 2 4 X XIC Examine if Closed 6 3 XIO Examine if Open 6 4 XOR Exclusive Or 9 20 Index 14 ON Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley a Rockwell Automation Business has been helping its customers improve productivity and quality for more than 90 years We design manufacture and support a broad range Allen Br adley of automation products worldwide They include logic processors power and motion control devices operator interfaces sensors and a variety of software Rockwell is one of the world s leading technology companies 1 A I Worldwide representation j E Argentina e Australia e Austria e Bahrain e Belgium e Brazil e
102. tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual False Execution True Execution Mnemonic Time approx Time approx Memory Usage Name Instruction Type user words useconds useconds RAC 6 00 56 00 1 00 High Speed High Speed Counter Counter Reset Accumulator RES timer 4 25 15 19 1 00 Reset Basic counter RES high 6 00 51 00 1 00 High Speed High Speed Counter speed counter Counter Reset RET 3 16 31 11 0 50 Return from Program Flow Subroutine Control RTO 27 49 38 34 1 00 Retentive Timer Basic SBR 0 99 1 45 0 50 Subroutine Program Flow Control SCL 6 78 169 18 1 75 Scale Data Math SQC 27 40 60 52 2 00 Sequencer Application Specific Compare SQL 28 12 53 41 2 00 Sequencer Load Application Specific SQO 27 40 60 52 2 00 Sequencer Application Specific Output SQR 6 78 71 25 1 25 Square Root Math STD 3 16 6 69 0 50 Selectable Timer Application Specific Interrupt Disable STE 3 16 10 13 0 50 Selectable Timer Application Specific Interrupt Enable STS 6 78 24 59 1 25 Selectable Timer Application Specific Interrupt Start SUB 6 78 33 52 1 50 Subtract Math SUS 7 87 10 85 1 50 Suspend Program Flow Control TND 3 16 7 78 0 50 Temporary End Program Flow Control B 28 Programming Reference False Execution True Execution Memor Ueade Mnemonic Time approx Time approx fier wok ds Name Instruction Type useconds useconds
103. the DH 485 network Understanding the Communication Protocols DH 485 Network Description The DH 485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices that co exist on a single pair of wires This protocol uses RS 485 half duplex as its physical interface RS 485 is a definition of electrical characteristics it is not a protocol RS 485 uses devices that are capable of co existing on a common data circuit thus allowing data to be easily shared between devices The DH 485 network offers interconnection of 32 devices multi master capability token passing access control the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network maximum network length of 1219 m 4000 ft The DH 485 protocol supports two classes of devices initiators and responders All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers To determine which initiator has the right to transmit a token passing algorithm is used The following section describes the protocol used to control message transfers on the DH 485 network DH 485 Token Rotation A node holding the token can send any valid packet onto the network Each node is allowed only one transmission plus two retries each time it receives the token After a node sends one message packet it attempts to give the token to its successor by sending a token pass packet to its successor If no network activity occurs the initiator sends the token pass
104. the MSG instruction e2 E E E i fe fe n Message Instruction Instruction Purpose Page Mnemonic Name MSG Message Read This instruction transfers data from one nodeto 13 3 Write another via the communication port When the instruction is enabled the message is sent to a communication buffer Replies are processed at the end of scan 18 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Types of Communication Communication is the ability of a device to send data or status to other devices This capability typically falls into one of two categories initiator master or responder slave Each of these are described below Initiator Master Communication Initiator products can begin communication processes which includes requesting information from other devices reading or sending information to other products writing In addition initiator products are usually capable of replying to other devices MicroLogixwhen they make requests to read information The Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers are in this class Initiator products can begin communication processes with other initiator products peer to peer communication or with responder slave products initiator to responder communication Responder Slave Communication Responder products can only reply to other products These devices are not capabl
105. the RES instruction to reset a sequencer All control bits except FD will be reset to zero The Position will also be set to zero Program the address of your control register in the RES e g R6 0 11 9 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using SQO 11 10 This output instruction steps through the sequencer file whose bits have been set to control various output devices When the rung goes from false to true the instruction increments to the next step word in the sequencer file Data stored there is transferred through a mask to the destination address specified in the instruction Data is written to the destination word every time the instruction is executed The done bit is set when the last word of the sequencer file is transferred On the next false to true rung transition the instruction resets the position to step one If the position is equal to zero at startup when you switch the controller from the program mode to the run mode instruction operation depends on whether the rung is true or false on the first scan e If true the instruction transfers the value in step zero e If false the instruction waits for the first rung transition from false to true and transfers the value in step one The bits mask data when reset and pass data when set The instruction will not change the value in the destination word unless you set mask bits The mask can be fixed or variable It will be fixed if you ent
106. the following data files e Output and input data files These represent external outputs and inputs e The status data file file 2 e The bit data file B3 These are the internal coils used in your program Timer counter and control data files T4 C5 and R6 These instructions use various control bits e2 E E E 5 fe n e The integer data file N7 Use these addresses at the bit level as your program requires Examine if Closed XIC Use the XIC instruction in your ladder program to determine if a bit is On When the DC I instruction is executed if the bit addressed is on 1 then the instruction is evaluated Execution Times as true When the instruction is executed if the bit addressed is off 0 then the usec when instruction is evaluated as false True False 1 54 1 72 Bit Address State XIC Instruction 0 False 1 True Examples of devices that turn on or off include apush button wired to an input addressed as I1 0 4 e an output wired to a pilot light addressed as O0 0 2 atimer controlling a light addressed as T4 3 DN 6 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Examine if Open XIO t Execution Times usec when True False Use an XIO instruction in your ladder program to determine if a bit is Off When the instruction is executed if the bit addressed is off 0 then the instruction is evaluated as true When the
107. the input image for the corresponding analog input For example if an input value of 16 021 is in the input image the calculated value is 10 5V 32 767 x 16 201 5 1915 V To determine an approximate current that an input value represents you can use the following equation 238 xinputvalue inputcurrent mA The Input Value is the decimal value of the word in the input image for the corresponding analog input For example if an input value of 4096 is in the input image the calculated value is 21mA 32 767 x4096 2 65mA It should be noted that the actual value may vary within the accuracy limitations of the module Converting Analog Output Data 5 6 Use the following equation to determine the decimal value for the current output 32 767 16mA x DesiredCurrentOutput mA OutputDecimalValue For example if an output value of 8mA is desired the value to be put in the corresponding word in the output image can be calculated as follows 32 767 16mA x 8mA 4mA 8192 Use the following equation to determine the decimal value for the voltage output 32 767 16mA x DesiredVoltageOutput Vdc OutputDecimal Value For example if an output value of 1V dc is desired the value to be put in the corresponding word in the output image can be calculated as follows 32 767 T0Vde x 1Vde 3277 Using Basic Instructions Using Basic Instructions This chapter contains general informati
108. the interrupt occurred High Preset Reached Caused User Interrupt Bit IH bit 5 is set to identify a high preset reached as the cause for the execution of the high speed counter interrupt routine The IV IN and IL bits are reset by the controller when the IH bit is set Examine this bit at the start of the high speed counter interrupt routine file 4 to determine why the interrupt occurred Low Preset Reached Caused High Speed Counter Interrupt Bit IL bit 4 is set to identify a low preset reached as the cause for the execution of the high speed counter interrupt routine The IV IN and IH bits are reset by the controller when the IL bit is set Examine this bit at the start of the high speed counter interrupt routine file 4 to determine why the interrupt occurred High Speed Counter Interrupt Pending Bit PE bit 3 is set to indicate that a high speed counter interrupt is waiting for execution This bit is cleared by the controller when the high speed counter interrupt routine begins executing This bit is reset if an RAC or RES instruction is executed Do not write to this bit High Speed Counter Interrupt Lost Bit LS bit 2 is set if a high speed counter interrupt occurs while the PE bit is set You can reset this bit with an OTU instruction or by executing an RAC or RES instruction High Speed Counter Interrupt Enable Bit IE bit 1 is set when the high speed counter interrupt is enabled to run when a high speed counter interrupt
109. the program files from the EEPROM to the RAM The retentive data is also transferred to the RAM provided it was not lost on power down and normal operation begins EEPROM RAM Backup Data CPU Workspace Retentive Data Retentive Data Program Files Program Files Programming Device D pru Oo te sm A If retentive data was lost on power down the backup data from the EEPROM is transferred to the RAM and used as the retentive data In addition status file bit S2 5 8 retentive data lost is set and a recoverable major error occurs when going to run EEPROM RAM Backup Data CPU Workspace Retentive Data a Retentive Data Program Files Program Files Programming Device 4 9 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Addressing Data Files For the purposes of addressing each data file type is identified by a letter identifier and a file number File Type Identifier File Number Output O 0 Input l 1 Status S 2 Bit B 3 Timer T 4 Counter C 5 Control R 6 Integer N 7 The addresses are made up of alphanumeric characters separated by delimiters Delimiters include the colon slash and period Specifying Logical Addresses The format of a logical address x e corresponds directly to the location in data storage Where Is the X File Type O output T Timer input C counter S status R control B binary N inte
110. the scan you must unlatch overflow trap bit S 5 0 as shown 8 6 Using Math Instructions Add 16 bit value B3 1 to 32 bit value B3 3 B3 2 Add Operation Binary Hex Decimal Addend B3 3 B3 2 0000 0000 0000 0011 0001 1001 0100 0000 0003 1940 203 072 Addend B3 1 0101 0101 1010 1000 55A8 21 928 Sum B3 3 B3 2 0000 0000 0000 0011 0110 1110 1110 1000 0003 6EE8 225 000 The programming device displays 16 bit decimal values only The decimal value of a 32 bit integer is derived from the displayed binary or hex value For example 0003 1940 Hex is 16 x3 16 x1 16 x4 16 x0 203 072 2 When rung goes true for a B3 B3 ADD single scan B3 1 is added to E OSR ADD B3 2 The result is placed in 0 1 Source A B3 1 B3 2 ao 0101010110101000 D Source B B3 2 Oo 0001100101000000 Ped Dest B3 2 Qa 0001100101000000 If a carry is generated S 0 0 0 ADD 3 S ym ins p Set 1 is added to B3 3 0 Source A 1 Source B B3 3 0000000000000011 Dest B3 3 0000000000000011 If B3 1 is negative B3 31 set 1 SUB R j hare aed au is subtracted from B3 3 31 Source A B3 3 0000000000000011 Source B 1 Dest B3 3 0000000000000011 Overflow trap bit 5 0 is 8 5 unlatched to prevent a major U error from occurring at the end of the scan END 8 7 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Multiply MUL r MUL MULTIPL
111. the status bits Control file 6 This file stores the length pointer position and status bits for specific instructions such as shift registers and sequencers Integer file 7 This file is used to store numeric values or bit information Understanding How Processor Files are Stored and Accessed 4 6 The MicroLogix 1000 programmable controller uses two devices for storing processor files RAM and EEPROM The RAM provides easy access storage 1 e its data is lost on a power down while the EEPROM provides long term storage i e its data is not lost on a power down The diagram below shows how the memory is allocated in the micro controller s processor Programming Overview EEPROM RAM Backup Data CPU Workspace Retentive Data Retentive Data Program Files Program Files The memory device that is used depends on the operation being performed This section describes how memory is stored and accessed during the following operations download normal operation e2 E i fe fe n e power down power up Download When the processor file is downloaded to the micro controller it is first stored in the volatile RAM It is then transferred to the non volatile EEPROM where it is stored as both backup data and retentive data EEPROM RAM Backup Data CPU Workspace Retentive Daa een Lal pot Program Files _ 9 am Files HIT T Programming Device Note Ifyou want
112. to 1761 L16AWA L20AWA 5A L32AWA and L32AAA controllers Nominal Filter Maximum ON Maximum OFF Setting ms Delay ms Delay ms 8 0 20 0 20 0 There is only one filter setting available for the ac inputs If you make another selection the controller changes it to the ac setting and sets the input filter modified bit S 5 13 o o es LU t o _ tc A 10 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Controller Dimensions A 11 Refer to the following table for the controller dimensions Controller 1761 Length mm in Depth mm in Height mm in L10BWA 120 4 72 L16AWA 133 5 24 L16BWA 120 4 72 L20AWA 5A L20BWA 5A L32AWA L32BWA L32AAA 200 7 87 73 2 87 L10BWB L16BBB L16BWB 120 4 72 L20BWB 5A L32BBB L32BWB 200 7 87 40 1 57 80 3 15 Add approximately 13 mm 0 51 in when using the 1761 CBL PM02 or 1761 CBL HM02 communication cables For a template to help you install your controller see the MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions publication 1761 5 1 2 or the MicroLogix 1000 Analog Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions publication 1761 5 1 3 that were shipped with your controller Hardware Reference Replacement Parts Description Catalog Number 10 pt ac input 6 pt rel
113. used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit 1 13 The controller then continues in the REM Run mode The subroutine does not execute for non user faults The user fault routine is discussed in chapter 4 Fault Messages Troubleshooting Your System This section contains fault messages that can occur during operation of the MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers Each table lists the error code description the probable cause and the recommended corrective action pror Advisory Code M Description Recommended Action essage Hex 0001 DEFAULT The default program is loaded to the Re download the program and PROGRAM controller memory This occurs enter the REM Run mode LOADED on power up if the power down occurred Contact your local Allen Bradley in the middle of a download representative if the error persists if the user program is corrupt at power up the default program is loaded 0002 UNEXPECTED The controller was unexpectedly reset due Refer to proper grounding RESET to a noisy environment or internal hardware guidelines in chapter 2 failure If the user program downloaded to Contact your local Allen Bradley the controller is valid the initial data representative if the error persists downloaded with the program is used The Retentive Data Lost Bit S 5 8 is set If the user program is invalid the default program is loaded 0003 EEPROM While power cycling to your controller a Try cycling power again ME
114. you must convert the code to decimal Note You can declare your own application specific major fault by writing a unique value to S 6 and then setting bit S 1 13 Interrogate the value of S 6 in the user fault routine to determine the type of fault that occurred Fault Classifications Faults are classified as Non User Non Recoverable and Recoverable Error code description and classifications are listed on the following pages Categories are powerup errors going to run errors run errors download errors Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable Each fault is classified as one of the following e Non User A fault caused by various conditions that cease ladder program execution The user fault routine is not run when this fault occurs e Non Recoverable A fault caused by the user that cannot be recovered from The user fault routine is run when this fault occurs However the fault cannot be cleared B 18 Programming Reference e Recoverable A fault caused by the user that can be recovered from in the user fault routine by resetting major error halted bit S 1 13 The user fault routine is run when this fault occurs Refer to chapter 14 Troubleshooting for more information regarding programming device advisory messages Going to Run errors occur when the controller is going from any mod
115. your control system using the appropriate DF1 protocol only not DH 485 protocol The distance over which you are able to communicate with certain system devices is virtually limitless o o es eh i o _ 3 tc D 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual DF1 Full Duplex Protocol DF1 Full Duplex communication protocol combines data transparency ANSI American National Standards Institute specification subcategory D1 and 2 way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses subcategory F1 The MicroLogix 1000 controllers support the DF1 Full Duplex protocol via RS 232 connection to external devices such as computers the Hand Held Programmer catalog number 1761 HHP B30 or other MicroLogix 1000 controllers For information on connecting to the Hand Held Programmer see its user manual publication 1761 6 2 DF1 Full Duplex Operation DF1 Full Duplex protocol also referred to as DF1 point to point protocol is useful where RS 232 point to point communication is required This type of protocol supports simultaneous transmissions between two devices in both directions DF1 protocol controls message flow detects and signals errors and retries if errors are detected DF1 Full Duplex Configuration Parameters When the system mode driver is DF1 Full Duplex the following parameters can be changed Parameter Options Default Toggles between the communication rate of 300 600 1200
116. 0 Programmable Controllers User Manual Example 2 13 14 Application example 2 involves a MicroLogix 1000 controller transmitting its first input word to another MicroLogix 1000 controller This is commonly referred to as change of state or report on exception messaging Using this type of logic significantly reduces network traffic which in turn significantly improves network throughput This is the message control rung The logic preceding the MSG instruction on this rung dictates when the MSG instruction is processed In this example the MSG instruction will only be processed when the active protocol is DH 485 and when there is no other communication Once the MSG instruction is enabled it locks itself into operation regardless of the preceding logic on the rung DH 485 Comms If the input status has changed Active Active enable the MSG S 0 S 1 NEQ MSG 1 E Not Equal READ WRITE MESSAGE EN 11 7 Source A I 1 0 Read write READ DN 0 Target Device SLC500 ML1000 Source B N7 10 Control Block N7 50 ER 0 Control Block Length 7 This rung controls when the MSG instruction is unlatched or reset The MSG instruction must be reset before it can re transmit new information Either of the following two conditions will reset the MSG instruction 1 when communication to the target device has been completed successfully or 2 when an error is detected in the communication sequence occurs after a
117. 1 second timer maintains accuracy with a program scan of up to 1 5 seconds If your programs can exceed 1 5 or 2 5 seconds repeat the timer instruction rung so that the rung is scanned within these limits Note Timing could be inaccurate if Jump JMP Label LBL Jump to Subroutine JSR or Subroutine SBR instructions skip over the rung containing a timer instruction while the timer is timing If the skip duration is within 2 5 second no time will be lost if the skip duration exceeds 2 5 seconds an undetectable timing error occurs When using subroutines a timer must be executed at least every 2 5 seconds to prevent a timing error Addressing Structure 6 8 Address bits and words using the format Tf e s b Format T Timer file Explanation f File number The only valid file number is 4 Element delimiter Tf e e Element number Ranges from 0 39 These are 3 word elements See figure on page 6 7 Word element s subelement Delimiter b bit Using Basic Instructions Addressing Examples T4 0 15 or T4 0 EN Enable bit e 74 0 14 or T4 0 TT Timer timing bit T4 0 13 or T4 0 DN Done bit T4 0 1 or T4 0 PRE Preset value of the timer T4 0 2 or T4 0 ACC Accumulator value of the timer T4 0 1 0 or T4 0 PRE 0 Bit 0 of the preset value e T4 0 2 0 or T4 0 ACC 0 Bit 0 of the accumulated value D pru Oo O sm 6 9 MicroLogix 1000
118. 1 19 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Selectable Timed Disable STD and Enable STE Execution Times usec when True False STD 6 69 3 16 STE 10 13 3 16 Using STD Using STE These instructions are generally used in pairs The purpose is to create zones in which STI interrupts cannot occur When true this instruction resets the STI enable bit and prevents the STI subroutine from executing When the rung goes false the STI enable bit remains reset until a true STS or STE instruction is executed The STI timer continues to operate while the enable bit is reset This instruction sets the STI enable bit and allows execution of the STI subroutine When the rung goes false the STI enable bit remains set until a true STD instruction is executed This instruction has no effect on the operation of the STI timer or setpoint When the enable bit is set the first execution of the STI subroutine can occur at any point up to the full STI interval STD STE Zone Example 11 20 In the program that follows the STI function is in effect The STD and STE instructions in rungs 6 and 12 are included in the ladder program to avoid having STI subroutine execution at any point in rungs 7 through 11 The STD instruction rung 6 resets the STI enable bit and the STE instruction rung 12 sets the enable bit again The STI timer increments and may time out in the STD zone setting the pending bit S 2 0 and lost b
119. 1 second count ie of rate periods E Sood EE A EEE E DIVIDE DIV Source A 100 Source B T4 0 PRE 10 Dest C5 1 PRE 10 Frequency determination counter ti ee RN Counter C5 1 Preset 10 Accum 0 Frequency calculation register ADD Source A N7 1 0 Source B N7 3 0 Dest N7 3 0 Application Example Programs Frequency calculation register Dest N7 3 Frequency determination counter COLL Temporary reg math reg is real destination Source A N7 4 Source B 60 Dest N7 6 RPM based on counts per turn register N7 2 DOUBLE DIVIDE Source N7 2 1000 Dest N7 5 Math overflow error bit CLEAR RES 4 MULTIPLY HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Up Res Hld CD Counter High Preset Accum C5 0 DN 1000 0 o o e LU i o um tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual On Off Circuit Example The following application example illustrates how to use an input to toggle an output either on or off For a detailed explanation of e XIC XIO OTE OTU OTL and OSR instructions see chapter 6 e JMP and LBL instructions see chapter 10 If the output is off when the input is energized the output is turned on If the output is on when the input is ene
120. 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual General Specifications Specification 1761 L Description 16AWA 20AWA 5A 32AWA 10BWA 16BWA 20BWA 5A 32BWA 32AAA 16BBB 10BWB 16BWB 20BWB 5A 32BWB 32BBB Memory Size Type 1 K EEPROM approximately 737 instruction words 437 data words Power Supply 85 264V ac 47 63 Hz 20 4 26 4V dc Voltage Power 120Vac 15 VA 20 VA 19 VA 24 VA 26VA 30VA 29 VA 16 VA Not Applicable Suppl qu I 240Vac 21VA 27VA 25VA a2VA 33VA 38VA 36VA 22VA 24V dc Not Applicable 5W 10W 7W Power Supply Max 30A for 8ms 30A for 4 ms 50A for 4 30A for 4 ms Inrush Current ms 24V dc Sensor Not Applicable 200 mA Not Applicable Power V dc at mA Max Capacitive 200 uF Load User 24V dc Power Cycles 50 000 minimum Operating Temp Horizontal mounting 0 C to 55 C 32 F to 131 F for horizontal mounting Vertical mounting 0 C to 45 C 32 F to 113 F for discrete 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F for analog Storage Temp 40 C to 85 C 40 F to 185 F Operating Humidity 5 to 95 noncondensing Vibration Operating 5 Hz to 2k Hz 0 381 mm 0 015 in peak to peak 2 5g panel mounted 1hr per axis Non operating 5 Hz to 2k Hz 0 762 mm 0 030 in peak to peak 5g 1hr per axis Shock Operating 10g peak acceleration 7 5g DIN rail mounted 11x1 ms durati
121. 11 48 The OSR instruction is a retentive input instruction that triggers an event to occur one time Use the OSR instruction when an event must start based on the change of state of the rung from false to true When the rung conditions preceding the OSR instruction go from false to true the OSR instruction will be true for one scan After one scan is complete the OSR instruction becomes false even if the rung conditions preceding it remain true The OSR instruction will only become true again if the rung conditions preceding it transition from false to true The controller allows you to use one OSR instruction per output in a rung Entering Parameters 6 6 The address assigned to the OSR instruction is not the one shot address referenced by your program nor does it indicate the state of the OSR instruction This address allows the OSR instruction to remember its previous rung state Use a bit address from either the bit or integer data file The addressed bit is set 1 for one scan when rung conditions preceding the OSR instruction are true even if the OSR instruction becomes false the bit is reset 0 when rung conditions preceding the OSR instruction are false Note The bit address you use for this instruction must be unique Do not use it elsewhere in the program Do not use an input or output address to program the address parameter of the OSR instruction Using Basic Instructions Example Rung I 1 0 B3 B
122. 12 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L10BWB Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 4 for additional configuration options 14 30V DC A 14 30V DC Je VDC VDC o Lo G gt o Ln G I COM D D V4 V5 NOT NOT NOT NOT USED USED COM J USED USED USED USED eee SM 7 vc l Hc 1 vac I vac l wor NOT NOT V voc O0 vpc O ypc O2 voc O 3 USED USED USED 1761 L10BWB Input Voltage Range 0V dc 5V dc 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F On 1761 L10BWB Output Voltage Range OV ac 5V ac 264V ac OV dc 5V dc 125V de Operating Range 2 13 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1761 L16BWB Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 4 for additional configuration options E 14 30V DC 8 1430VDC n VDC VDC VDC VDC p Tek vc d ove d wc wc d 2 FST voc O0 vpc vg O2 voc OB voc O4 Of 1761 L16BWB Input Voltage Range 0V dc 5V dc 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F On 1761 L16BWB Output Voltage Range OV ac 5V ac 264V ac OV de 5V de 125V de Operating Range 2 14 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L32BWB Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 4 for additional configuration options Sinking Configuration Sourcing Configuration H 1430V DC J VDC VDC 14 30 VDC o Lo G gt o Ln G I NOT NOT DC
123. 13 spacing 1 14 type 1 2 wiring 2 4 wiring diagram 2 10 1761L10BWB features 1 3 grounding 2 2 input voltage range 2 13 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 13 preventing excessive heat 1 13 spacing 1 14 type 1 2 wiring 2 4 wiring diagram 2 13 1761L16AWA features 1 3 grounding 2 2 input voltage range 2 8 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 8 preventing excessive heat 1 13 spacing 1 14 troubleshooting 14 2 type 1 2 wiring 2 4 wiring diagram 2 8 1761L16BBB features 1 3 grounding 2 2 Index input voltage range 2 17 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 17 preventing excessive heat 1 13 spacing 1 14 troubleshooting 14 2 type 1 2 wiring 2 4 wiring diagram 2 17 1761L16BWA features 1 3 grounding 2 2 input voltage range 2 11 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 11 preventing excessive heat 1 13 spacing 1 14 troubleshooting 14 2 type 1 2 wiring 2 4 wiring diagram 2 11 1761L16BWB features 1 3 grounding 2 2 input voltage range 2 14 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 14 preventing excessive heat 1 13 spacing 1 14 troubleshooting 14 2 type 1 2 wiring 2 4 wiring diagram 2 14 1761L20AWA5A features 1 3 input voltage range 2 19 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 19 Index 1 preventing excessive heat 1 13 spacing 1 14 type 1 2 wiring diagram 2 19 1761L20BWA5A features 1 3 input vol
124. 14 words If you plan to run a MicroLogix 1000 program with one of these processors make sure that the program has at least 7 unused words following each MSG control block The table that follows illustrates combinations of message types and target devices and their valid file types Command Type d Initiating Device pred Target Device Valid File Types SLC500 ML1000 Write MicroLogix 1000 O I S B T C R N MicroLogix 1000 O I S B T C R N SLC500 ML1000 Read MicroLogix 1000 O 1 S B T C R N MicroLogix 1000 O I S B T C R N CIF Write MicroLogix 1000 O 1 S B T C R N MicroLogix 1000 N7 CIF Read MicroLogix 1000 O 1 S B T C R N MicroLogix 1000 N7 SLC500 ML1000 Write MicroLogix 1000 O 1 S B T C R N SLC 500 Qelo S BORN SLC500 ML1000 Read MicroLogix 1000 O 1 S B T C R N SLC 500 QeleS BC RN CIF Write MicroLogix 1000 O 1 S B T C R N SLC 500 N9 CIF Read MicroLogix 1000 O I S B T C R N SLC 500 N9 TheDF1 Full Duplex protocol can be used if the target device supports it Such devices include MicroLogix 1000 controllers any series SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors and PLC 5 processors CIF command type only The DH 485 protocol can be used if the target device supports it Such devices include MicroLogix 1000 controllers except for Series A and B discrete controllers and SLC 500 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 processors Th
125. 17 operation 11 17 interrupt latency and interrupt occurrences 11 18 interrupt priorities 11 19 status file data saved 11 19 subroutine content 11 18 overview 11 17 Selectable Timed Disable STD 11 20 Selectable Timed Enable STE 11 20 Selectable Timed Start STS 11 22 STD STE zone example 11 20 Selectable Timed Start STS 11 22 selected DF1 protocol bit S 0 12 B 5 Selecting Surge Suppressors 1 8 Sequencer Compare SQC 11 7 entering parameters 11 8 using 11 12 sequencer instructions overview 11 7 effects on index register S 24 11 7 Sequencer Compare SQC 11 7 Sequencer Load SQL 11 14 Sequencer Output SQO 11 7 Sequencer Load SQL 11 14 entering parameters 11 14 operation 11 16 Sequencer Output SQO 11 7 entering parameters 11 8 Index 12 using 11 10 sinking and sourcing circuits overview 2 3 wiring examples 2 3 slave receiver communication 13 2 spacing the controller 1 14 specifications analog input A 7 analog output A 8 general A 3 general output A 5 input A 4 input filter response times A 9 relay contact rating A 7 SQC Sequencer Compare 11 7 SQL Sequencer Load 11 14 SQO Sequencer Output 11 7 SQR Square Root 8 11 Square Root SQR 8 11 updates to arithmetic status bits 8 11 status data file S2 4 6 status file descriptions B 3 overview B 1 STD Selectable Timed Disable 11 20 STE Selectable Timed Enable 11 20 STI Selectable Timed Interrupt 11 17
126. 2 23 Index HighSpeed Counter Load HSL 12 18 HighSpeed Counter Reset Accumulator RAC 12 22 overview 12 2 HighSpeed Counter Interrupt Disable HSD 12 23 using HSD 12 24 operation 12 24 HighSpeed Counter Interrupt Enable HSE 12 23 using HSE 12 23 operation 12 23 HighSpeed Counter Load HSL 12 18 entering parameters 12 18 operation 12 18 HighSpeed Counter Reset Accumulator RAC 12 22 entering parameters 12 22 operation 12 22 HSC HighSpeed Counter 12 6 HSD HighSpeed Counter Interrupt Disable 12 23 HSE HighSpeed Counter Interrupt Enable 12 23 HSL HighSpeed Counter Load 12 18 I O configuration analog 5 3 T O image analog 5 2 identifying controller faults 14 6 IIM Immediate Input with Mask 10 9 Immediate Input with Mask IIM 10 9 entering parameters 10 9 Immediate Output with Mask IOM 10 9 entering parameters 10 9 indexed addressing 4 12 C 2 example 4 12 specifying 4 12 Input Channel Filtering 5 4 input current range analog 2 24 input file I 4 6 Index 7 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Input Filter analog 5 3 input filter settings A 9 input specifications A 4 Input States on Power Down 1 13 input voltage ranges 1761L10BWA 2 10 1761L10BWB 2 13 1761L16AWA 2 8 1761L16BBB 2 17 1761L16BWA 2 11 1761L16BWB 2 14 1761L20A WASA 2 19 1761L20BWASA 2 20 1761L20BWBSA 2 21 1761L32AAA 2 16 1761L32AWA 2 9 1761L32BBB 2 18 1761L32BWA 2 12
127. 2 Dest ANALOG SCALE FESTER io eet Glossary Glossary The following terms are used throughout this manual Refer to the Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary Publication Number AG 7 1 for a complete guide to Allen Bradley technical terms address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location For example I 1 0 is the memory address for the data located in the Input file location word1 bit 0 AIC Advanced Interface Converter a device that provides a communication link between various networked devices Catalog Number 1761 NET AIC application 1 A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller 2 The use of computer or processor based routines for specific purposes backup data Data downloaded with the program baud rate The speed of communication between devices on a network All devices must communicate at the same baud rate bit The smallest storage location in memory that contains either a 1 ON ora 0 OFF block diagrams A schematic drawing Boolean operators Logical operators such as AND OR NAND NOR NOT and Exclusive OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic statements or circuits Can have an output response be true or false branch A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program channel Refers to the analog signals available on the controller s terminal block Each channel is configured for connection to a voltage or curre
128. 2400 4800 9600 Pad Bale 19 200 and 38 4K 2500 Node Address Valid range is 0 254 decimal 1 Control Line Toggles between No Handshaking and Half Duplex Modem BU Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message Duplicate packets Duplicate Packet posui vx es Detection may be sent under noisy communication conditions when the sender s retries Enabled are not set to 0 Toggles between Enabled and Disabled Error Detection Toggles between CRC and BCC CRC Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the RTS Off Dela modem and when RTS will be deactivated Gives modem extra time to transmit 0 y the last character of a packet The valid range is 0 255 and can be set in increments of 5 ms Specifies the time delay between setting RTS request to send until checking for RTS Send Dela the CTS clear to send response For use with modems that are not ready to 0 y respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS The valid range is 0 255 and can be set in increments of 5 ms Poll Timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction It is the amount of time that the slave device will wait for a poll from the master device If the slave device does not receive a poll within the Poll Timeout a MSG Poll Timeout instruction error will be generated and the ladder program will need to requeue 3000 60s the MSG instruction The valid range is 0 65535 and can be set in increments of 20 ms
129. 3 is true and retains the accumulated value when the instruction goes false or when power cycle occurs CTU Count Up Increments the accumulated value at each 6 17 false to true transition and retains the accumulated value when the instruction goes false or when power cycle occurs CTD Count Down Decrements the accumulate value at each 6 18 false to true transition and retains the accumulated value when the instruction goes false or when power cycle occurs RES Reset Resets the accumulated value and status bits 6 20 of a timer or counter Do not use with TOF timers About the Basic Instructions These instructions when used in ladder programs represent hardwired logic circuits used for the control of a machine or equipment The basic instructions are separated into three groups bit timer and counter Before you learn about the instructions in each of these groups we suggest that you read the overview that precedes the group Bit Instructions Overview Timer Instructions Overview Counter Instructions Overview 6 2 Using Basic Instructions Bit Instructions Overview These instructions operate on a single bit of data During operation the controller may set or reset the bit based on the logical continuity of ladder rungs You can address a bit as many times as your program requires Note Using the same address with multiple output instructions is not recommended Bit instructions are used with
130. 3 0 3 0 E 1 Et OSR 0 1 0 B3 B3 0 3 0 Et OSR 2 3 Timer Instructions Overview A Each timer address is made of a 3 word element Word 0 is the control word word 1 stores the preset value and word 2 stores the accumulated value 4 pj 15 14 13 Word 9 EN TT DN Internal Use 0 Preset Value 1 Accumulator Value 2 EN Timer Enable Bit TT Timer Timing Bit DN Timer Done Bit Entering Parameters Accumulator Value ACC This is the time elapsed since the timer was last reset When enabled the timer updates this continually Preset Value PRE Specifies the value which the timer must reach before the controller sets the done bit When the accumulated value becomes equal to or greater than the preset value the done bit is set You can use this bit to control an output device Preset and accumulated values for timers range from 0 to 32 767 If a timer preset or accumulated value is a negative number a runtime error occurs 6 7 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Timebase Timer Accuracy The timebase determines the duration of each timebase interval The timebase is selectable as 0 01 10 ms second or 1 0 second Timer accuracy refers to the length of time between the moment a timer instruction is enabled and the moment the timed interval is complete Timing accuracy is 0 01 to 0 seconds with a program scan of up to 2 5 seconds The
131. 3 4 0 3 6 Hole Selector Switch Thumbwheel for Thickness pii Change Reset HAT Keyswitch 1 1 11 1 1 14 14 8 OO Drill Drilled C1 Holes I 11 23 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 4 0 Resets the hole count sequencers each time that the low preset is reached The low preset has been set to zero to cause an interrupt to occur each time that a reset occurs The low preset is reached anytime that a reset C5 0 or hardware reset occurs This ensures that the first preset value is loaded into the HSC at each entry into the REM Run mode and each time that the external reset signal is activated interrupt 3 hole occurred preset due to sequencer low preset reached INT C5 0 R6 4 5 hole preset sequencer R6 5 RES 7 hole preset sequencer R6 6 RES 4 11 24 Using Application Specific Instructions Rung 4 1 This rung keeps track of the hole number that is being drilled and loads the next correct HSC preset based on the hole count This rung is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 3 hole position The sequencer uses step 0 as a null step upon reset It uses the last step as a go forever in anticipation of the end of manual hard wired external reset hole hole 3 hole selector selector preset switch switch sequencer bit 0 bit 1 I 0 I 0 SQ0
132. 3 I 0 0 0 seee poor eget Sere ooo 1 Sess cece series pesos Pasesl esse Ys sacs d 0 5 5 Drill Motor ON 0 0 pessat SSR esee 1 Rungs 2 0 through 2 2 will be added in chapter 12 Using Basic Instructions Adding File 6 This subroutine controls the up and down motion of the drill for the paper drilling machine Dat ome LIC Drill On Off O 1 Drill Retract O 2 Drill Forward O 8 Drill Depth 1 4 Rung 6 0 This section of ladder logic controls the up down motion of the drill for the book drilling machine When the conveyor positions the book under the drill the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is set This rung uses that bit to begin the drilling e2 E E E i fe fe n operation Because the bit is set for the entire drilling operation the OSR is required to be able to turn off the forward signal so the drill must retract Drill Drill Subr Drill Sequence OSR Forward Start B3 B3 O eee asisas OSR e eee E E a EA bE 32 48 3 Rung 6 1 When the drill has drilled through the book the body of the drill will actuate the DRILL DEPTH limit switch When this happens the DRILL FORWARD signal is turned off and the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned on The drill is automatically on power up if it is not actuating the DRILL HOME limit switch Drill Drill Depth LS Forward T O U 4 3 l st Drill Drill Pass Home LS Retract Sil I 1
133. 8 5 32 768 through 5 and 8 through 32 767 6 and 7 7 7 e2 lt i fe fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Comparison Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example This section provides ladder rungs to demonstrate the use of comparison instructions The rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example described in appendix E You will be adding an instruction to file 2 and beginning a subroutine in file 7 Adding to File 2 To begin you will need to return to the rungs first entered in chapter 6 One more instruction needs to be added to the first rung to keep track of the drill life This rung is indicated below by the shading Notice that text has also been added to the rung comment Note Do not add this instruction if you are using a 16 I O controller Address 0 0 6 is only valid for 32 I O controllers Rung 2 3 Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed However there are other conditions that must also be met before we start the conveyor They are the drill must be in its fully retracted position home the drill bit must not be past its maximum useful life This rung also stops the conveyor when the stop button is pressed or when the drill life is exceeded START Drill STOP change Machine Button Home LS Button drill bit RUN NOW Latch I 0 I 0 I 0 0 0 B3 excep eeeemAe Jis ees deae pese V pee esto
134. AIC R ah 1761 CBL APO0 or 1761 CBL PMO2 Ng 1761 CBL PM02 AIC 1761 NET AIC 24V dc user supply needed if not connected to a MicroLogix 1000 controller 1747 CP3 24V de Or MicroLogix DH 485 Network user supplied 1761 CBL ACOO 1 DB 9 RS 232 port z mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 3 DH 485 port DF1 Isolated Modem Connection 1761 CBL AMOO or 1761 CBL HM02 S MicroLogix 1000 1761 NETAIC rr je sil Selection Switch Up 24V dc Not needed in this configuration since the MicroLogix 1000 provides power to the AIC via port 2 User supplied modem cable For additional information on connections using the AIC see the Advanced Interface Converter AIC and DeviceNet Interface DNI Installation Instructions Publication 1761 5 11 3 12 Connecting the System Constructing Your Own Modem Cable If you construct your own modem cable the maximum cable length is 15 24 m 50 ft o with a 25 pin or 9 pin connector Refer to the following typical pinout G E ar Modem T 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 3 TXD TXD 2 3 2 RXD g RXD 3 2 5 GND gt GND 7 5 1 o k CD 8 1 4 DTR p DIR 20 4 6 DSR DSR 6 6 8 CTS g CTS 5 8 7 RTS gt RTS 4 7 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Cable Selection Guide A 1747 CP3 1761 CBL AC00
135. Accum 0 Rung 2 1 Controls the RED GREEN and YELLOW lights wired to outputs O 0 0 O 0 2 and controls how long the regenerative timer times between each step When this rung goes from false to true by the timer reaching its preset the first sequencer changes which traffic light is illuminated and the second sequencer changes the preset of the timer to determine how long this next light is illuminated RED GREEN and YELLOW lights T4 0 8Q0 SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN DN File N7 0 DN Mask 00074 ees 0 0 0 Control R6 0 Length 3 Position ol Timer Presets for each lights SQO SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN File N7 5 DN Mask FFFF Dest T4 0 PRE Control R6 1 Length 3 Position 0 E 18 Application Example Programs Data Files Address 15 Data 0 N7 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 N7 1 0000 0000 0000 0100 N7 2 0000 0000 0000 0010 N7 3 0000 0000 0000 0001 Data Table Address Data Radix Decimal N7 0 0 4 2 1 0 0 6000 1500 3000 Event Driven Sequencer Application Example The following application example illustrates how the FD found bit on an SQC instruction can be used to advance a SQO to the next step position This application program is used when a specific order of events is required to occur repeatedly By using this combination you can eliminate usi
136. Analog Data The analog input circuits are able to monitor current and voltage signals and convert them to digital data There are six terminals assigned to the input channels that provide two voltage inputs two current inputs and two return signals commons The analog outputs can support either a current or voltage function There are three terminals assigned to the output channels that provide one voltage output one current output and a common shared terminal The following table shows sample Analog Signal and Data Word values using the e nominal transfer function formula c N L x 32767 21 where Iin analog signal is in milliamperes mA N V n X 32767 10 5 where Vin analog signal is in volts V E N Iout 4 mA x 32767 16 mA where I ut analog signal is in milliamperes Oo fe mA N V ut X 32767 10V where Vout analog signal is in volts V a Analog Signal Data Word Input Output OV 0 0 5V 15603 16384 10V 31207 32767 4mA 6241 0 11 mA 17164 14336 20 mA 31207 32767 Converting Analog Input Data Analog inputs convert current and voltage signals into 16 bit two s complement binary values To determine an approximate voltage that an input value represents use one of the equations shown on the following page 5 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 10 5V _ UY t V 32 767 xinputvalue inputvoltage V The Input Value is the decimal value of the word in
137. B 3 S 1L low byte Controller Mode Status Control low B 5 S 1H high byte Controller Mode Status Control Hi B 5 S 2L low byte Controller Alternate Mode Status Control low B 8 S 2H high byte Controller Alternate Mode Status Control Hi B 8 S 3L low byte Current Scan Time B 11 S 3H high byte Watchdog Scan Time B 11 8S4 Timebase B 12 S 5 Minor Error Bits B 12 S 6 Major Error Code B 20 S7 Suspend Code B 22 S 8 to 8 12 Reserved B 22 8 13 8 14 Math Register B 22 S 15L low byte DF1 Full or Half Duplex Node Address B 23 S 15H high byte DF1 Full or Half Duplex Baud Rate B 23 S 16L low byte DH 485 Node Address B 23 S 16H high byte DH 485 Baud Rate B 23 8 17 to S 21 Reserved B 23 8 22 Maximum Observed Scan Time B 24 23 Reserved B 24 24 Index Register B 24 S 25 to 29 Reserved B 24 30 STI Setpoint B 24 31 and 32 Reserved B 24 Programming Reference Status File Descriptions The following tables describe the status file functions beginning at address S 0 and ending at address S 32 Each status bit is classified as one of the following e Status Use these words bytes or bits to monitor controller operation or controller status information The information is seldom written to by the user program or programming device unless you want to reset or clear a function such as a monitor bit Dynamic Configuration Use these words bytes or bits to select controller options while
138. C Generic Immunity Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Hardware Overview The MicroLogix 1000 programmable controller is a packaged controller containing a power supply input circuits output circuits and a processor The controller is available in 10 I O 16 I O and 32 I O configurations as well as an analog version with 20 discrete I O and 5 analog I O Installing Your Controller The catalog number for the controller is composed of the following 1761 L20AWA 5A o l E JE ME MESE OLJ o Bulletin Number 1 Analog I O gt O BaseUnit 1 1j Analog Circuits G Inputs 4 I Unit O Count 20 Outputs 1 Input Signal Power Supply A 120Vac A 120 240V ac B 24V dc B 24V dc Output Type W Relay B MOSFET A Triac The hardware features of the controller are Input terminals dc output terminals or not used amp Mounting hole amp Input LEDs Status LEDs RS 232 communication channel Saat amp Output LEDs a Power supply line power Ground screw Output terminals 0000000 1 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Master Control Relay A hard wired master control relay MCR provides a reliable means for emergency controller shutdown Since the master control relay allows the placement of several emer
139. EM reconfigure your controller with your programming software choose Bul 1761 14 8 Error Troubleshooting Your System Code Advisory Description Recommended Action Message Hex 0020 MINOR ERROR A minor fault bit bits 0 7 in S 5 was setat Enter the status file display and AT END OF the end of scan clear the fault SCAN SEE 8 5 Return to the REM Run mode 0022 WATCHDOG The program scan time exceeded the Verify if the program is caught in a TIMER watchdog timeout value S 3H loop and correct the problem EXPIRED SEE Increase the watchdog timeout S 3 value in the status file 0024 INVALID STI An invalid STI interval exists not between 0 Set the STI interval between the INTERRUPT and 255 values of 0 and 255 SETPOINT SEE 30 0025 TOO MANY There are more than 3 subroutines nested Correct the user program to meet JSRs IN STI in the STI subroutine file 5 the requirements and restrictions SUBROUTINE for the JSR instruction Reload the program and enter the REM Run mode 0027 TOO MANY There are more than 3 subroutines nested Correct the user program to meet JSRsINFAULT in the fault routine file 3 the requirements and restrictions SUBROUTINE for the JSR instruction Reload the program and enter the REM Run mode 002A INDEXED The program is referencing through indexed Correct the user program to not go ADDRESS TOO addressing an element beyond a file be
140. Equal Test whether one value is less than or equaltoa 7 4 second value GRT Greater Than Test whether one value is greater than another 7 4 GEQ Greater Than or Test whether one value is greater than or equal 7 4 Equal to a second value MEQ Masked Test portions of two values to see whether they 7 5 Comparison for are equal Compares 16 bit data of a source Equal address to 16 bit data at a reference address through a mask LIM Limit Test Test whether one value is within the limit range 7 6 of two other values 7 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual About the Comparison Instructions Comparison instructions are used to test pairs of values to condition the logical continuity of a rung As an example suppose a LES instruction is presented with two values If the first value is less than the second then the comparison instruction is true To learn more about the compare instructions we suggest that you read the Compare Instructions Overview that follows Comparison Instructions Overview The following general information applies to comparison instructions Indexed Word Addresses When using comparison instructions you have the option of using indexed word addresses for instruction parameters specifying word addresses Indexed addressing is discussed in chapter 5 7 2 Using Comparison Instructions Equal EQU Use the EQU instruction to test whether two values are equal If source A and source
141. Execution Times usec when True False 23 60 6 60 Use the LEQ instruction to test whether one value source A is less than or equal to another source B If the value at source A is less than or equal to the value of source B the instruction is logically true If the value at source A is greater than the value of source B the instruction is logically false Source A must be a word address Source B can be either a constant or word address Negative integers are stored in two s complement form Greater Than GRT Execution Times usec when True False 23 60 6 60 Use the GRT instruction to test whether one value source A is greater than another source B If the value at source A is greater than the value of source B the instruction is logically true If the value at source A is less than or equal to the value of source B the instruction is logically false Source A must be a word address Source B can be either a constant or word address Negative integers are stored in two s complement form Greater Than or Equal GEQ omy GATA THAN OR EQUAL Source A Source B Execution Times usec when True False 23 60 6 60 7 4 Use the GEQ instruction to test whether one value source A is greater than or equal to another source B If the value at source A is greater than or equal to the value of source B the instruction is logically true If the value at source A
142. G rung goes from false to true Done Bit DN bit 13 is set when the message is transmitted successfully The DN bit is reset cleared the next time the MSG rung goes from false to true Using the Message Instruction Start Bit ST bit 14 is set when the processor receives acknowledgment from the target device This identifies that the target device has started to process the MSG request The ST bit is reset when the DN ER or TO bit is set or on a false to true MSG rung transition Enable Bit EN bit 15 is set only if the transmit buffer is available If the transmit buffer is not available the EN flag remains false When the transmit buffer becomes available the EN flag goes true It remains set until the next false rung execution after the MSG completes DN bit set or an error occurs ER bit set Note The operation of the EN bit has changed since Series C The operation associated with a message read or write instruction is send when you enable the instruction Replies are processed at the end of the scan Controller Communication Status Bit e2 E E E fe fe n When using the MSG instruction you should also use the following controller communication status bit Active Protocol Bit S 0 11 This is a read only bit that indicates which communication protocol is currently enabled or functioning where 0 DF1 default and 1 DH 485 Use this bit in your program to restrict message operation to t
143. High Speed Counter HSL HSC LOAD dep Counter C5 0 Source N7 5 Length 5 Rung 2 1 This HSC instruction is not placed in the high speed counter interrupt subroutine If this instruction were placed in the interrupt subroutine the high speed counter could never be started or initialized because an interrupt must first occur in order to scan the high speed counter interrupt subroutine High Speed Counter FHS CHS ideana emot B HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Encoder Res H1d CD Counter C5 0 DN High Preset 1250 Accum 1 Rung 2 2 Application Example Programs Forces a high speed counter low preset interrupt to occur each REM Run mode entry An accum to a preset value interrupt can only occur on the transition of the high speed counter accum reset to 1 This is done to allow the then 0 The order of high speed counter interrupt subroutine sequencers to initialize high speed counter HSL initialization is 1 load high speed counter parameters 2 execute HSL instruction 3 execute true HSC instruction 4 optional force high speed counter interrupt to occur 14st High Speed Counter Pass S 1 FRAC S55 gt se55s55 S555 RESET TO ACCUM VALUE LS Counter C50 Source i dpueeIA ee 4 ceeBcSw High Speed Counter C520 RES Rung 2 3 However a
144. High Speed structure direct T C R element Not Applicable Counter Reset level RET Return Not Applicable RTO Retentive timer direct T element level Not Applicable Timer time base immediate 0 01 or 1 00 preset contained in the 0 32 767 timer register accum contained in the 0 32 767 timer register SBR Subroutine Not Applicable SCL Scale source direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct rate immediate direct O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct offset immediate direct O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct SQC Sequencer file indexed direct O I S B N Not Applicable Compare D Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses C 11 o o es LU t o _ tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual nee Instruction Valid Addressing Instruction Description Parameters Mode s Valid File Types Valid Value Ranges SQC Sequencer file indexed direct O I S B N Not Applicable Compare mask immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct source direct indexed O I SB T C R N Not Applicable direct control direct R element level Not Applicable length contained in the 1 255 control register position contained in the 0 255 control regist
145. LL 26 86 3 62 word 7 9 10 Using Data Handling Instructions Using COP This instruction copies blocks of data from one location into another It uses no status bits If you need an enable bit program an output instruction OTE in parallel using an internal bit as the output address The following figure shows how file instruction data is manipulated Source Destination File to File Entering Parameters e2 E E E i fe fe n Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction e Source is the address of the first word in the file to be copied You must use the file indicator in the address Destination is the address of the first word in the file where the data is to be stored You must use the file indicator in the address Length is the number of words or elements in the file to be copied See the table on the next page HAE then you can specify a maximum length of If the destination file type is a n Discrete Analog Output 1 5 Input 2 8 Status 33 33 Bit 32 32 Timer 40 40 Counter 32 32 Control 16 16 Integer 105 105 Note The maximum lengths apply when the source is of the same file type 9 11 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using FLL All elements are copied from the source file into the destination file each time the instruction is exec
146. Load 10 0 mA 1mA 10 0 mA Current Current per Controller 1440 VA 3A for L16BBB 1440 VA 6A for L32BBB Current per Common 8 0A 3A for L16BBB Not Applicable 6A for L32BBB Maximum Off State 0 mA 1 mA 2 mA 132V ac Leakage Current 4 5 mA 264V ac Repeatability is once every 2 seconds at 55 C 131 F AS Hardware Reference Type Relay MOSFET Triac Off to On Response 10 ms max 0 1 ms 8 8 ms 60 Hz 10 6 ms 50 Hz On to Off Response 10 ms max 1ms 11 0 ms Surge Current per Not Applicable 4A for 10 ms 10A for 25 ms Point Relay life Electrical Refer to Relay Life Not Applicable Not Applicable Chart Relay life 20 000 000 cycles Not Applicable Not Applicable Mechanical Repeatability is once every 2 seconds at 55 C 131 F Relay Life Chart 250 VAC 30 VDC res istive load 5 250 VAC 30 VDC inductive load cosg 0 4 L R 7 ms 500 300 wt Oo rr JX amp 100 o 5S 50 2 30 o Q E 10 6 Ti o E 3 Z Switching capacity A A 6 o 5 hl t S dl tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Relay Contact Rating Table applies to all Bulletin 1761 controllers Maxi Amperes Amperes Voltamperes aximum F Volts Continuous Make Break per Point Make Break 240V a
147. Logix 1000 Manual controller P 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual For Read this Document Document Number Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix MicroLogix 1000 1761 5 1 2 1000 controllers including a mounting template for easy Programmable Controllers installation Installation Instructions MicroLogix 1000 Analog 1761 5 1 3 Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions The procedures necessary to install and connect the AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 5 11 and DNI AIC and DeviceNet Interface DNI Installation Instructions A description on how to install and connect an AIC This Advanced Interface Converter 1761 6 4 manual also contains information on network wiring AIC User Manual or on how to install configure and commission a DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761 6 5 In depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Programmable 1770 4 1 programmable controllers Controller Grounding and Wiring Guidelines A description of important differences between solid state Application Considerations for Solid SGI 1 1 programmable controller products and hard wired State Controls electromechanical devices An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical National Electrical Code Published by equipment the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA A complete listing of current documentat
148. M02 1761 CBL PH02 oo Power Selection Cable Length Connections from to AIC Power Supply i m M Switch Setting Required 1761 CBL APOO 45cm 17 7 in SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processors channel 0 port2 yes external 1761 CBL PM02 2m 6 5 ft 1761 CBL PHO2 2m 6 5 ft MicroLogix 1000 porti yes external PanelView 550 through NULL modem adapter port 2 yes external DTAM Plus DTAM Micro port 2 yes external PC COM port port2 yes external user supplied cable External Power Selection Cable Connections from to AIC Power Supply Switch Setting Required straight 9 25 pin modem or other communication device port 1 yes external External power supply required unless the AlC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable Series B or higher cables are required for hardware handshaking o gt o Len G I MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Recommended User Supplied Components These components can be purchased from your local electronics supplier Component Recommended Model external power supply and chassis ground power supply rated for 20 4 28 8V dc NULL modem adapter standard AT straight 9 25 pin RS 232 cable see table below for port information if making own cables 1761 CBL APO0 or 1761 CBL PM02 DB 9 RS 232 Port 1 En DH 485 c
149. MORY IS noise problem may have occurred Your Contact your local Allen Bradley CORRUPT program may be valid but retentive data representative if the error persists will be lost 0004 RUNTIME While the controller was in the RUN mode Cycle power on your unit MEMORY or any test mode the ROM or RAM Download your program and re INTEGRITY became corrupt If the user program is initialize any necessary data ERROR valid the program and initial data Start up your system downloaded to the controller is used and the Retentive Data Lost Bit S 5 8 is set If the user program is invalid error 0003 occurs Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists 14 7 2 c O o X o a Q 2 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Eror Advisory Code M Description Recommended Action essage Hex 0005 RETENTIVE The data files input output timer counter Cycle power on your unit DATA HAS BEEN integer binary control and status are Download your program and re LOST corrupt initialize any necessary data Start up your system Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the error persists 0008 FATAL The controller software has detected an Cycle power on your unit INTERNAL invalid condition within the hardware or Download your program and re SOFTWARE software after completing power up initialize any necessary data ERROR processing
150. N7 10 0 Rungs 7 2 through 7 4 are added at the end of Chapter 9 8 14 Using Math Instructions Rung 7 6 When the number of 1 4 increments surpasses 1000 finds out how many increments we are past 1000 and stores in N7 20 Add 1 to the total of 1000 1 4 increments and re initializes the 1 4 increments accumulator to how many increments were beyond 1000 1 4 increments GEQ SUB GRTR THAN OR EQUAL SUBTRACT Source A N7 10 Source A N7 10 0 0 Source B 1000 Source B 1000 qusc Abe SSSR Ree mie ee Dest N7 20 2 ME SoS SSS SSS Se SSS 1 4 e Thousands ADD G ADD pte Source A 1 9 9 Source B N7 11 0 ou Dest N7 11 0 tie assaf esse ees eee 1 4 Increments MOV MOVE Source N7 20 0 Dest N7 10 0 a a a ac alge ati Rung 7 7 END MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Notes 8 16 Using Data Handling Instructions Using Data Handling Instructions This chapter contains general information about the data handling instructions and explains how they function in your application program Each of the instructions includes information on e what the instruction symbol looks like typical execution time for the instruction e
151. Output Pattern turn off O 0 0 MOV MOVE Source 0 Dest N7 6 0 High Preset Value counts to next hole MOV MOVE Source 32767 Dest N7 7 0 Low output pattern turn on 0 0 0 each reset MOV MOVE Source 1 Dest N7 8 0 eee eene Low preset value cause low preset int at reset MOV MOVE Source 0 Dest N7 9 0 HSL HSC LOAD Counter C5 0 Source N7 5 Length 5 Using High Speed Counter Instructions Rungs 2 0 and 2 2 are required to write several parameters to the high speed counter data file area These two rungs are conditioned by the first pass bit during one scan when the controller is going from REM program to REM Run mode Rung 2 1 This HSC instruction is not placed in the high speed counter interrupt subroutine If this instruction were placed in the interrupt subroutine the high speed counter could never be started or initialized because an interrupt must first occur in order to scan the high speed counter interrupt subroutine High Speed Counter HSC 226 22 SSS RSS HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU 92 Type Encoder Res Hld CD c Counter C5 0 DN High Preset 1250 Accum T Pe SSS sae Sse Sea SSS i Rung 2 2
152. RRARE EE Be bene Gee age Ad sed 7 6 Comparison Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example 7 8 Using Math Instructions About the Math Instructions llle 8 2 Math Instructions Overview lll 8 2 AdA ADD PEMEX 8 4 Subtract SUB ac ace Ee RAE P ERE REA dae PEGA DA E EE 8 5 32 Bit Addition and Subtraction llle 8 6 Multiply MUL cete ener ntc da aee Rad eeu er rr rr cedes 8 8 Divide DIN 555 avy aa Pista te Pu ice Xa Quedan Ix dul ote a 8 9 Double Divide DDV ssa Piast vee CR OR aed XO DR HOO es Yas 8 10 Clear GER ioci Sees LAU RC NUDO REV A PEOPLES dads 8 11 Square Root 9 us sm sc adiacet a POSER S 685 2 re CR as a 8 11 Scale Data 9S6L s ties used uso E wee Moss Lie A iS SE 8 12 Math Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example 8 14 Using Data Handling Instructions About the Data Handling Instructions sssossseess esse rss ss eae 9 2 Convert to BCD TODY i4 sco nebst erem b RR E OU AR E 9 3 Convert from BCD FRD 2 22i eth aaaea rr rr rr Sede 9 4 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD 24 sse uu od eee es abe teh d eem Rd 9 8 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENG ve ERR e qur ES EMEN S 9 9 Copy File COP and Fill File FLL Instructions 9 10 Move and Logical Instructions Overview llle 9 13 toc iii MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 10 11 toc iv MOVE MOM TT us inl etic Veta Uae he oes oj sd tss 9 15 M
153. SG instructions to devices on the DH network e PC can send read and write commands to MicroLogix controllers e PC can do remote programming of MicroLogix controllers MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controller DH 485 Network Y c D D I7 tc MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1000 SLC 5 03 System EOM epe Programmable Controller ontroller D 21 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Notes D 22 Application Example Programs E Application Example Programs This appendix is designed to illustrate various instructions described previously in this manual Application example programs include e paper drilling machine using most of the software instructions time driven sequencer using TON and SQO instructions event driven sequencer using SQC and SQO instructions bottle line example using the HSC instruction Up down counter e pick and place machine example using the HSC instruction Quadrature Encoder with reset and hold RPM calculation using HSC RTO timer and math instructions e on off circuit using basic program flow and application specific instructions spray booth using bit shift and FIFO instructions adjustable time delay example using timer instructions Because of the variety of uses for this information the user of and those responsible for applying this information must satisfy themselves as to the acceptability of each application and use of the progra
154. Valid File Types Valid Value Ranges Parameters Mode s source B immediate direct O 1 S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct ENC Encode 1 of 16 source direct indexed O I SB T C R N Not Applicable to 4 direct destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct EQU Equal source A direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct source B immediate direct O 1 S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max FFL FIFO Load source direct indexed O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 direct FIFO array indexed direct O I S B N Not Applicable FIFO control direct R element level Not Applicable length contained in the 1 128 control register position contained in the 0 127 control register FFU FIFO Unload FIFO array indexed direct O I S B N Not Applicable destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct FIFO control direct R element level Not Applicable length contained in the 1 128 control register position contained in the 0 127 control register D Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses o o en ch i o _ tc C 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual s I
155. Y Source A Source B Dest H Execution Times usec when True False 57 96 6 78 Use the MUL instruction to multiply one value source A by another source B and place the result in the destination Source A and B can either be a word address or constant If the result is larger than 32 767 or smaller than 32 767 16 bits the 32 bit result is placed in the math register Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C always resets S 0 1 Overflow V sets if overflow is detected at destination otherwise resets On overflow the minor error flag is also set The value 32 768 or 32 767 is placed in the destination If S 2 14 math overflow selection bit is set then the unsigned truncated overflow remains in the destination S 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets S 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative otherwise resets Changes to the Math Register 8 8 The math register contains the 32 bit signed integer result of the multiply operation This result is valid at overflow Using Math Instructions Divide DIV ill Sento place the rounded quotient in the destination If the remainder is 0 5 or greater the DIV m Use the DIV instruction to divide one value source A by another source B and Source A destination is rounded up Source B Dest Execution Times usec when
156. You may call other subroutines to a level 3 deep from an STI subroutine Interrupt Latency and Interrupt Occurrences Interrupt latency is the interval between the STI timeout and the start of the interrupt subroutine STI interrupts can occur at any point in your program but not necessarily at the same point on successive interrupts The table below shows the interaction between an interrupt and the controller operating cycle STI Input Scan gt Program Scan Between instruction updates Output Scan gt Communication gt Between communication packets Controller Overhead Atstart and end Events in the Processor Operating Cycle 11 18 Using Application Specific Instructions Note that STI execution time adds directly to the overall scan time During the latency period the controller is performing operations that cannot be disturbed by the STI interrupt function Interrupt Priorities Interrupt priorities are as follows 1 User Fault Routine 2 High Speed Counter 3 Selectable Timed Interrupt An executing interrupt can only be interrupted by an interrupt having a higher priority Status File Data Saved e2 lt E i fe fe n Data in the following words is saved on entry to the STI subroutine and re written upon exiting the STI subroutine e S 0 Arithmetic flags e S 13 and S 14 Math register e 8 24 Index register 1
157. a high inrush current However if the power source can supply a high inrush current the MicroLogix power supply will accept it There is a high level of inrush current when a large capacitor on the input of the MicroLogix is charged up quickly If the power source cannot supply high inrush current the only effect is that the MicroLogix input capacitor charges up more slowly The following considerations determine whether the power source needs to supply a high inrush current power up sequence of devices in system power source sag if it cannot source inrush current the effect of the voltage sag on other equipment Installing Your Controller If the power source cannot provide high inrush current when the entire system in an application is powered the MicroLogix powers up more slowly If part of an application s system is already powered and operating when the MicroLogix is powered the source voltage may sag while the MicroLogix input capacitor is charging A power source voltage sag can affect other equipment connected to the same power source For example a voltage sag may reset a computer connected to the same power source Loss of Power Source The power supply is designed to withstand brief power losses without affecting the operation of the system The time the system is operational during power loss is called program scan hold up time after loss of power The duration of the power supply hold up time depends on the ty
158. accesses I O only avilable with 32 I O controllers Do not include this branch if you are using a 16 I O controller o o e LU i o um tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 7 1 Resets the number of 1 4 in increments and the 1 4 in thousands when the drill change reset keyswitch is energized This should occur following each drill bit change drill change 1 4 in reset keyswitch Thousands I 0 CLR See Nee sc RER SARAS RANN CLEAR 8 Dest N7 11 0 1 4 in increments CLR CLEAR Dest N7 10 0 Rung 7 2 Moves the single digit BCD thumbwheel value into an internal integer register This is done to properly align the four BCD input signals prior to executing the BCD to Integer instruction FRD The thumbwheel is used to allow the operator to enter the thickness of the paper that is to be drilled The thickness is entered in 1 4 in increments This provides a range of 1 4 in to 2 25 in BCD bit 0 FRD bit 0 I 0 N7 14 11 0 BCD bit O FRD bit O I 0 N7 14 12 1 BCD bit 0 FRD bit 2 I 0 N7 14 13 2 BCD bit 0 FRD bit 0 I 0 N7 14
159. achine I O devices when the relay is de energized e If you are using a dc power supply interrupt the load side rather than the ac line power This avoids the additional delay of power supply turn off The dc power supply should be powered directly from the fused secondary of the transformer Power to the dc input and output circuits is connected through a set of master control relay contacts 1 11 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit Any part can fail including the switches in a master control relay circuit The failure of one of these switches would most likely cause an open circuit which would be a safe power off failure However if one of these switches shorts out it no longer provides any safety protection These switches should be tested periodically to assure they will stop machine motion when needed Power Considerations The following explains power considerations for the micro controllers Isolation Transformers You may want to use an isolation transformer in the ac line to the controller This type of transformer provides isolation from your power distribution system and is often used as a step down transformer to reduce line voltage Any transformer used with the controller must have a sufficient power rating for its load The power rating is expressed in volt amperes VA Power Supply Inrush 1 12 The MicroLogix power supply does not require or need
160. act them and place the result in the specified destination If the result of the operation exceeds the allowable value an overflow or underflow bit is set To learn more about the math instructions we suggest that you read the Math Instructions Overview that follows Math Instructions Overview The following general information applies to math instructions Using Indexed Word Addresses You have the option of using indexed word addresses for instruction parameters specifying word addresses Indexed addressing is discussed in chapter 5 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits The arithmetic status bits are found in Word 0 bits 0 3 in the controller status file After an instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C sets if carry is generated otherwise cleared S 0 1 Overflow V indicates that the actual result of a math instruction does not fit in the designated destination S 0 2 Zero Z indicates a 0 value after a math move or logic instruction 0 3 Sign S indicates a negative less than 0 value after a math move or logic instruction 8 2 Using Math Instructions Overflow Trap Bit S 5 0 Minor error bit S 5 0 is set upon detection of a mathematical overflow or division by zero If this bit is set upon execution of an END statement or a Temporary End TND instruction the recoverable major error code 0020 is dec
161. action to occur Bidirectional Counter Encoder Using High Speed Counter Instructions Input State i Tw High Speed nput npu Counter Action UO 1 1 HSC Rung Turning On Off True Count Up Turning Off Off True Count Down NA On NA Hold Count NA NA False Hold Count fo lt Off or On NA NA Hold Count E NA Not Applicable Iz g Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold Encoder D 9 Input State A High Speed Input A Input B Input Z Input HSC Rung Counter Action 1 0 1 1 V2 Hold l 3 Turning On Off Off Off True Count Up Turning Off Off Off Off True Count Down OfforOn NA Off NA NA Hold Count NA On Off NA NA Hold Count NA NA Off NA False Hold Count NA NA Off On NA Hold Count Off Off On NA NA Reset to 0 NA Not Applicable The optional hardware high speed counter reset is the logical coincidence of A x B x Z 12 17 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual High Speed Counter Load HSL st This instruction allows you to set the low and high presets low and high output Li Source and the output mask When either a high or low preset is reached you can o instantly update selected outputs If you are using the HSL instruction with the Up Counter the high preset must be 2 1 Execution Times and lt 32 767 or an error INVALID PRESETs LOADED TO HIGH SPEED COUNTER usec when 37H occurs For the bidirectional
162. al word address a file address or a constant Execution Times usec when True False 53 41 28 12 Entering Parameters Word 0 Word 1 Word 2 11 14 Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction File is the address of the sequencer file You must use the file indicator for this address Source can be a word address file address or a constant 32768 to 32767 If the source is a file address the file length equals the length of the sequencer load file The two files step automatically according to the position value Length is the number of steps of the sequencer load file and also of the source if the source is a file address starting at position 1 The maximum number you can enter is 104 words Position 0 is the startup position The instruction resets wraps to position 1 at each cycle completion Position is the word location or step in the sequencer file to which data is moved Control is a control file address The status bits length value and position value are stored in this element Do not use the control file address for any other instruction The control element is shown below 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 EN DN ER Length Position Using Application Specific Instructions Status bits of the control structure include Error Bit ER bit 11 is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a
163. alse the STI function remains enabled at the setpoint you ve entered in the STS instruction Interrupt Subroutine INT Em This instruction serves as a label or identifier of a program file as an interrupt subroutine INT label versus a regular subroutine SBR label Execution Times This instruction has no control bits and is always evaluated as true The instruction usec when must be programmed as the first instruction of the first rung of the subroutine Use of this instruction is optional however we recommend using it True False 1 45 0 99 11 22 Using Application Specific Instructions Application Specific Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example This section provides ladder rungs to demonstrate the use of application specific instructions The rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example described in appendix E You will begin a subroutine in file 4 This portion of the subroutine tells the conveyor where to stop to allow a hole to be drilled The stop positions will be different for each hole pattern 3 hole 5 hole 7 hole so separate sequencers are used to store and access each of the three hole patterns Note Address I 0 10 is only valid for 32 I O controllers If you use a 16 I O controller only the 5 hole drill pattern can be used e2 E E E i fe fe n OPERATOR PANEL Start 1 6 Stop I 1 7 XX XX Change Drill Soon Change Drill Now 0
164. ample The BCD value 32 760 in the math register is converted and stored in N7 0 The maximum source value is 32767 BCD MPS displays S 13 and S 14 in BCD 8 14 8 13 0000 0000 0000 0011 0010 0111 0110 0000 15 0 15 0 5 digit BCD 0 0 0 3 2 7 6 I 2 6 N7 0 Decimal 0111 1111 1111 1000 You should convert BCD values to integer before you manipulate them in your ladder program If you do not convert the values the controller manipulates them as integers and their value may be lost Note If the math register S 13 and S 14 is used as the source for the FRD instruction and the BCD value does not exceed 4 digits be sure to clear word S 14 before executing the FRD instruction If S 14 is not cleared and a value is contained in this word from another math instruction located elsewhere in the program an incorrect decimal value will be placed in the destination word 9 6 Using Data Handling Instructions Clearing S 14 before executing the FRD instruction is shown below 0001 0010 0011 0100 S 13 and S 14 are displayed in BCD format 0000 0100 1101 0010 When the input condition I 0 1 is set 1 a BCD value transferred from a 4 digit thumbwheel switch for example is moved from word N7 2 into the math register Status word S 14 is then cleared to make certain that unwanted data is not present when the FRD instruction is executed 9 7 97 z z i 97 e a MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Con
165. and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow or overflow the overflow bit S 0 1 is set the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set andthe destination address contains the unsigned truncated least significant 16 bits of the result The default condition of S 2 14 is reset 0 When S 2 14 is reset and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow or overflow the overflow bit S 0 1 is set the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set andthe destination address contains 32767 if the result is positive or 32768 if the result is negative Note the status of bit S 2 14 has no effect on the DDV instruction Also it has no effect on the math register content when using MUL and DIV instructions To provide protection from inadvertent alteration of your selection program an unconditional OTL instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the new math overflow operation Program an unconditional OTU instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the original math overflow operation 2 15 Reserved NA NA Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable B 13 o S c eh i o Y tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Address Bit Classification Description S 3L Current Scan Time Status The value of this byte tells
166. arameters 11 8 Enter the following parameters when programming these instructions File is the address of the sequencer file You must use the file indicator for this address Sequencer file data is used as follows Instruction Sequencer File Stores SQO Data for controlling outputs SQC Reference data for monitoring inputs Mask SQO SQC is a hexadecimal code or the address of the mask word or file through which the instruction moves data Set mask bits to pass data and clear mask bits to prevent the instruction from operating on corresponding destination bits Use a mask word or file if you want to change the mask according to application requirements If the mask is a file its length will be equal to the length of the sequencer file The two files track automatically Source is the address of the input word or file for a SQC from which the instruction obtains data for comparison to its sequencer file Destination is the address of the output word or file for a SQO to which the instruction moves data from its sequencer file Note You can address the mask source or destination of a sequencer Word 0 Word 1 Word 2 instruction as a word or file If you address it as a file using file indicator the instruction automatically steps through the source mask or destination file Control SQO SQC is the control structure that stores the status byte of the instruction the length of the sequencer file
167. asked Move MVM lsssseeselsee ne 9 16 And AND Misie enit Gus an breve da re Gate 2 Ae pate A dE au RE e aus 9 18 Or OB ovn bee vds ids hse nga edu ule tas Ba edes 9 19 Excl sive Or OK OP ae etu tres ure har e tactu ate eet estis 9 20 NOLUNO T S cud t eorr qat dot ee ee cae Sete eee Sel 9 21 Nedate NEG ix os Noster oe Pus etre obe cer tue eru edi Stt 9 22 FIFO and LIFO Instructions Overview llli liess 9 23 FIFO Load FFL and FIFO Unload FFU lsseeessssss 9 25 LIFO Load LFL and LIFO Unload LFU 9 26 Data Handling Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application cuj Drm 9 28 Using Program Flow Control Instructions About the Program Flow Control Instructions 10 2 Jump JMP and Label LBL 0 0002 rr rer re ra 10 2 Jump to Subroutine JSR Subroutine SBR and Return RET 10 4 Master Control Reset MCR 00202 ee eee eee rna 10 7 Temporary End TNI co caros Best atto pel ups test ses 10 8 Suspend BUSY rrera aaa er a AREE RS PUER GU RR RAN S 10 8 Immediate Input with Mask IIM 00 00 ce ers rss erna 10 9 Immediate Output with Mask IOM ssoooseersee rss 0c eee eee 10 9 Program Flow Control Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example a a EE fre tu rs ete ri etek uM c C Aia 10 10 Using Application Specific Instructions About the Application Specific Instructions 11 2
168. at uses an indexed address ATTENTION Instructions with a sign in an address manipulate the offset value stored at S 24 Make sure you monitor or load the offset value you want prior to using an indexed address Otherwise unpredictable machine operation could occur with possible damage to equipment and or injury to personnel Example of Indexed Addressing The following Masked Move MVM example uses an indexed address in the source and destination addresses If the offset value is 10 stored in S 24 the processor manipulates the data stored at the base address plus the offset MVM MASKED MOVE Source N7 10 0 Mask 0033 Dest N7 50 0 4 12 Programming Overview In this example the processor uses the following addresses Value Base Address Offset Value in S 24 Offset Address Source N7 10 10 N7 20 Destination N7 50 10 N7 60 Addressing File Instructions Using the File Indicator The file instructions below manipulate data table files These files are addressed with the sign They store an offset value in word 8 24 index register just as with indexed addressing discussed in the last section e File Abbreviation File Name COP Copy File E FLL Fill File BSL Bit Shift Left e BSR Bit Shift Right o FFL FIFO Load a FFU FIFO Unload LFL LIFO Load LFU LIFO Unload SQO Sequencer Output SQC Sequencer Compare SQL Sequencer Load ATTENTION If you are using
169. ation Description S 1 13 Major Error Halted Dynamic This bit is set by the controller any time a Configuration major error is encountered The controller enters a fault condition Word S 6 the Fault Code will contain a code that can be used to diagnose the fault condition Any time bit S 1 13 is set the controller either places all outputs in a safe state outputs are off and energizes the fault orenters the user fault routine with outputs active if in REM Run mode allowing the fault routine ladder logic to attempt recovery from the fault condition If the user fault routine determines that recovery is required clear 1 13 using ladder logic prior to exiting the fault routine If the fault routine ladder logic does not understand the fault code or if the routine determines that it is not desirable to continue operation the controller exits the fault routine with bit S 1 13 set The outputs are placed in a safe state and the FAULT LED is energized When you clear bit S 1 13 using a programming device the controller mode changes from fault to Remote Program You can move a value to S 6 then set 1 13 in your ladder program to generate an application specific major error All application generated faults are recoverable regardless of the value used Note Once a major fault state exists you must correct the condition causing the fault and you must also clear this bit in order for the controller to accept a
170. ay output ac power supply controller 1761 L16AWA 12 pt ac and 4 pt analog inputs 8 pt relay and 1 pt analog outputs ac power supply controller case 20 pt ac input 12 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L32AWA 6 pt de input 4 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L10BWA 10 pt de input 6 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L16BWA 12 pt de and 4 pt analog inputs 8 pt relay and 1 pt analog outputs ac power supply controller 178120 WASA 20 pt de input 12 pt relay output ac power supply controller 1761 L32BWA 6 pt de input 4 pt relay output de power supply controller 1761 L10BWB 10 pt de input 6 pt relay output de power supply controller 1761 L16BWB 12 pt de and 4 pt analog inputs 8 pt relay and 1 pt analog outputs de power supply controller TOO TELE MDOA 20 pt dc input 12 pt relay output dc power supply controller 1761 L32BWB 10 pt dc input 4 pt FET and 2 pt relay outputs dc power supply controller 1761 L16BBB 20 pt dc input 10 pt FET and 2 pt relay outputs dc power supply controller 1761 L32BBB 20 pt ac input 10 pt triac and 2 pt relay outputs ac power supply controller 1761 L32AAA Terminal doors for L16AWA 2 doors per package 1761 RPL T16A Terminal doors for L16BWA 2 doors per package 1761 RPL T16B Terminal doors for L32AWA L32BWA or L32AAA 2 doors per
171. be stored Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits Unaffected 9 8 Using Data Handling Instructions Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC me When the rung is true this output instruction searches the source from the lowest to ENCODE 1 cf 16 to 4 Source the highest bit and looks for the first set bit The corresponding bit position is written Dent to the destination as an integer as shown in the table below Execution Times usec when True False 54 80 6 78 Source Destination 08 07 15 04 03 02 01 0 ce e Bit c1 qz co Po e ce co ce o ce c1 ce D gt ce ao ce Po e ce e te E E i o2 fe n PX DX DX DX DX DX DX DX DX DX DX X X x OK Ot KK KKK KK X X xX xX KK x OM X KKK xX xX X X xX xX x x x OOO KKK KK KKK KK x x OOOO XxX XxX KK KK x x x x x QD QO O QO O XxX XxX XxX KK KKK x x CO CO O O O O XxX XxX KK KKK x x CO OQ QO QO O QO O X XxX XxX KK x x x Co CO QO O O O O O X XxX XxX XxX Xx Xx x Co QD QO QO QO QO QO QO O X XxX XxX XxX XxX x CO CO OQ QO QO QO O O O O X XxX XxX XxX Xx C CO OO O0 OO O0 OO O XxX XxX XxX Xx C CO OCOOOOOOOOOOCOcJ s rxov x CO OcOOOOoOoOoOoooooc xsx CO OcOcOooOocOococococoooo x oOo0o00000000000O O O x xK DX KK KK DX DX X X OK X X OK OK ae Bass c0oO0ooooco oho lo hoi ee Colo loko 00 O00000 0 000000 Entering Parameters Source is the address of the word t
172. bit 0 bit 1 I 0 I 0 SQO SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN 9 10 File N7 62 DN Mask FFFF Dest N7 7 Control R6 6 Length 9 07 Position 0 c pose ete cer B S force the sequencer Iz to increment o on the next scan te R6 6 e7 C n a a a a ties ei Usta nn Enen o EN Q This rung accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Do not include this rung if you are using a 16 1 0 controller More rungs will be added to this subroutine at the end of chapter 12 11 27 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Notes 11 28 1 2 Using High Speed Counter Instructions Using High Speed Counter Instructions This chapter contains general information about the high speed counter instructions and explains how they function in your application program Each of the instructions includes information on what the instruction symbol looks like typical execution time for the instruction how to use the instruction In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling machine that shows the high speed counter instructions in use High Speed Counter Instructions Instruction Purpose Page Mnemonic Name HSC High Speed Counter Applies configuration to the high speed 12 6 counter hardware updates the image accumulator enables counting when the HSC is true and disables counti
173. c 7 5A 0 75A 2 5A 1800 VA 180 VA 120V ac 15A 1 5A 125V dc 0 22A9 1 0A 28 VA 24V dc 1 2A9 2 0A 28 VA For de voltage applications the make break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by the applied dc voltage For example 28 VA 48V dc 0 58A For dc voltage applications less than 48V the make break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A For dc voltage applications greater than 48V the make break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 1A ATTENTION Do not exceed the Current per common specification Analog Input Specifications Description Specification Voltage Input Range 10 5 to 10 5V dc 1LSB Current Input Range 21 to 21 mA 1LSB Type of Data 16 bit signed integer Input Coding 21 to 21 mA 1LSB 10 5 to 10 5V dc 1LSB 32 768 to 432 767 Voltage Input Impedance 210K Current Input Impedance 1600 Input Resolution 16 bit Non linearity 0 002 Theanalog input update rate and input resolution are a function of the input filter selection For additional information see page 5 3 A 7 Hardware Reference Description Specification Overall Accuracy 0 C to 55 C 0 7 of full scale Overall Accuracy Drift 0 C to 55 C max 0 17696 Overall Accuracy at 25 C 77 F max 0 525 Voltage Input Overvoltage Protection 24V de Current Input Overcurrent Protection 50 mA Input to Output Isolatio
174. ccum 0 Poste acts dme 12 27 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Example 3 To enter the REM Run mode and have the HSC ACC and Interrupt Subroutine resume their previous state while externally initializing the HSC outputs apply the following Rung 2 0 Unlatch or Latch the output bits under HSC control during the first scan after the HSC instruction is executed for the first time Note you could place this rung before the HSC instruction however this is not recommended S r HSL HSC LOAD 15 Counter c5 0 Source N7 0 Length 5 Rung 2 1 ASCH cm cae Sek eas eee See ee SSR SESS ASS eR Re Re AS Se Sa ee a HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Encoder Res Hld CD Counter C5 0 DN High Preset 1000 Accum 0 Rung 2 2 This rung is programmed with the knowledge of an HSL mask of 0007 outputs 0 2 are used and initializes the HSC outputs each REM Run mode entry Outputs 0 0 and 0 1 are off while Output 0 2 is on S 1 0 0 sep eese emm SoS a NE ee aS U 15 0 0 0 U 1 0 0 L 2 12 28 Using High Speed Counter Instructions High Speed Counter Instruction in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example The ladder rungs in this section demonstrate the use of the HSC instruction in the paper drilling machine application
175. cessor as either 1 or 0 Word N7 0 should have a value of 1 or 3 during the message write execution N7 0 should have a value of 0 or 2 during the message read execution Program initialization The first pass bit S 1 15 initializes the ladder programs on run mode entry SLC 5 02 processor N7 0 0 is latched timer T4 0 is reset B3 0 is unlatched rung 1 then latched rung 3 S SLC 5 01 processor N7 0 0 is unlatched timer T4 0 is reset Messge instruction operation The message write instruction in the SLC 5 02 processor is initiated every 1280 ms by clock bit S 4 6 Th done bit of the message write instruction initiates the message read instruction B3 0 latches the message write instruction B3 0 is unlatched when message read instruction done bit is set provided that the interlock N7 0 0 is reset Communication failure In the SLC 5 02 processor bit B3 10 become set if interlock bit N7 0 0 remains set 1 for more than 4 seconds In SLC 5 01 processor bit B3 10 becomes set if interlock bit N7 0 0 remains set 1 for more than 4 seconds Your application can detec this event take appropriate action then unlatch bit B3 10 13 17 e2 E E E i fe fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Example 4 Application example 4 shows you how to use the timeout bit to disable an active message instruction In this example an output is energized after five unsuccessful attempts two s
176. components created with it program files and data files Processor File Program Files Data Files 14 Maximum 8 Maximum The programming device stores processor files on hard disk or floppy disk Monitoring and editing of processor files is done in the workspace of the computer After you select a file from disk and edit it you then save the file hard to disk replacing the original disk version with the edited version The hard disk is the recommended location for a processor file 4 4 Programming Overview pH PROGRAMMING DEVICE Workspace Hard Disk Uniquely named processor files Processor files are created in the offline mode using the programming device These files are then restored downloaded to the processor for online operation Program Files Program files contain controller information the main ladder program interrupt subroutines and any subroutine programs These files are e2 E E E i fe fe n System Program file 0 This file contains various system related information and user programmed information such as processor type I O configuration processor file name and password e Reserved file 1 This file is reserved Main Ladder Program file 2 This file contains user programmed instructions defining how the controller is to operate User Error Fault Routine file 3 This file is executed when a recoverable fault occurs High Speed Coun
177. configuration parameters D 6 description D 5 Index 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual DH 485 communication protocol configuration parameters D 12 DH485 network configuration parameters D 17 connecting 3 6 description D 11 devices that use the network D 12 example system configuration D 18 installation 3 6 protocol D 11 token rotation D 11 dimensions controller A 11 DIN rail 1 16 mounting dimensions 1 16 direct addressing C 2 displaying values 4 13 DIV Divide 8 9 Divide DIV 8 9 changes to the math register 8 9 updates to arithmetic status bits 8 9 Double Divide DDV 8 10 changes to the math register 8 10 updates to arithmetic status bits 8 10 E Electronics Industries Association EIA D 1 EMC Directive 1 2 emergencystop switches 1 5 ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 9 9 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC 9 9 entering parameters 9 9 updates to arithmetic status bits 9 10 entering numeric constants 4 13 values 4 14 EQU Equal 7 3 Equal EQU 7 3 error recovery model 14 5 errors 14 3 hardware 14 3 Index 6 identifying 14 6 MSG instruction 13 10 establishing communication 3 19 European Union Directive compliance 1 2 Examine if Closed XIC 6 3 Examine if Open XIO 6 4 example programs paper drilling machine E 2 using the MSG instruction 13 13 Exclusive Or XOR 9 20 updates to arithmetic status bits 9 20 execution times listing B 1 worksheet B 31
178. controller Micro Controller Optical Isolator recommended Lun T Personal Computer 1761 CBL PM02 We recommend using an AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as your optical isolator See page 3 13 for specific AIC cabling information 3 2 Connecting the System 1761 CBL PM02 Series B Cable o Lo G gt o Ln G I 8 pin Mini Din 9 pin D shell 678 3 e 4 2187 12 Programming Device Controller 9 Pin 8 Pin 9 RI 24V 1 8 CTS gt GND 2 7 RTS i RTS 3 6 DSR gt RXD 4 5 GND lg DCD 5 4 DTR LO CTS 6 3 TXD TXD 7 2 RXD g GND 8 1 DCD kec Using a Modem You can also use modems to connect a personal computer to one MicroLogix 1000 controller using DF1 full duplex protocol or to multiple controllers using DF1 half duplex protocol as shown in the illustration that follows Do not attempt to use DH 485 protocol through modems under any circumstance For information on types of modems you can use with the micro controllers see page D 9 3 8 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Personal Computer DF1 full duplex protocol to 1 controller DF1 half duplex master protocol to multiple controllers Optical Isolator amp recommended Micro Controller 1761 CBL PM02 DF1 full duplex protocol or DF1 half duplex slave p
179. controller is not executing the processor file and all outputs are de energized program scan A part of the controller s operating cycle During the scan the ladder program is executed and the Output data file is updated based on the program and the Input data file programming device Executable programming package used to develop ladder diagrams protocol The packaging of information that is transmitted across a network read To acquire data from a storage place For example the processor READs information from the input data file to solve the ladder program relay An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits G 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual G 6 relay logic A representation of the program or other logic in a form normally used for relays REM Run mode REMote run mode during which the processor scans or executes the ladder program monitors input devices energizes output devices and acts on enabled I O forces restore To download transfer a program from a personal computer to a controller reserved bit A status file location that the user should not read or write to retentive data Information associated with data files timers counters inputs and outputs in a program that is preserved through power cycles Program files 2 15 are not effected by retentive data RS 232 An EIA standard that specifies electrical mechanical and functional chara
180. croseconds ensuring accuracy and repeatability The high speed counter sets the conveyor output bit O 0 0 each time a low preset is reached As a result the drive accelerates and maintains the conveyer motor When the manual has travelled the specified distance set by the high speed counter high preset value the high speed counter interrupt subroutine signals the main program to perform the drilling sequence For more information regarding the interrupt subroutine used in this program refer to the application example in chapter 11 This example uses the Quadrature Encoder with reset and hold instruction The high speed counter accumulator increments and decrements based on the quadrature relationship of the encoder s A nd B inputs 1 0 0 and I 0 1 The accumulator is cleared to zero when the reset is activated or when the RES instruction is executed All presets are entered as a relative offset to the leading edge of a manual The presets for the hole patterns are stored in the SQO instructions Refer to chapter 11 for the SQO instruction The high speed counter external reset input 1 0 2 and the external hold input I 0 3 are wired in parallel to prevent the high speed counter from counting while the reset is active The input filter delays for both the high speed counter A and B inputs I 0 0 and 1 0 1 as well as the high speed counter reset and hold inputs I 0 2 and I 0 3 can be adjusted Refer to page A 9 for more information
181. cteristics for serial binary communication circuits A single ended serial communication interface run mode When the processor file in the controller is being executed inputs are read the program is scanned and outputs are energized and de energized rung Ladder logic is comprised of a set of rungs A rung contains input and output instructions During Run mode the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true or false If a path of true logic exists the outputs are made true If all paths are false the outputs are made false save To upload transfer a program stored in memory from a controller to a personal computer OR to save a program to a computer hard disk scan time The time required for the controller to execute the instructions in the program The scan time may vary depending on the instructions and each instruction s status during the scan sinking A term used to describe current flow between an I O device and controller I O circuit typically a sinking device or circuit provides a path to ground low or negative side of power supply sourcing A term used to describe current flow between an I O device and controller I O circuit typically a sourcing device or circuit provides a path to the source high or positive side of power supply Glossary status The condition of a circuit or system represented as logic 0 OFF or 1 ON terminal A point on an I O module that external I O devices such
182. ction high preset to the hardware high preset if the high speed counter is configured as an up counter resets the IL IH IN or IV status bits You can have more than one RES instruction in your program 12 21 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual High Speed Counter Reset Accumulator RAC RAC RESET TO ACCUM VALUE Counter C5 0 Source Execution Times usec when True False 56 00 6 00 This instruction allows you to write a specific value to the hardware accumulator and image accumulator The Counter referenced by this instruction has the same address as the HSC instruction counter and is fixed at C5 0 Entering Parameters Operation 12 22 Enter the following parameter when programming this instruction Source represents the value that is loaded to the accumulator The source can be a constant or an address Execution of the RAC removes pending high speed counter interrupts resets the PE LS OV UN and DN status bits loads a new accumulator value to the hardware and instruction image loads the instruction high preset to the hardware high preset if the high speed counter is configured as an Up Counter resets the IL IH IN or IV status bits The source can be a constant or any integer element in files 0 7 The hardware and instruction accumulators are updated with the new accumulator value immediately upon instruction execution You can have more than o
183. d True False 71 25 6 78 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C sets if the source is negative otherwise cleared 0 1 Overflow V always resets S 0 2 Zero Z sets when destination value is zero 0 3 Sign S always resets 8 11 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Scale Data SCL ya icis value The rounded result is added to the offset value and placed in the destination sch When this instruction is true the value at the source address is multiplied by the rate Source Rate 10000 Offset S R 7 Note Anytime an underflow or overflow occurs in the destination file minor error bit 5 0 must be reset This must occur before the end of the current scan to prevent major error code 0020 from being declared This instruction can overflow before the offset is added Dest Execution Times usec when True False 169 18 6 78 Entering Parameters The value for the following parameters is between 32 768 to 32 767 e Source can either be a constant or a word address e Rate is the positive or negative value you enter divided by 10 000 It can be a constant or a word address e Offset can either be a constant or a word address Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C is reserved 0 1 Overflow V sets if an overflow is detected otherwise r
184. d O I SB T C R N Not Applicable direct source B immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max LFL LIFO Load source immediate direct O I S B T C R 32 768 32 767 indexed direct N LIFO array indexed direct O I S B N Not Applicable LIFO control direct R element level Not Applicable length contained in the 1 128 control register position contained in the 0 127 control register LFU LIFO Unload LIFO array indexed direct O I S B N Not Applicable destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct LIFO control direct R element level Not Applicable length contained in the 1 128 control register position contained in the 0 127 control register LIM Limit Test low limit immediate direct O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max compare immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct D Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses C 8 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters i We Instruction Valid Addressing M Instruction Description Parameters Mode s Valid File Types Valid Value Ranges MOV Move source immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct f min f max destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicab
185. d logical instructions Entering Parameters Source is the address of the value on which the logical or move operation is to be performed It can be a word address or a constant If the instruction has two source operands it will not accept constants in both operands Destination is the address where the resulting data is stored It must be a word address Using Indexed Word Addresses e2 E E E i fe fe n You have the option of using indexed word addresses for instruction parameters specifying word addresses Indexed addressing is discussed in chapter 4 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits The arithmetic status bits are found in Word 0 bits 0 3 in the controller status file After an instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated Bit Name Description S 0 0 Carry C Set if a carry is generated otherwise cleared 0 1 Overflow V Indicates that the actual result of a math instruction does not fit in the designated destination S 0 2 Zero Z Indicates a 0 value after a math move or logic instruction S 0 3 Sign S Indicates a negative less than 0 value after a math move or logic instruction 9 13 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Overflow Trap Bit S 5 0 Minor error bit S 5 0 is set upon detection of a mathematical overflow or division by Zero If this bit is set upon execution of an END statement or a TND
186. dapter to port 1 or port 2 1761 CBL AP00 1761 CBL AP00 1747 CP3 or 1761 CBL PM02 or or 1761 CBL PM02 1761 CBL AC00 AlC Ue 1761 NET AIC AIC P En 1761 NET AIC 1747 CP3 24N dc Or User supplied 1761 CBL ACOO 24V dc User supplied DH 485 Network Selection Switch Up 1747 CBL AMOO or 1761 CBL HM02 24V dc Not needed in this configuration since the MicroLogix 1000 provides power to the AIC via port 2 wi ZO Zl EEEELEtA MicroLogix 1000 Series C or later SLC 5 03 processor 1 DB 9 RS 232 port mini DIN 8 RS 232 port DH 485 DF1 port D 20 Understanding the Communication Protocols MicroLogix Remote Packet Support Series D MicroLogix controllers and all MicroLogix analog controllers can respond to communication packets or commands that do not originate on the local DH 485 network This is useful in installations where communication is needed between the DH 485 and DH networks The example below shows how to send messages from a PLC device or a PC on the DH network to a MicroLogix 1000 controller on the DH 485 network This method uses an SLC 5 04 processor bridge connection When using this method e PLC 5 devices can send read and write commands to MicroLogix controllers e MicroLogix 1000 controllers can respond to MSG instructions received The MicroLogix controllers cannot initiate M
187. der Logic Program z cT O O EX E I hG Or o o d A O19 Contact I1 would be an examine if open instruction if PB2 was a normally open electromechanical circuit The table below shows how these circuits operate The table shows all possible conditions for the electromechanical circuit the equivalent state of the ladder logic instructions and the resulting output state If PB1 is Ostateis And PB2is 1 1 state is Then the Alarm Horn 0 1 is notpushed 0 notpushed 1 silent notpushed 0 pushed 0 silent pushed 1 notpushed 1 alarm pushed 1 pushed 0 silent Developing Your Logic Program A Model The following diagram can help you develop your application program Each process block represents one phase of program development Use the checklist at the right of the process block to help you identify the tasks involved with each process 4 15 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 4 16 Program Development Process Design Functional Specification Perform Detailed Analysis Programming Features are Needed Create Logic Program Confirm I O Addresses Enter Edit Program Check for Completeness Monitor Troubleshoot Program Accept Program Run Program Program Development Checklist QJ Prepare a general description of how you want your automated process to operate ad Identify the hardware requireme
188. e This is particularly important at the four end terminal positions where the pressure plate does not touch the outside 2 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 2 6 ATTENTION Be careful when stripping wires Wire fragments that fall into the controller could cause damage Do not strip wires above a mounted controller if the protective wrap is removed Protective Wrap remove after wiring ATTENTION Remove the protective wrap before applying power to the controller Failure to remove the wrap may cause the controller to overheat ATTENTION Calculate the maximum possible current in each power and common wire Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire size Current above the maximum ratings may cause wiring to overheat which can cause damage ATTENTION United States Only If the controller is installed within a potentially hazardous environment all wiring must comply with the requirements stated in the National Electrical Code 501 4 b Allow for at least 50 mm 2 in between I O wiring ducts or terminal strips and the controller Route incoming power to the controller by a path separate from the device wiring Where paths must cross their intersection should be perpendicular Note Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same conduit Wires with different signal characteristics should be routed by separate paths Separate wiring
189. e of initiating an exchange of data they only reply to requests made from initiator products The Series A and B MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers are in this class 13 2 Using the Message Instruction Message Instruction MSG MSG READ WRITE MESSAGE EN Read write DN Target Device The MSG is an output instruction that allows the controller to initiate an exchange of data with other devices The relationship with the other devices can be either peer Control Block Control Block Length 7 to peer communication or master to slave communication The type of communication required by a particular application determines the programming Execution Times configuration requirements of the MSG instruction usec when This only includes the amount of time needed to set up the operation requested It does not include the time it takes to service the actual communication as this time varies with each network configuration As True False an example 144ms is the actual communication service time for the following configuration 3 nodes on 1809 48 DH 485 2 MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers and 1 PLC 500 A I Seriest programming software running at 19 2K baud with 2 words per transfer Entering Parameters After you place the MSG instruction on a rung specify whether the message is to bea read or write Then specify the target device and the control block for the MSG instruction e2 E E E
190. e Controllers User Manual Math Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example This section provides ladder rungs to demonstrate the use of math instructions The rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example described in appendix E You will be adding to the subroutine in file 7 that was started in chapter d Rung 7 1 This rung resets the number of 1 4 increments and the 1 4 thousands when the drill change reset keyswitch is energized This should occur following each drill bit change drill 1 4 change Thousands reset keyswitch I 0 CLR CLEAR 8 Dest N7 11 0 1 4 increments CL Rah asses CLEAR Dest N7 10 0 Rung 7 59 Keep a running total of how many inches of paper have been drilled with the current drill bit Every time a hole is drilled add the thickness in 1 4 s to the running total kept in 1 4 s The OSR is necessary because the ADD executes every time the rung is true and the drill body would actuate the DRILL DEPTH limit switch for more than 1 program scan Integer N7 12 is the integer converted value of the BCD thumbwheel on inputs I 0 11 I 0 14 Drill Tool Wear 1 4 Depth LS OSR 1 increments I 0 B3 ADD nee ipse OSR sssef mezceee eese eceLicto ADD e 4 24 Source A N7 12 0 Source B N7 10 0 Dest
191. e DF1 Half Duplex protocol can also be used with Series D or later discrete and all analog MicroLogix 1000 controllers but a master is required such as an SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 or SLC 5 05 processor SLC 500 SLC 5 01 and SLC 5 02 processors do not support O or I file access from a MSG instruction SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 processors do support O and I file access but only when unprotected Using the Message Instruction Control Block Layout The control block layouts shown below illustrate SLC500 ML1000 type messages Control Block Layout SLC100 ML1000 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Word EN ST DN ER EW NR TO Error Code 0 Node Number 1 Reserved for length in elements 2 File Number 3 2 File Type O I S B T C R N 4 Element Number 5 E Subelement Number 6 a e ou Control Block Layout 485CIF 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Word EN ST DN ER EW NR TO Error Code 0 Node Number 1 Reserved for Length in elements 2 Offset Bytes 3 Not used 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 13 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using Status Bits Read Write READ ignore if timed 0 TO out Target Device SLC500 to be retired 0 NR ML1000 awaiting 0 EW Control Block N7 0 execution Local Destination File kkk Address 0 error 0 ER Target Node kkk message done 0 DN Target File Address message 0
192. e IL IN and IV bits are reset Unlike the Up Counters the accumulator value does not reset and the high preset value does not get loaded from the image to the hardware high preset register The Following Condition Occurs when either the hardware accumulator transitions from the hardware low preset 1 to the hardware low preset or A low preset is reached the hardware accumulator is loaded with a value less than or equal to the hardware low preset or the hardware low preset is loaded with a value that is greater than or equal to the hardware accumulator When a low preset is reached the LPbitis set e High speed counter interrupt file program file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IL bit is set and the IH IN and IV bits are reset An overflow occurs when the hardware accumulator transitions from 432 767 to 32 768 When an overflow occurs the e OV bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file program file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IV bit is set and the IH IL and IN bits are reset An underflow occurs when the hardware accumulator transitions from 32 768 to 432 767 When an underflow occurs the UN bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file program file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IN bit is set and the IH IL and IV bits are reset The following tables summarize what the input state must be for the corresponding high speed counter
193. e bit 53 34 19 80 3 98 word Operation The following figure shows the operation of the BSR instruction shown above Unload Bit R6 15 10 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 LS Array INVALID 69 68 67 66 65 64 gt Data block is shifted one bit at a time from bit 69 to bit 32 Source Bit 1 23 06 If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions 11 6 Using Application Specific Instructions Sequencer Instructions Overview The following general information applies to sequencer instructions Effects on Index Register S 24 The value present in the index register S 24 is overwritten when the sequencer instruction is true The index register value will equal the position value of the instruction Sequencer Output SQO and Sequencer Compare SQC These instructions transfer 16 bit data to word addresses for the control of sequential machine operations D 3 Oo re X soc SEQUENCER COMPARE File 4210 11 Pak syo Lies 1 03 R6 21 4 Execution Times usec when True False SQO 60 52 27 40 SQC 60 52 27 40 11 7 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Entering P
194. e gp ute os 6 3 Examine if Open XIO 0 00 reser ers re rr rr rer resa 6 4 Output Energize OVE cos emer wre eee rer rer OR ERES 6 4 Output Latch OTL and Output Unlatch OTU 6 5 One Shot Rising OSR 0 2 00 eee eee 6 6 Timer Instructions Overview 000 0 cee eee 6 7 Timer On Delay TON 0 00 cece eee eee eee eee 6 10 Timer Off Delay TOF 2 5 28 it tute Ge Sei et BEA rr rr Robe wm 6 11 Retentive Timer RTO 0 2 00 eee ee eee 6 13 Counter Instructions Overview llle 6 15 Count Up CTU ea so arsa a i RE Eon ges s 0 x RACE 6 17 Count Down GC TD iuo ERE pac RR c AE Ca rd gs 6 18 Reset RES den dur dunt dfe Nate td ed o Rp a tero e adc lo E 6 20 Table of Contents Basic Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example 6 21 Using Comparison Instructions About the Comparison Instructions 00 00 eee rr era ra 7 2 Comparison Instructions Overview lesse eee eee 7 2 Equal EQU EM CPI uuu PEPPER 7 3 Not Bgual NEO xen diee Or HR Er HER OR D CODE REIP 7 3 Less Than LES ss ses ps sd un kr ee ale de ae cera RP se Eter er Ne EE 7 3 Less Than or Equal EQ ik eps card ers ers ere rr rr er Te 7 4 Greater Than GRT ters di ses tees te aA rr rr rst rr E re ss 7 4 Greater Than or Equal GEQ 0 0 0 eee 7 4 Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ 00 0 cee eee eee 7 5 Limit Test LIM ies ed Rb E
195. e ranges and output voltage ranges 2 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Grounding Guidelines In solid state control systems grounding helps limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference EMI Use the heaviest wire gauge listed for wiring your controller with a maximum length of 152 4 mm 6 in Run the ground connection from the ground screw of the controller third screw from left on output terminal rung to the ground bus Note This symbol denotes a functional earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for non safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement Protective Wrap remove after wiring ATTENTION All devices that connect to the user 24V power supply or the RS 232 channel must be referenced to chassis ground or floating Failure to follow this procedure may result in property damage or personal injury ATTENTION Chassis ground user 24V ground and RS 232 ground are internally connected You must connect the chassis ground terminal screw to chassis ground prior to connecting any devices ATTENTION On the 1761 LIOBWB 1761 L16BWB 1761 L16BBB 1761 L20BWB 5A 1761 L32BBB and 1761 L32BWB controllers the user supply 24V dc IN and chassis ground are internally connected You must also provide an acceptable grounding path for each device in your application For more information on proper grounding guidelines s
196. e to REM Run mode or from any non Run mode PRG SUS to Test mode Fault Classification User Address Errar Code Powerup Errors Non User Mon Recoverable Hex Recoverable S 6 0001 The default program was X loaded 0002 Unexpected reset occurred 0003 EEPROM memory is corrupt 0008 A fatal internal programming X device error occurred 0009 A fatal internal hardware error X occurred Fault Classification User Error Code Non Address Hex Going to Run GTR Errors Non User H coierable Recoverable 8 6 0005 Retentive data is lost X 0010 The download program is not a X controller program Startup protection after power loss S 1 9 is set The user must 0016 check for a retentive data lost X O condition if the user fault routine c was executed with startup o protection D 5 tc B 19 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Fault Classification User Error Code Non Address Hex Run Errors Non User Recoverabl Recoverable S 6 Aruntime memory integrity error 0004 X occurred A minor error at the end of the 0020 scan Refer to S 5 X The watchdog timer expired 0022 Refer to S 3H Invalid STI interrupt setpoint 0024 Refer to S 30 0025 There are excessive JSRs in the X STI subroutine file 5 There are excessive JSRs in the Met fault subroutine file 3 X The indexed address is too large 002A or the file x 002A The indexed addres
197. e ways to select parameters for optimum network performance speed See your programming software s user manual for more information Number of Nodes The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes Unnecessary nodes such as a second programming terminal that is not being used slow the data transfer rate The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32 Setting Node Addresses The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in sequential order Initiators such as personal computers should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network The valid range for the MicroLogix 1000 controllers is 1 31 controllers cannot be node 0 The default setting is 1 The node address is stored in the controller status file S 16L Setting Controller Baud Rate The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate which is 19200 This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix 1000 device on the DH 485 network All devices must be at the same baud rate This rate is stored in the controller status file S 16H o o es eh i o Y 3 tc D 17 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Example DH 485 Connections The following network diagrams provide examples of how to connect Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers to the DH 485 network using the AIC For mo
198. econds duration to transmit a message MSG READ WRITE MESSAGE Read write WRITE Target Device siLcs00 m1000 DH 485 Active Control Block N7 0 Protocol Bit Control Block Length 7 N710 TON EN H w j TIMER ON DELAY B3 1 is latched external i Timer z4 0 enm 2second timer Each attempt to this example to initiate Time Hase 0 01 at transmission has a 2 second duration Preset 200 the message instruction Accum Counter allows 5 attempts N710 N7 0 N7 0 tu 8 12 15 After timeout error unlatch the MSG EN bit to retrigger for another attempt N7 0 8 is the message instruction timeout bit The fifth attempt latches O0 1 0 and unlatches the initiate message instruction bit MSG instruction status bits 8 TO 12 ER 13 DN Operation Notes The timeout bit is latched rung 4 after a period of 2 seconds This A successful attempt at transmission resets the counter unlatches O 1 clears the message instruction from processor control on the next scan 0 and unlatches B3 1 The message instruction is then re enabled for a second attempt at transmission After 5 attempts O 1 0 is latched and B3 1 is unlatched 13 18 Using the Message Instruction Example 5 Application example 5 shows you how to link message instructions together to transmit serially one after another In this example a MSG Write is followed by a MSG Read which causes the serial transmission 92 e
199. ee the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 ATTENTION Remove the protective wrap before applying power to the controller Failure to remove the wrap may cause the controller to overheat 2 2 Wiring Your Controller Sinking and Sourcing Circuits Any of the MicroLogix 1000 DC inputs can be configured as sinking or sourcing 2 depending on how the DC COM is wired on the MicroLogix s O Type Definition s Sinking Input The input energizes when high level voltage is applied to the input terminal active high Connect the power supply VDC to the MicroLMicroLogix Sourcing Input The input energizes when low level voltage is applied to the input terminal active low Connect the power supply VDC to the MicroLogix DC COM terminal Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Examples 1761 L32BWA Wiring diagrams also apply to 1761 L20BWA 5A L16BWA L10BWA Sinking Inputs Sourcing Inputs 14 30 VDC VDC for Sourcing VDC for Sourcing VDC for Sinking 24V D 1 3 Di 46 117 Ina 119 L ocour J ee Sourcing Inputs Sinking Inputs 14 30VD6 mA VDC f it for Sourcing VDC for Sourcing VDC for Sinking 24V DC 0 IA 1 2 4 6 Vo 0 Wt W2 13 W4 115 We6 147 t8 1 19 L DC OUT J OOM LLE B CI 2 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1761 L32BWB L32BBB Wiring Diagrams also apply to 1761 L20BWB 5A L16BWB L10BWB L16BBB
200. eed counter interrupt occurs the second high speed counter interrupt is saved but is considered pending The PE bit is set The second interrupt is executed immediately after the first one is finished executing If a high speed counter interrupt occurs while a high speed counter interrupt is pending the most recent high speed counter interrupt is lost and the LS bit is set The HSD instruction disables the high speed counter interrupt preventing the interrupt subroutine from being executed If the HSE is subsequently executed after the pending bit is set the interrupt is executed immediately This HSD instruction does not cancel an interrupt but results in the pending bit C5 0 3 being set when e A high or low preset is reached An overflow or underflow occurs Update High Speed Counter Image Accumulator OTE UA Execution Times usec when True False 51 00 6 00 Operation 12 24 When an OUT bit instruction is addressed for the high speed counter C5 0 UA bit the value in the hardware accumulator is written to the value in the image accumulator C5 0 ACC This provides you with real time access to the hardware accumulator value This is in addition to the automatic transfer from the hardware accumulator to the image accumulator that occurs each time the HSC instruction is evaluated This instruction transfers the hardware accumulator to the instruction accumulator When the OTE UA instruction is executed t
201. either repeatedly until the slave indicates that it has no more message packets to transmit or just one time per polling sequence depending on how the master is configured An additional feature of the DF1 half duplex protocol is that it is possible for a slave device to enable a MSG instruction in its ladder program to send or request data to from another slave When the initiating slave is polled the MSG instruction command packet is sent to the master The master recognizes that the command packet is not intended for it but for another slave so the master immediately rebroadcasts the command packet to the intended slave When the intended slave is polled it sends a reply packet to the master with the data the first slave requested The master again recognizes that the reply packet is intended for another slave so the master immediately rebroadcasts the reply packet to that slave This slave to slave transfer is a function of the master device and is also used by programming software to upload and download programs to processors on the DF1 half duplex link Several Allen Bradley products support DF1 half duplex master protocol They include the SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC 5 05 and enhanced PLC 5 processors Rockwell Software WINtelligent LINXTM and RSLinx version 2 x and higher also support DF1 half duplex master protocol Typically the master maintains an active node table that indicates which slaves are active slaves that res
202. en Condition Result If the rung is true EN bit remains set TT bit remains set ACC value is reset If the rung is false EN bit is reset TT bit is reset ACC value is reset Timer Off Delay TOF Tor Use the TOF instruction to delay turning on or off an output The TOF instruction TIMER OFF DELAY Timer T4 Time Baxe Preset Accum o 0 01 Lim 120 Execution Times usec when timed out True False 39 42 31 65 Using Status Bits TJ begins to count timebase intervals when the rung makes a true to false transition As long as rung conditions remain false the timer increments its accumulated value ACC each scan until it reaches the preset value PRE The controller resets the accumulated value when rung conditions go true regardless of whether the timer has This Bit Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Timer Done Bit DN bit 13 rung conditions are true rung conditions go false and the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset value Timer Timing Bit TT bit 14 rung conditions are false and the accumulated value is less than the preset value rung conditions go true or when the done bit is reset Timer Enable Bit EN bit 15 rung conditions are true rung conditions go false 6 11 te E E i 5 fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 6 12 When the controller chan
203. ents the major error that occurred while user fault routine processing the fault routine due to another major error S 5 4 to S 5 7 Reserved NA NA 5 8 Retentive Data Lost Status This bit is set whenever retentive data is lost This bit remains set until you clear it While set this bit causes the controller to fault prior to the first true scan of the program 5 9 Reserved NA NA S 5 10 STI Lost Status This bit is set whenever the STI timer expires while the STI routine is either executing or disabled and the pending bit s 2 0 is already set 5 11 to S 5 12 Reserved NA NA 5 13 Input Filter Selection Status This bit is set whenever the discrete input filter Modified selection in the controller is made compatible with the hardware Refer to page A 8 for more information 5 14 to 5 15 Reserved NA NA Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable B 17 o o es eh i o Y 3 tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Address Bit Classification Description S 6 Major Error Code Status A hexidecimal code is entered in this word by the controller when a major error is declared Refer to S 1 13 The code defines the type of fault as indicated on the following pages This word is not cleared by the controller Error codes are presented stored and displayed in a hexadecimal format If you enter a fault code as a parameter in an instruction in your ladder program
204. er destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct SQL Sequencer file indexed direct O I S B N Not Applicable Load source direct indexed O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 direct control direct R element level Not Applicable length contained in the 1 255 control register position contained in the 0 255 control register D Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses C 12 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters Wm Instruction Valid Addressing TM Instruction Description Parameters Mode s Valid File Types Valid Value Ranges SQO Sequencer file indexed direct O I S B N Not Applicable Output mask direct indexed O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 direct destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct control direct R element level Not Applicable length 1 255 position 0 255 SQR Square Root source immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct STD Selectable Not Applicable Timed Disable STE Selectable Not Applicable Timed Enable STS Selectable file immediate direct O I S B T C R N always equal 5 Timed Start indexed direct time immediate direct O l S B T C R N 0 255 indexed d
205. er a hexadecimal code It will be variable if you enter an element address or a file address for changing the mask with each step The following figure indicates how the SQO instruction works Using Application Specific Instructions SQO SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN File B10 1 Mask OFOF DN Dest 0 14 0 Control R6 20 Length 4 Position 2 External Outputs Destination 0 14 0 Associated with 0 14 15 87 0 00 0000 0101 0000 1010 01 ON 02 Mask Value OFOF 03 le ON 15 87 0 04 0000 1111 0000 1111 05 D 06 9 Sequencer Output File B10 1 07 a Word Step 08 le ON B10 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 09 2 1010 0010 1111 0101 1 10 ON 3 1111 0101 0100 1010 2 Current Step 11 4 0101 0101 0101 O101 3 12 5 0000 1111 0000 1111 4 13 14 15 11 11 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using SQC 11 12 When the status of all non masked bits in the source word match those of the corresponding reference word the instruction sets the found bit FD in the control word Otherwise the found bit FD is cleared The bits mask data when reset and pass data when set The mask can be fixed or variable If you enter a hexadecimal code it is fixed If you enter an element address or a file address for changing the mask with each step it is variable When t
206. er faults calling Allen Bradley for assistance 14 1 0 fe o X o 2 a gt fe Lum MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Understanding the Controller LED Status Between the time you apply power to the controller and the time it has to establish communication with a connected programming device the only form of communication between you and the controller is through the LEDs When Operating Normally When power is applied only the power LED turns on and remains on This is part of the normal powerup sequence When the controller is placed in REM Run mode the run LED also turns on and remains on as shown on the right in the figure below If a force exists the force LED is on as well When powered up When placed in RRUN Refer to the following key to determine the status of the LED indicators __ Indicates the LED is OFF EN POWER ga Indicates the LED is ON RUN CT Indicates the LED is FLASHING FAULT FORCE Status of LED does not matter 14 2 Troubleshooting Your System When an Error Exists If an error exists within the controller the controller LEDs operate as described in the following tables If the LEDs indicate
207. esets On overflow minor error bit S 5 0 is also set and the value 32 768 or 32 767 is placed in the destination The presence of an overflow is checked before and after the offset value is applied 0 2 Zero Z sets when destination value is zero 0 3 Sign S sets if the destination value is negative otherwise resets _ Ifthe result of the Source times the Rate divided by 10000 is greater than 32767 the SCL instruction overflows causing error 0020 Minor Error Bit and places 32767 in the Destination This occurs regardless of the current offset 8 12 Using Math Instructions The following example takes a OV to 10V analog input from a MicroLogix 1000 analog controller and scales the raw input data to a value between 0 and 100 The input value range is OV to 10V which corresponds to 0 to 31 207 counts The scaled value range is 0 to 100 percent Application Example Convert Voltage Input to Percent 100 Scaled Max e2 E E Scaled Value E percent a fe m n Scaled Min BL fe 0 OV 13 107 10V Input Min Input Max Input Value Calculating the Linear Relationship Use the following equations to calculate the scaled units Scaled value input value x rate offset Rate scaled max scaled min input max input min 100 0 31 207 0 00320 or 32 10000 Offset scaled min input min x rate 0 0 x 00320 0 8 13 MicroLogix 1000 Programmabl
208. eshooting Your Explains how to interpret and correct problems with your Troubleshooting 1 System MicroLogix 1000 controller system Appendix A Hardware Reference Me E electrical environmental and functional Programming Explains the system status file and provides instruction Appendix B Reference execution times Valid Addressing Provides a listing of the instructions along with their Modes and File Types parameters and valid file types Reference Appendix C for Instruction Parameters Understanding the Contains descriptions of the DF1 protocol and DH 485 Appendix D Communication network Protocols Appendix E Application Example Provides advanced application examples for the high speed pp Programs counter sequencer bit shift and message instructions Appendix F Optional Analog Input Explains how to calibrate your controller using software pp Software Calibration offsets Contains definitions for terms and abbreviations that are Glossary specific to this product Related Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning Allen Bradley products To obtain a copy contact your local Allen Bradley office or distributor Document For Read this Document Number A procedural manual for technical personnel who use the um Allen Bradley Hand Held Programmer HHP to monitor and Nioo og OOit ang nn Held Programmer HHP User 1761 6 2 develop control logic programs for the Micro
209. ess i 5 Hole in 1 4 in Drill Change Reset HT Keyswitch 1 1 11 1 1 14 11 8 Drill Home 15 OTT Drill On Off O 3 1 Drill Retract O 3 2 Drill Forward O 3 8 Drilled du ad EI Photo Eye Reset I 1 2 Holes a Counter Hold 1 1 3 Hp a se d Quadrature A B Encoder and Drive gt Photo Eye du 11 0 1 1 Reflector Conveyor Enable wired in series to the Drive 0 3 5 Conveyor Drive Start Stop wired in series to the Drive 0 3 0 Paper Drilling Machine Operation Overview Undrilled books are placed onto a conveyor taking them to a single spindle drill Each book moves down the conveyor until it reaches the first drilling position The conveyor stops moving and the drill lowers and drills the first hole The drill then retracts and the conveyor moves the same book to the second drilling position The drilling process is repeated until there are the desired holes per book o o e eh i o _ 3 tc E 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Drill Mechanism Operation When the operator presses the start button the drill motor turns on After the book is in the first drilling position the conveyor subroutine sets a drill sequence start bit and the drill moves toward the book When the drill has drilled through the book the drill body hits a limit switch and causes the drill to retract up out of the book When the drill body is fully retracted the drill body hits another limit switch indicti
210. ew K5A1 550 and B5A1 PanelView Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 2711 802 K9A2 900 processors 2711 816 T9A2 Operator K9A5 Terminals T9A5 K9A1 and T9A1 D 14 NA Not Applicable Understanding the Communication Protocols Important DH 485 Network Planning Considerations Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any hardware Listed below are some of the factors that can affect system performance amount of electrical noise temperature and humidity in the network environment number of devices on the network connection and grounding quality in installation e amount of communication traffic on the network type of process being controlled network configuration The major hardware and software issues you need to resolve before installing a network are discussed in the following sections Hardware Considerations You need to decide the length of the communication cable where you route it and how to protect it from the environment where it will be installed When the communication cable is installed you need to know how many devices are to be connected during installation and how many devices will be added in the future The following sections will help you understand and plan the network Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable You must install an AIC Advanced Interface Converter catalog number 1761 NET AIC for each node
211. example started in chapter 6 Refer to appendix E for the complete paper drilling machine application example Drill Home t15 CT Drill On Off 0 3 1 Drill Retract O 3 2 Drill Forward 0 3 3 Drill Depth Photo Eye Reset I 1 2 ies H4 ET Counter Hold 1 1 3 GA Quadrature A B Encoder and Drive 11 0 1 1 1 Conveyor Enable wired in series to the Drive O 3 5 Conveyor Drive Start Stop wired in series to the Drive O 3 0 Photo Eye Reflector c e2 E E E i fe fe n The main program file file 2 initializes the HSC instruction monitors the machine start and stop buttons and calls other subroutines necessary to run the machine Refer to the comments preceding each rung for additional information Rung 2 0 Initializes the high speed counter each time the REM Run mode is entered The high speed counter data area N7 5 N7 9 corresponds with the starting address source address of the HSL instruction The HSC instruction is disabled each entry into the REM run mode until the first time that it is executed as true The high preset was pegged on initialization to prevent a high preset interrupt from occurring during the initialization process 1 st Output Mask Pass only use bit 0 ie O 0 0 Sil MOV MOVE 15 Source 1 Dest N7 5 0 Xuemnniqiaumisosuosio 12 29 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 12 30 High
212. fey Forces a high speed counter low preset interrupt to occur each REM Run mode fo entry An interrupt can only occur on the transition of the high speed counter put accum to a preset value accum reset to 1 then 0 This is done to allow the am high speed counter interrupt subroutine sequencers to initialize The order of high speed counter initialization is 1 load high speed counter parameters 2 execute HSL instruction 3 execute true HSC instruction 4 optimal force high speed counter interrupt to occur l st High Speed Counter Pass 8 1 TRAC RESET TO ACCUM VALUE 15 Counter C5 0 Source 1 FERRAN High Speed Counter C5 0 RES 12 31 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 12 32 The high speed counter is used to control the conveyor position The high speed counter counts pulses supplied by the conveyer s encoder via hardware inputs I 0 0 and I 0 1 Hardware inputs I 0 2 reset and I 0 3 hold are connected to a photo switch ensuring the HSC instruction only counts encoder pulses when a manual is in front of the drill and that the high speed counter is reset at the leading edge of each manual The high speed counter clears the conveyer drive output bit O 0 0 each time a low preset is reached As a result the drive decelerates and stops the conveyer motor The high speed counter clears the output within mi
213. gency stop switches in different locations its installation is important from a safety standpoint Overtravel limit switches or mushroom head push buttons are wired in series so that when any of them opens the master control relay is de energized This removes power to input and output device circuits Refer to the figure on page 1 6 ATTENTION Never alter these circuits to defeat their function since serious injury and or machine damage could result Note If you are using an external dc output power supply interrupt the dc output side rather than the ac line side of the supply to avoid the additional delay of power supply turn off The external ac line of the dc output power supply should be fused Connect a set of master control relays in series with the dc power supplying the input and output circuits Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it If you mount a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure place the switch operating handle on the outside of the enclosure so that you can disconnect power without opening the enclosure Whenever any of the emergency stop switches are opened power to input and output devices should be removed When you use the master control relay to remove power from the external I O circuits power continues to be provided to the controller s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still be observed
214. ger f File 0 output 4 timer 1 input 5 counter 2 status 6 control 3 binary 7 integer File delimiter Colon or semicolon delimiter separates file and structure word numbers e Element number 0 to 0 output 39 timer 1 input 31 counter 32 status 15 control 31 binary 104 integer 4 10 Programming Overview You assign logical addresses to instructions from the highest level element to the lowest level bit Addressing examples are shown in the table below To specify the address of a Use these parameters Word within an integer file N 7 2 File Type File Number File Delimiter Word Number file e g a timer file File Type File Number File Delimiter Structure Number Delimiter Word Word within a structure T 4 7 ACC e2 E E E i fe fe n Bit within an integer file N7 2 5 File Type File Number File Delimiter Word Number Bit Delimiter Bit Number Bit within a bit file B WwW Da 31 File Type File Number Bit Delimiter Bit Number Bit files are bit stream continuous files and therefore you can address them in two ways by word and bit or by bit alone Bit within a structure file R6 7 DN e g a control file File Type File Number File Delimiter Structure Number Delimiter Mnemonic
215. ges from the REM Run or REM Test mode to the REM Program mode or user power is lost while a timer off delay instruction is timing but has not reached its preset value the following occurs Timer Enable EN bit remains set Timer Timing TT bit remains set Timer Done DN bit remains set e Accumulated value ACC remains the same On returning to the REM Run or REM Test mode the following can happen Condition Result If the rung is true TT bit is reset DN bit remains set EN bit is set ACC value is reset If the rung is false TT bit is reset DN bit is reset EN bit is reset ACC value is set equal to the preset value ATTENTION The Reset RES instruction cannot be used with the TOF instruction because RES always clears the status as well as the accumulated value See page 6 20 Note The TOF times inside an inactive MCR Pair Using Basic Instructions Retentive Timer RTO fr Use the RTO instruction to turn an output on or off after its timer has been on for a J ee eee EN preset time interval The RTO instruction is a retentive instruction that lets the timer Preset jo PM stop and start without resetting the accumulated value ACC Accum 0 The RTO instruction retains its accumulated value when any of the following occurs Execution Times Rungconditions become false usec when You change controller operation from the REM Run or REM Test mode
216. gher response times also provides better filtering of high frequency noise You can apply a unique input filter setting to each of the three input groups e Oand 1 2and3 e 4to x where x 9 for 16 I O point controllers and x 19 for 32 I O point controllers The minimum and maximum response times associated with each input filter setting can be found in the tables that follow Response Times for High Speed dc Inputs 0 to 3 applies to 1761 L10BWA 1761 L16BWA L20BWA 5A L32BWA L10BWB L16BWB L20BWB 5A L32BWB L16BBB and L32BBB controllers A 9 E E Komina Filter Maximum ON Maximum OFF 50 Duty Cycle Khz etting ms Delay ms Delay ms 6 600 0 075 0 075 0 075 5 000 0 100 0 100 0 100 2 000 0 250 0 250 0 250 1 000 0 500 0 500 0 500 0 500 1 000 1 000 1 000 0 200 2 000 2 000 2 000 0 125 4 000 4 000 4 000 0 062 8 000 8 000 8 000 0 031 16 000 16 000 16 000 This is the default setting Hardware Reference Response Times for dc Inputs 4 and Above applies to 1761 L10BWA 1761 L16BWA L20BWA 5A L32BWA L10BWB L16BWB L20BWB 5A L32BWB L16BBB and L32BBB controllers Nominal Filter Maximum ON Maximum OFF Setting ms Delay ms Delay ms 0 50 0 500 0 500 1 00 1 00 1 000 2 00 2 000 2 000 4 00 4 000 4 000 8 009 8 000 8 000 16 00 16 000 16 000 Thisisthe default setting Response Times for ac Inputs applies
217. gram Flow Control Instructions Nesting Subroutine Files Nesting subroutines allows you to direct program flow from the main program to a subroutine and then on to another subroutine You can nest up to eight levels of subroutines If you are using an STI subroutine HSC interrupt subroutine or user fault routine you can nest subroutines up to three levels from each subroutine The following figure illustrates how subroutines may be nested Main Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Program Subroutine File 6 Subroutine File 7 Subroutine File 8 D 3 Oo re X Example of Nesting Subroutines to Level 3 An error occurs if more than the allowable levels of subroutines are called subroutine stack overflow or if more returns are executed than there are call levels subroutine stack underflow Using JSR When the JSR instruction is executed the controller jumps to the subroutine instruction SBR at the beginning of the target subroutine file and resumes execution at that point You cannot jump into any part of a subroutine except the first instruction in that file You must program each subroutine in its own program file by assigning a unique file number 4 15 10 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using SBR Using RET 10 6 The target subroutine is identified by the file number that you entered in the JSR instruction This instruction serves as a label or identifier for a program f
218. grams Instead of having electrical rung continuity ladder logic is looking for logical rung continuity A ladder diagram identifies each of the elements in an electromechanical circuit and represents them graphically This allows you to see how your control circuit operates before you actually start the physical operation of your system tee 1k Vb O input instructions In a ladder diagram each of the input devices are represented in series or parallel combinations across the rung of the ladder The last element on the rung is the output that receives the action as a result of the conditional state of the inputs on the rung 4 14 Programming Overview Each output instruction is executed by the controller when the rung is scanned and the conditions on the rung are true When the rung is not scanned or the logic conditions on the rung do not create a true logic path the output is not executed The programming device allows you to enter a ladder logic program into the micro controller In the following illustration the electromechanical circuit shows PB1 and PB2 two pushbuttons wired in series with an alarm horn PB1 is a normally open pushbutton and PB2 is normally closed This same circuit is shown in ladder logic by two contacts wired in series with an output Contact I 0 and I 1 are examine if closed instructions For more information on this instruction refer to page 6 4 2 Electromechanical Circuit Lad
219. h 9 Position 2 Rung 2 2 Leelee ee eS SSE SS ire e ade PEND mmt erum Heke See Ree RS oe SS The following displays the FILE DATA for both sequencers The SQC compare data starts at N7 0 and ends at N7 9 While the SQO output data starts at N7 10 and ends at N7 19 Please note that step 0 of the SQO is never active The reset rung combined with the rung logic of sequencers guarantees that the sequencers always start at step 1 Both sequencers also roll over to step 1 Roll OVer to step 1 is integral to all sequencer instructions SQC Compare Data Addresses Data Radix Decimal N7 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 N7 10 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E 20 Application Example Programs Bottle Line Example Conveyor The following application example illustrates how the controller high speed counter is configured for an Up down counter For a detailed explanation of e XIC OTL OTU and OTE instructions see chapter 6 e GRT LES and GEQ instruction see chapter 7 e HSC and HSL instructions see chapter 12 Bottle Fill and Conveyor acking Machine Cap Machine Stop Fill 0 0 0 Slow Pack O 0 2 Slow Fill 0 0 1 El xm ee ots ay art aes Oye et Oe ee JE eS ows 4 Bottle Line Operation Overview The controller on the conveyor within the specified area above regulates the speeds of the bottle fill and packing machines Each machine is connected to a separate controller that communicates with the conveyo
220. hapter contains the following overviews Bit Shift Instructions Overview e Sequencer Instructions Overview e Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function Overview 11 2 Using Application Specific Instructions Bit Shift Instructions Overview The following general information applies to bit shift instructions Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming these instructions File is the address of the bit array you want to manipulate You must use the file indicator in the bit array address e Control is the address of the control element that stores the status byte of the e instruction the size of the array in number of bits Note that the control address c should not be used for any other instruction The control element is shown below zi 15 13 11 10 00 xz n Word 0 EN DN ER UL Not Used Word 1 Size of bit array number of bits Word 2 Reserved Status bits of the control element may be addressed by mnemonic They include Unload Bit UL bit 10 is the instruction s output Error Bit ER bit 11 when set indicates the instruction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or position Avoid using the unload bit when this bit is set Done Bit DN bit 13 when set indicates the bit array shifted one position Enable Bit EN bit 15 is set on a false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled
221. have different image locations for the additional parameters ATTENTION Do not change a preset value and an output mask source with the same HSL instruction as the accumulator is approaching the old preset value ATTENTION If the high speed counter is enabled and the HSL instruction is evaluated true the high speed counter parameters in the HSL instruction are applied immediately without stopping the operating of the high speed counter If the same HSL instruction is being used to change the high speed counter controlled mask source and the preset the mask source is changed first and the preset second The preset is changed within 40 after the mask source If the original preset is reached after the new mask source is applied but before the new preset is applied the new outputs are applied immediately Using High Speed Counter Instructions High Speed Counter Reset RES C5 0 The RES instruction allows you to write a zero to the hardware accumulator and RES image accumulator Execution Times The Counter referenced by this instruction has the same address as the HSC usec when instruction counter and is entered as C5 0 True False 51 00 6 00 Operation Execution of this instruction immediately removes pending high speed counter interrupts D 3 Oo re X e resets the hardware and instruction accumulators reset the PE LS OV UN and DN status bits loads the instru
222. he specific protocol in use 13 7 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Timing Diagram for a Successful MSG Instruction The following section illustrates a successful timing diagram for a Series D or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controller or a MicroLogix 1000 analog controller MSG instruction Target node processes packet Target node receives Rung goes True Target node sent successfully and returns data read or packet reply writes data success Control Block Status Bits i i P 1 Bit 10 EW a Wee it 10 0 Enabled and Waiting m A m E E Bti5EN Enabled 0 0 Bit 14 ST Start LI LI 1 1 Jj 1 LI LI Bit13DN 0 I LI LI Done 1 i l i LI LI Bit 12ER 9 Error i i 1 P 1 1 1 Bit9NR 0 TEN NIE NMEF NNNM Negative Response oa Bit8 TO Time Out 13 8 Using the Message Instruction i The EW bit is set 1 and the ST DN NR and TO flags are cleared If the transmit buffer is not available the EN flag remains false 0 E When rung conditions go true and the transmit buffer becomes available the EN flag goes true 1 The EN bit remains set until either the DN ER or TO bit is set The TO bit has no effect unless the ST bit has first been set 3 If the Target Node successfully receives the MSG packet it sends back an ACK an acknowledge The ACK causes the processor to clear bit S 2 7 Bit S 2 7 is valid for Series C d
223. he ee DH 485 network for data collection i Provides communication between stations on the pTi PLC 5r DH and SLC 500 DH 485 networks 1785 KA5 n 1771 PLC Enables communication and data transfer from PLC 1785 6 5 5 Chassis to SLC 500 on DH 485 network Also enables 1785 1 21 Gateway programming software programming or data acquisition across DH to DH 485 Provides an interface for SLC 500 using protocol Flexible 1771 PLC cartridge 2760 SFC3 to other A B PLCs and devices 2760 RB Interface Chassis Three configurable channels are available to interface 2760 ND001 Module with Bar Code Vision RF Dataliner and PLC systems 1784 KTX PC DH 485 IBM XT AT l l KTXD IM Computer Bus Provides DH 485 using RSLinx 1784 6 5 22 PCMCIA slot 1784 PCMK PCMCIA IM A ad Provides DH 485 using RSLinx 1784 6 5 19 Interchange Hand Held Provides hand held programming monitoring 1747 PT1 Terminal NA configuring and troubleshooting capabilities for SLC 1747 NP002 500 processors D 13 o o es 3 i o Y tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Catalog Installation Number Description Requirement Function Publication 1747 DTAM 2707 L8P1 isis DTAM d DIAN Es 1747 ND013 N 40P 1 a DTAM Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 2707 800 V40P2 PEN a d 2707 803 pei Interfaces M232P3 and M485P3 2711 K5A2 B5A2 K5A5 B5A5 PanelVi
224. he estimated total memory usage of your application system Remember this is an estimate actual compiled programs may differ by 12 To determine the estimated amount of memory remaining in the controller you have selected do the following Subtract the total memory usage from 1024 The result of this calculation will be the estimated total memory remaining in your selected controller The calculated memory usage may vary from the actual compiled program by 12 Programming Reference Execution Time Worksheet Use this worksheet to calculate your execution time for ladder program Procedure Maximum Scan Time 1 Input scan time output scan time housekeeping time and 210 ys discrete forcing 330 ys with forcing analog 250 us without forcing analog 2 Estimate your program scan time A Count the number of program rungs in your logic program and HS multiply by 6 B Add up your program execution times when all instructions are HS true Include interrupt routines in this calculation 3 Estimate your controller scan time A Without communications add sections 1 and 2 HS B With communications add sections 1 and 2 and multiply by HS 1 05 4 Todetermine your maximum scan time in ms divide your m controller scan time by 1000 S Olf a subroutine executes more than once per scan include each subroutine execution scan time o o es LU t o _ tc B 31 MicroLogix 1000 P
225. he recommended calibration period is once every 6 months If an application has a wide range of operating temperatures a software calibration should be performed every 3 to 4 months o o es LU t o _ tc F3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Example Ladder Diagram The following ladder diagram uses 3 internal bits to perform the calibration procedure CAL LO ENABLE causes the ladder to capture the 4 mA calibration value and CAL HI ENABLE causes the ladder to capture the 20 mA calibration value CALIBRATE causes the ladder diagram to scale the hi and low values to the nominal values which provides the slope and offset values used to calibrate the analog input channel Once the calibration procedure is complete set the CONVERSION ENABLE bit to a The calibration numbers can then be used to scale the raw analog data The corrected analog input data will be placed in memory location ANALOG_SCALED The following symbols are used in this example CAL_LO_ENABLE B3 500 CAL_HI_ENABLE B3 501 CALIBRATE B3 502 CONVERSION ENABLE B3 503 ANALOG_IN 1 0 4 LO_CAL_VALUE N7 90 HI CAL VALUE N7 91 CAL_SPAN N7 92 SCALE_HI N7 93 SCALE_LOW N7 94 SCALE_SPAN N7 95 SLOPE_X10K N7 97 OFFSET N7 100 ANALOG_SCALED N7 101 F 4 Rung 2 0 CAL LO ENABLE B3 504 T OSR Rung 2 1 CAL HI ENABLE B3 505 ere fe OSR Rung 2 2 CALIBRATE
226. he rung goes from false to true the instruction increments to the next step word in the sequencer file Data stored there is transferred through a mask and compared against the source for equality While the rung remains true the source is compared against the reference data for every scan If equal the FD bit is set in the SQCS control counter Applications of the SQC instruction include machine diagnostics The following figure explains how the SQC instruction works Using Application Specific Instructions soc SEQUENCER COMPARE EN File B10 11 DN Mask FFFO FD Source I 3 0 Control R6 21 Length 4 Position 2 Input Word 1 3 0 0010 0100 1001 1101 97 Y Mask Value FFFO 1111 1111 1111 0000 Y zx Sequencer Ref File B10 11 Word Step a B10 11 0 12 1 13 0010 0100 1001 0000 2 14 3 15 4 SQC FD bit is set when the instruction detects that an input word matches through mask its corresponding reference word The FD bit R6 21 FD is set in the example since the input word matches the sequencer reference value using the mask value 11 13 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Sequencer Load SQL Control Length FPowitica el The SQL instruction stores 16 bit data into a sequencer load file at each step of i sequencer operation The source of this data can be an I O or intern
227. he template to the VA mounting surface Make sure One Protective Wrap your controller is spaced remove after wiring properly Drill holes through the template o z o Ln G I MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Mounting Your Controller Vertically 1 18 Your controller can also be mounted vertically within an enclosure using mounting screws or a DIN rail To insure the stability of your controller we recommend using mounting screws To insure the controller s reliability the following environmental specifications must not be exceeded Top A Description Specification Operating Discrete 0 C to 45 C 32 F to 113 F Temperature Analog 0 C to 45 C 32 F to 113 F Operating Shock 9 0g peak acceleration 113 1 ms duration Panel mounted 3 times each direction each axis Operating Shock 7 0g peak acceleration 11 1 ms duration DIN rail mounted 3 times each direction each axis Bottom A DC input voltage derated linearly from 30 C 30V to 26 4V Note When mounting your controller vertically the nameplate should be facing downward Wiring Your Controller 2 Wiring Your Controller This chapter describes how to wire your controller Topics include o z o A G I grounding guidelines sinking and sourcing circuits wiring recommendations e wiring diagrams input voltag
228. hen True False 15 19 4 25 Use a RES instruction to reset a timer or counter When the RES instruction is executed it resets the data having the same address as the RES instruction Using a RES instruction for a The controller resets the Timer Do not use a RES instruction with a TOF ACC value to 0 DN bit TT bit EN bit Counter ACC value to 0 OV bit UN bit DN bit CU bit CD bit Control POS value to 0 EN bit EU bit DN bit EM bit ER bit UL bit IN and FD go to last state Note If using this instruction to reset the HSC accumulator see page 12 21 When resetting a counter if the RES instruction is enabled and the counter rung is enabled the CU or CD bit is reset If the counter preset value is negative the RES instruction sets the accumulated value to zero This in turn causes the done bit to be set by a count down or count up instruction ATTENTION Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and the done timing and enabled bits do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction Otherwise unpredictable machine operation or injury to personnel may occur 6 20 Using Basic Instructions Basic Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example This section provides ladder rungs to demonstrate the use of basic instructions The rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application example desc
229. hen energize the blue paint gun Or if N7 0 an invalid color selection default the color of the part to blue and energize the blue paint gun Blue Gun EQU 0 0 EQUAL pope Sasa See ese Soe SSeS shee Se HSS jess 5 Source A N7 0 0 0 nem B 1 Poe He SHS seas Se Se 4LIM 2255 LIMIT TEST Low Limit 4 Test N7 0 0 High Lim 1 FEDERER Rung 2 6 Decodes color select word If N7 0 2 then energize the yellow paint gun Yellow Gun XBQUE 9 4 0 0 EQUAL qoem a SSS eS eee eS See SSeS osszes Source A N7 0 1 0 Source B 2 qose SSeS Rung 2 7 Decodes color select word If N7 0 3 then energize the red paint gun Red Gun XBEQUZ A As e 9em 0 0 EQUAL FENA NNE Sere e see SSS soe ses sree NES ESR Source A N7 0 2 0 Source B 3 fers emen cum Rung 2 8 E 40 Application Example Programs Adjustable Timer Application Example The following application example illustrates the use of timers to adjust the drill dwell time at the end of the machines downstroke For a detailed explanation of XIC TON and OSR instructions see chapter 6 LES and GRT instructions see chapter 7 ADD and SUB instructions see chapter 8 Valid dwell times are 5 0 seconds to 120 0 seconds Adjustments are made in 2 5 second intervals Each time I 8 and 1 9 is depressed the timer preset or delay is adjusted up or down accordingly By altering the val
230. ial up phone modems leased line modems radio modems and line drivers For point to point full duplex modem connections that do not require any modem handshaking signals to operate use DF1 full duplex protocol For point to multipoint modem connections or for point to point modem connections that require Request to Send Clear To Send RTS CTS handshaking use DF1 half duplex slave protocol In this case one and only one of the other devices must be configured for DF1 half duplex master protocol Do not attempt to use DH 485 protocol through modems under any circumstance Note Only Series D or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers support RTS CTS modem handshaking and only when configured for DF1 half duplex slave protocol with the control line parameter set to Half Duplex Modem No other modem handshaking lines i e Data Set Ready Carrier Detect and Data Terminal Ready are supported by any MicroLogix 1000 controllers Dial Up Phone Modems Dial up phone line modems support point to point full duplex communications Normally a MicroLogix 1000 controller on the receiving end of the dial up connection will be configured for DF1 full duplex protocol The modem connected to the MicroLogix 1000 controller must support auto answer and must not require any modem handshaking signals from the MicroLogix 1000 i e DTR or RTS in order to operate The MicroLogix 1000 has no means to cause its
231. icroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Status bits of the control structure are addressed by mnemonic These include Empty Bit EM bit 12 is set by the controller to indicate the stack is empty gt Done Bit DN bit 13 is set by the controller to indicate the stack is full This inhibits loading the stack FFU LFU Enable Bit EU bit 14 is set on a false to true transition of the FFU LFU rung and is reset on a true to false transition FFL LFL Enable Bit EN bit 15 is set on a false to true transition of the FFL LFL rung and is reset on a true to false transition P P P Effects on Index Register S 24 The value present in 8 24 is overwritten with the position value when a false to true transition of the FFL FFU or LFL LFU rung occurs For the FFL LFL the position value determined at instruction entry is placed in 8 24 For the FFU LFU the position value determined at instruction exit is placed in S 24 When the DN bit is set a false to true transition of the FFL LFL rung does not change the position value or the index register value When the EM bit is set a false to true transition of the FFU LFU rung does not change the position value or the index register value 9 24 Using Data Handling Instructions FIFO Load FFL and FIFO Unload FFU FFL and FFU instructions are used in pairs The FFL instruction loads words into a user created file called a FIFO stack The FFU instruction unloads words
232. id File Types Valid Value Ranges preset contained in the 32 768 32 767 counter register accum contained in the 32 768 32 767 counter register HSD HSC Interrupt counter direct C Not Applicable Disable HSE HSC Interrupt counter direct C Not Applicable Enable HSL HSC Load counter direct C Not Applicable source direct B N Not Applicable length always 5 IIM Immediate slot direct Not Applicable Input with Mask mask immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct length immediate 1 10 INT Interrupt Not Applicable Subroutine IOM Immediate slot direct O Not Applicable Output with Mask mask direct indexed O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 direct length immediate 1 32 JMP Jump label number immediate 0 999 JSR Jump to subroutine file immediate 3 255 Subroutine number LBL Label label number immediate 0 999 D Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses C 7 o o en cb i o _ tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual gi Instruction Valid Addressing o Instruction Description Parameters Mode s Valid File Types Valid Value Ranges LEQ Less Thanor source A direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable Equal To direct source B immediate direct O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max LES Less Than source A direct indexe
233. ile as a regular subroutine file This instruction has no control bits It is always evaluated as true The instruction must be programmed as the first instruction of the first rung of a subroutine Use of this instruction is optional however we recommend using it for clarity This output instruction marks the end of subroutine execution or the end of the subroutine file It causes the controller to resume execution at the instruction following the JSR instruction The rung containing the RET instruction may be conditional if this rung precedes the end of the subroutine In this way the controller omits the balance of a subroutine only if its rung condition is true Without an RET instruction the END instruction always present in the subroutine automatically returns program execution to the instruction following the JSR instruction in your calling ladder file Using Program Flow Control Instructions Master Control Reset MCR Use MCR instructions in pairs to create program zones that turn off all the non retentive outputs in the zone Rungs within the MCR zone are still scanned but scan time is reduced due to the false state of non retentive outputs Non retentive outputs Execution Times are reset when their rung goes false MCR usec when True False 3 98 4 07 uM ARR pianta Then the Controller True Executes the rungs in the MCR zone based on each rung s individual input condition as if the z
234. ilitated by status file bit S 2 14 math overflow selection bit Math Overflow Selection Bit S 2 14 Set this bit when you intend to use 32 bit addition and subtraction When S 2 14 is set and the result of an ADD SUB MUL DIV or NEG instruction cannot be represented in the destination address due to math underflow or overflow e The overflow bit S 0 1 is set e The overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set e The destination address contains the unsigned truncated least significant 16 bits of the result When S 2 14 is reset default condition and the result of an ADD SUB MUL DIV or NEG instruction cannot be represented in the destination address due to math underflow or overflow e The overflow bit S 0 1 is set e The overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set e The destination address contains 32767 if the result is positive or 32768 if the result is negative Note The status of bit S 2 14 has no effect on the DDV instruction Also it has no effect on the math register content when using MUL and DIV instructions Example of 32 bit Addition The following example shows how a 16 bit signed integer is added to a 32 bit signed integer Remember that S 2 14 must be set for 32 bit addition Note The value of the most significant 16 bits B3 3 of the 32 bit number is increased by 1 if the carry bit S 0 0 is set and it is decreased by 1 if the number being added B3 1 is negative To avoid a major error from occurring at the end of
235. information could be lost because the program download sequence could immediately overwrite the information Once the download is completed the programming software returns the file ownership to the controller so other devices can communicate with it again With the addition of DF1 half duplex slave protocol the controller clears the file ownership if no supported commands are received from the owner within the timeout period If the file ownership were not cleared after a download sequence interruption the processor would not accept commands from any other devices because it would assume another device still had file ownership If a download sequence is interrupted due to noise caused by electromagnetic interference discontinue communications to the controller for the ownership timeout period and restart the program download The ownership timeout period is set to 60 seconds as a default for all protocols However if you are using DF1 half duplex and the poll timeout value is set to greater than 60 seconds the poll timeout value will be used instead of the ownership timeout After the timeout you can re establish communications with the processor and try the program download again The only other way to clear file ownership is to cycle power on the processor Understanding the Communication Protocols Using Modems with MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers The types of modems that you can use with MicroLogix 1000 controllers include d
236. ing down the filling operation Before re starting the filler allow the packer to empty the holding area until it is about 1 3 full HSC Interr Fill Stop due to High Preset C530 LES 0 0 LESS THAN U IH Source A C5 0 ACC 0 0 Source B 150 dence c mee nue Euer ici mol ek HSC Interr due to High Preset C5 0 U IH Rung 2 7 E A END Smat He iann eA nene ni anA RR T Put D Data Table 3 Addresses Data Radix Decimal Xx N7 0 1 T 350 0 0 E 23 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Pick and Place Machine Example The following application example illustrates how the controller high speed counter is configured for the up and down counter using an encoder with reset and hold For a detailed explanation of e XIC XIO OTE RES OTU OTL and TON instructions see chapter 6 e GRT and NEQ instructions see chapter 7 e MOV instruction see chapter 9 e HSC and HSL instructions see chapter 12 Storage Bins Conveyor Master PLC Outputs Wired to Inputs us 1 0 5 Home Position 1 0 6 Encoder 1 0 7 A 1 0 0 B 1 0 1 C 1 0 2 Pick and Place Machine Operation Overview A pick and place machine takes parts from a conveyor and drops them into the appropriate bins When the pick and place head is positioned over the conveyor with a gripped part the master PLC communicates to the controller co
237. ing machine Slow down the packing machine to allow the filler to catch up Slow Pack LES 0 0 LESS THAN Possess Sees eeea se lees seSso ce eec sass ecees L Source A C5 0 ACC 2 0 Source B 100 Rung 2 3 If the packer was slowed down to allow the filler to catch up wait until the holding area is approximately 2 3 full before allowing the packer to run at full Slow Pack Slow Pack GRT 0 0 0 0 GREATER THAN U Source A C5 0 ACC 2 2 0 Source B 200 qute oe uees IA Application Example Programs Rung 2 4 Filling machine running too fast for the packing machine Slow down the filling machine to allow the packer to catch up Slow Fill GRT 0 0 GREATER THAN L Source A C5 0 ACC 1 0 Source B 250 e isse SOR ne eut ess Genes tod sa veis it Rung 2 5 If the filler was slowed down to allow the packer to catch up wait until the holding area is approximately 1 3 full before allowing the filler to run at full Speed again Slow Fill Slow Fill PERESS s eon Snte 0 0 0 0 LESS THAN U Source A C5 0 ACC 1 1 0 Source B 150 PERSER VER TESS ace Rung 2 6 If the high speed counter reached its high preset of 350 indicates that the holding area reached maximum capacity it would energize 0 0 0 shutt
238. initialize it Building a network begins when the initiator that claimed the token tries to pass the token to the successor node If the attempt to pass the token fails or if the initiator has no established successor for example when it powers up it begins a linear search for a successor starting with the node above it in the addressing When the initiator finds another active initiator it passes the token to that node which repeats the process until the token is passed all the way around the network to the first node At this point the network is in a state of normal operation Devices that use the DH 485 Network D 12 In addition to the Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers the devices shown in the following table also support the DH 485 network Note You cannot connect the Hand Held Programmer 1761 HHP B30 to the AIC Understanding the Communication Protocols Catalog Description Mound Function Publication Number Requirement 1747 L511 L514 L524 E39 ue SLC 500 These processors support a variety of I O L532 L541 SLC Chassis e p pporta variety 1747 6 2 1542 Processors requirements and functionality L543 L551 L552 L553 Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to foreign 1746 6 1 BASIC devices Program in BASIC to interface the 3 channels IT4G BAS Module SLC Chassis 2 RS232 and 1 DH 485 to printers modems or t
239. instruction major error occurs In applications where a math overflow or divide by zero occurs you can avoid a controller fault by using an unlatch OTU instruction with address S 5 0 in your program The rung must be between the overflow point and the END or TND statement Changes to the Math Register S 13 and S 14 9 14 Move and logical instructions do not affect the math register Using Data Handling Instructions Move MOV mor This output instruction moves the source data to the destination location As long as fence the rung remains true the instruction moves the data each scan Execution Times usec when True False 25 05 6 78 Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction te E E i o2 fe n e Source is the address or constant of the data you want to move Destination is the address where the instruction moves the data If you wish to move one word of data without affecting the math flags use a copy COP instruction with a length of 1 word instead of the MOV instruction Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C always resets S 0 1 Overflow V always resets S 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets S 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative most significant bit is set otherwise resets 9 15 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Mas
240. ion including SD499 ordering instructions Also indicates whether the documents Allen Bradley Publication Index are available on CD ROM or in multi languages A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations Allen Bradley Industrial Automation AG 7 1 Glossary Information on understanding and applying MicroLogix 1761 MMB 1000 controllers MicroMentor P4 Preface Common Techniques Used in this Manual The following conventions are used throughout this manual e Bulleted lists such as this one provide information not procedural steps e Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information e Italic type is used for emphasis Allen Bradley Support Allen Bradley offers support services worldwide with over 75 Sales Support Offices 512 authorized Distributors and 260 authorized Systems Integrators located throughout the United States alone plus Allen Bradley representatives in every major country in the world Local Product Support Contact your local Allen Bradley representative for sales and order support product technical training warranty support support service agreements Technical Product Assistance If you need to contact Allen Bradley for technical assistance please review the information in the Troubleshooting chapter first Then call your local Allen Bradley representative P 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Your Questions or Comment
241. ire and foil shield must be grounded at one end of the cable Do not earth ground the drain wire and foil shield at both ends of the cable Foil Shield Insulation Black Wire Drain Wire Clear Wire 2 22 Wiring Your Controller Wiring Your Analog Channels Analog input circuits can monitor current and voltage signals and convert them to serial digital data The analog output can support either a voltage or a current function ensor V Voltage o z o Ln G I ensor 1 Current Sensor 4 1 Current ensor V Voltage Jumper unused inputs TA INO SHD V IA TA v 0 IA 2 SHD 9 IN3 TA 9 0 VAC NOT OA OA0 OAO OA voc Of 05 Of Of USED SHD Vu ie You can configure either voltage or current output operation For increased noise immunity connect a ground wire directly from the shield terminals to chassis ground Important The controller does not provide loop power for analog inputs Use a power supply that matches the transmitter specifications Controller IA O 3 IA ransmitter 3 Wire Transmitter Signal Controller Power IA O 3 Supply C5 4 Wire Transmitter 2 23 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Analog Voltage and Current Input and Output Ranges Analog Voltage Input Range 24V de 10 5V de 10 5V de 24V de Underrange Operating Range Overrange
242. irect SUB Subtract source A immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 76 f min indexed direct f max source B immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max SUS Suspend suspend ID immediate 32 768 32 767 TND Temporary End Not Applicable TOD Convert to source direct indexed O I SB T C R N BCD direct D Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses C 13 o o en ch i o _ tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual e Instruction Valid Addressing T Instruction Description Parameters Mode s Valid File Types Valid Value Ranges destination direct O S B T C R N Not Applicable TOF Timer Off timer direct T element level Not Applicable Delay time base immediate 0 01 or 1 00 preset contained in the 0 32 767 timer register accum contained in the 0 32 767 timer register TON Timer On timer direct T element level Not Applicable Delay time base immediate 0 01 or 1 00 preset contained in the 0 32 767 timer register accum contained in the 0 32 767 timer register XIC Examine if source bit direct O I SB LC RN Not Applicable Closed bit level XIO Examine if source bit direct O I S B T C R N Not Applicable Open bit level XOR Exclusive OR address A immediate direct O I S B T C R N 32 768 32
243. is restored when execution resumes B 22 Programming Reference Address Bit Classification Description S 15L DF1 Node Status This byte value contains the node address of your Address processor on the DF1 link It is used when executing Message MSG instructions over the DF1 link The default node address of a processor is 1 Valid node addresses are 0 254 To change a processor node address you must use a programming device S 15H DF1 Baud Rate Status The controller baud rate options are 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 default 19200 38400 To change the baud rate from the default value you must use a programming device S 16L DH 485 Node Status This byte value contains the node address of your Address processor on the DH 485 link Each device on the DH 485 link must have a unique address between the decimal values 1 31 To change a processor node address you must use a programming device 16H DH 485 Baud Status NA Rate 8 17 to S 21 Reserved NA NA B 23 o o es LU t o _ tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Address Bit Classification Description S 22 Maximum Observed Scan Time Dynamic Configuration This word indicates the maximum observed interval between consecutive program cycles This value indicates in 10 ms increments the time elapsed in the longest program cycle of the controller Refer to S 3L for mo
244. iscrete only Note that the Target Node has not yet examined the MSG packet to see if it understands your request It is replying to the initial connection At the next end of scan the EW bit is cleared 0 and the ST bit is set 1 Once the ST bit is set the processor will wait indefinitely for a reply from the Target Node The Target Node is not required to respond within any given time frame During this time no other MSG instruction will be serviced Note If the Target Node faults or power cycles during the time frame after the ST bit is set and before the reply is returned you will never receive a reply No other MSG instructions will be able to be serviced unless this MSG is terminated in error using the TO bit This is why it is recommended you use a timer in conjunction with the TO bit to clear any pending instructions When the TO bit is set 1 it clears pending messages Typically message transactions are completed within a couple of seconds It is up to the programmer to determine how long to wait before clearing the buffer and then re transmitting e2 E E E 5 fe n Step 4 is not shown in the timing diagram If you do not receive an ACK step 3 does not occur Instead a NAK no acknowledge or no response at all is received When this happens the ST bit remains clear A NAK indicates amp the Target Node is too busy or it received a MSG packet with a bad checksum No response indicates
245. ister S 13 and S 14 Execution Times If the integer value you enter is negative the sign is ignored and the conversion occurs usec when as if the number was positive True False 97 49 64 678 E z z Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits o With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C always resets 0 1 Overflow V sets if the BCD result is larger than 9999 On overflow the minor error flag is also set 0 2 Zero Z sets if destination value is zero 0 3 Sign S sets if the source word is negative otherwise resets Changes to the Math Register Contains the 5 digit BCD result of the conversion This result is valid at overflow Note To convert numbers larger than 9999 decimal the destination must be the Math Register S 13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S 5 0 to prevent an error 9 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Example The integer value 9760 stored at N7 3 is converted to BCD and the BCD equivalent is stored in N7 0 The maximum BCD value is 9999 MPS displays the destination value in BCD format MSB MSB Y Y N7 3 Decimal 0010 0110 0010 0000 N7 0 4 digit BED 1001 0111 0110 0000 Convert from BCD FRD Use this instruction to convert BCD values to integer values The source parameter can be a word address in a data file or it can be the math register S 13 The destination must be a word address Execution Ti
246. it S 5 10 The first pass bit S 1 15 and the STE instruction in rung 0 are included to insure that the STI function is initialized following a power cycle You should include this rung any time your program contains an STD STE zone or an STD instruction Using Application Specific Instructions Program File 3 8 1 STE 0 SELECTABLE TIMED ENAHLE 1 E eee 5 STD 6 SELECTABLE TIMED DISABLE z 7 STI interrupt pes execution does not 8 9 SW 2 an 9 Oo 10 11 STE 12 SELECTABLE TIMED ENABLE 13 R 14 15 16 17 11 21 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Selectable Timed Start STS Use the STS instruction to condition the start of the STI timer upon entering the REM Run mode rather than starting automatically You can also use it to set up or change setpoint frequency of the STI routine that will be executed when the STI timer expires Execution Times P usec when TE This instruction is not required to configure a basic STI interrupt application True False 24 59 6 78 The STS instruction requires you to enter the parameter for the STI setpoint Upon a true execution of the rung this instruction enters the setpoint in the status file 8 30 overwriting the existing data At the same time the STI timer is reset and begins timing at timeout the STI subroutine execution occurs When the rung goes f
247. ith sufficient slack to prevent strain on the connector Allow enough extra cable to prevent chafing and kinking in the cable Use these instructions for wiring the Belden 3106A or 9842 cable If you are using standard Allen Bradley cables see the Cable Selection Guide starting on page 3 12 3 7 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH 485 Connector Note A daisy chained network is recommended We do not recommend the following A daisy chained network is recommended We do not recommend the following Belden Belden Belden 3106A or 3106A or 3106A or 9842 9842 9842 A x M Connector Connector Connector Incorrect Single Cable Connection Orange with White Stripes 6 Te White with Orange Stripes 5A 4B To Shrink Tubing jeld Recommended 1 Chassis Ground Drain Wire Blue 3106A or Blue with White Stripes 9842 Multiple Cable Connection to Previous Device to Successive Device 3 8 Connecting the System The table below shows connections for Belden 3106A For this Wire Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal a Shield Drain Non jacketed Terminal 2 Shield G Blue Blue Terminal 3 Common E A White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 Data B White Orange I Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A The table below shows connections for Belden 9842 For this Wi
248. ked Move MVM The MVM instruction is a word instruction that moves data from a source location to a destination and allows portions of the destination data to be masked by a separate word As long as the rung remains true the instruction moves the data each scan Execution Times usec when True False 33 28 6 78 Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Source is the address of the data you want to move e Mask is the address of the mask through which the instruction moves data the mask can be a hex value constant Destination is the address where the instruction moves the data Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C always resets 0 1 Overflow V always resets 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative otherwise resets 9 16 Using Data Handling Instructions Operation When the rung containing this instruction is true data at the source address passes through the mask to the destination address See the following figure B3 2 before move 1111111111111111 source B3 0 0101010101010101 D pu Oo re un Mask FOFO 1111000011110000 B3 2 after move 0101111101011111 Mask data by setting bits in the mask to zero pass data by setting bits in the mask to one The mask can
249. lared In applications where a math overflow or divide by zero occurs you can avoid a controller fault by using an unlatch OTU instruction with address S 5 0 in your program The rung must be between the overflow point and the END or TND statement Changes to the Math Register S 13 and S 14 Status word S 13 contains the least significant word of the 32 bit values of the MUL and DDV instructions It contains the remainder for DIV and DDV instructions It also contains the first four BCD digits for the Convert from BCD FRD and Convert to BCD TOD instructions e2 E E E 2 fe n Status word S 14 contains the most significant word of the 32 bit values of the MUL and DDV instructions It contains the unrounded quotient for DIV and DDV instructions It also contains the most significant digit digit 5 for TOD and FRD instructions 8 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual rs Use the ADD instruction to add one value source A to another value source B and Source A place the result in the destination Source A and B can either be a word address or Source B constant Dest Execution Times usec when True False 33 09 6 78 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C sets if carry is generated otherwise resets S 0 1 Overflow V sets if overflow is detected at destination otherwise resets On overflow the minor error
250. lated over the life of the current drill bit If the bit has drilled between 100 000 101 999 1 4 in increments of paper the change drill light illuminates steadily When the value is between 102 000 103 999 the changed drill light flashes at a 1 28 seconds rate When the value reaches 105 000 the change drill light flashes and the Change drill now light illuminates 1 4 in 100 000 Thousands 1 4 in increments have occurred GEQ B3 GRTR THAN OR EQUAL Source A N7 11 16 0 Source B 100 Ecl cantu 1 4 dg 102 000 Thousands 1 4 in increments have occurred E 12 Application Example Programs EGEQ 2 2 45 B3 4 4GRTR THAN OR EQUAL Source A N7 11 17 0 Source B 102 e Peles See Eee 1 4 in change Thousands drill bit NOW 9 GEQ 0 0 GRTR THAN OR EQUAL Source A N7 11 6 0 Source B 105 SEE SAR eec oec 100 000 102 000 change 1 4 in 1 4 in drill increments increments bit have have soon occurred occurred B3 B3 O 0 ECYSGSMURSEHALIU eee peee ES faser saa NER 16 17 4 100 000 102 000 1 28 1 4 in 1 4 in second increments increments free have have running occurred occurred clock bit B3 B3 S 4 Perales SRR eS aa eesse sees JU Passe aes P sss 16 17 7 The branch
251. le direct MSG Message read write immediate 0 read 1 write target device immediate 2 500CPU 4 485CIF control block direct N Not Applicable control block immediate 7 length local address direct O I S B T C R N Not Applicable target node contained in the 0 254 for DF1 control register 0 31 for DH 485 target address direct O I S B T C R N 0 255 message T C R 1 13 length Il O S B N 1 41 MUL Multiply source A immediate direct O 1 S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max source B immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct MVM Masked Move source direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct source mask immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct D Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses C 9 o o en ch i o _ tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual nee Instruction Valid Addressing Instruction Description Parameters Mode s Valid File Types Valid Value Ranges NEG Negate source direct indexed O I SB T C R N Not Applicable direct destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N No
252. le count sequencers each time that the low preset is reached low preset has been set to zero to cause an interrupt to occur each time that a The reset occurs The low preset is reached anytime that a reset C5 0 or hardware reset occurs This ensures that the first preset value is loaded into the high Speed counter at each entry into the REM Run mode and each time that the external reset signal is activated interrupt occurred due to low preset reached 3 hole preset Sequencer R6 4 pene RES 5 hole preset sequencer R6 5 RES 7 hole preset sequencer R6 6 RES 4 Application Example Programs Rung 4 19 Keeps track of the hole number that is being drilled and loads the correct high speed counter preset based on the hole count This rung is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 3 hole position The sequencer uses step 0 as a null step upon reset If uses the last step as a go forever in anticipation of the end of manual hard wired external reset hole hole 3 hole selector selector preset switch switch sequencer bit 0 bit 1 sett V RSTA je Peeitseeeseteee sees ene SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN 9 10 File N7 50 DN Mask FFFF Dest N7 1 Control R6 4 Length 5 Position 0 force the sequencer to increment on next scan R6 4 geecequ eseesee AeIe Ie EN Rung 4 2 Is identical to the previous rung excep
253. lied when the low preset is reached The final output states are determined by applying the output source over the mask and updating only the unmasked outputs those with a 1 in the mask bit pattern You can always change the state of the outputs via the user program or programming device regardless of the output mask The high speed counter only modifies selected outputs and output image bits based on source and mask bit patterns when the presets are reached The last device that changes the output image i e user program or high speed counter determines the actual output pattern 12 19 e2 E E E 5 fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 12 20 ATTENTION Forces override any output control from either the high speed counter or from the output image Forces may also be applied to the high sped counter inputs Forced inputs are recognized by the high speed counter e g a forced count input off and on increments the high speed accumulator The high speed counter hardware is updated immediately when the HSL instruction is executed regardless of high speed counter type Up Counter or Bidirectional Counter For the Up Counters the last two registers are ignored since the low preset does not apply If a fault occurs due to the HSL instruction the HSL parameters are not loaded to the high speed counter hardware You can use more than one HSL instruction in your program The HSL instructions can
254. ll retries have been exhausted Using the error bit to reset the MSG is primarily used to stop the MSG instruction from being totally locked out MSG Done MSG Enabled N7 50 N7 50 gt 13 15 MSG Error N7 50 L 12 This rung is used to set up the report by exception operation This move command updates N7 10 by making it identical to I 1 0 When the processor starts a new scan sequence when rung 2 0 is scanned it updates reads the input image If an input has changed from the previous scan the NEQ instruction will be true and MSG will be processed The MSG Enabled bit ensures that the MOV will not be processed until after the MSG is successfully completed This minimizes the chances that input changes are missed during MSG operation DH 485 Comms MSG Active Active Enabled 8 0 8 1 N7 50 MOV 1 1 MOVE 11 7 15 Move I 1 0 0 Dest N7 10 0 END Using the Message Instruction Example 3 Application example 3 involves a MicroLogix 1000 controller and an SLC 5 01 processor communicating on a DH 485 network Interlocking is provided to verify data transfer and to shut down both processors if communication fails A temperature sensing device connected as an input to the MicroLogix 1000 controller controls the on off operation of a cooling fan connected as an output to the SLC 5 01 processor The MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 5 01 ladder programs are explained on the foll
255. ller download Data is transferred from a programming or storage device to another device DTE Data Terminal Equipment Equipment that is attached to a network to send or receive data or both EMI Electromagnetic interference encoder 1 A rotary device that transmits position information 2 A device that transmits a fixed number of pulses for each revolution false The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung FIFO First In First Out The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file file A collection of information organized into one group Glossary full duplex A bidirectional mode of communication where data may be transmitted and received simultaneously contrast with half duplex half duplex A communication link in which data transmission is limited to one direction at a time hard disk A storage area in a personal computer that may be used to save processor files and reports for future use high byte Bits 8 15 of a word input device A device such as a push button or a switch that supplies signals through input circuits to the controller inrush current The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized instruction A mnemonic and data address defining an operation to be performed by the processor A rung in a program consists of a set of input and output instructions The input instructions are eva
256. ller system for the System DF1 protocol or DH 485 network Provides an overview of principles of machine control a 4 Ri MU section on file organization and addressing and a program development model Provides information on I O image file format I O 5 Using Analog configuration input filter and update times and conversion of analog data 6 Using Basic Describes how to use ladder logic instructions for relay Instructions replacement functions counting and timing 7 Using Comparison Describes how to use the instructions to compare values of Instructions data in your ladder logic program Using Math Describes how to use the ladder logic instructions that Programming 8 Instructions perform basic math functions Describes how to perform data handling instructions 9 E ene SANNING including move and logical instructions and FIFO and LIFO instructions 10 Using Program Flow Describes the ladder logic instructions that affect program Control Instructions flow and execution T Using Application Describes the bit shift sequencer and STI related Specific Instructions instructions 12 Using High Speed Describes the four modes of the high speed counter and its Counter Instructions related instructions Provides a general overview of the types of communication 13 eee and explains how to establish network communication using the message instruction P 2 Preface Tab Chapter Title Contents Troubl
257. loading the status registers the interrupt starts timing from the end of the program scan in which the status registers were loaded 8 31 to S 32 Reserved NA NA B 24 Programming Reference Instruction Execution Times and Memory Usage The table below lists the execution times and memory usage for the controller instructions Any instruction that takes longer than 15 us true or false execution time to execute performs a poll for user interrupts False Execution True Execution Mnemonic Time approx Time approx Memory Usage Name Instruction Type user words useconds useconds ADD 6 78 33 09 1 50 Add Math AND 6 78 34 00 1 50 And Data Handling BSL 19 80 53 71 5 24 x 2 00 Bit Shift Left Application Specific position value BSR 19 80 53 34 3 98 x 2 00 Bit Shift Right Application Specific position value CLR 4 25 20 80 1 00 Clear Math COP 6 60 27 31 5 06 1 50 File Copy Data Handling word CTD 27 22 32 19 1 00 Count Down Basic CTU 26 67 29 84 1 00 Count Up Basic DCD 6 78 27 67 1 50 Decode 4 to 1 of Data Handling 16 DDV 6 78 157 06 1 00 Double Divide Math DIV 6 78 147 87 1 50 Divide Math ENC 6 78 54 80 1 50 Encode 1 of 16 to Data Handling 4 EQU 6 60 21 52 1 50 Equal Comparison FFL 33 67 61 13 1 50 FIFO Load Data Handling FFU 34 90 73 78 4 34 x 1 50 FIFO Unload Data Handling position value FLL 6 60 26 86 3 62 1 50 Fill File Data Handling word
258. luated by the controller as being true or false In turn the controller sets the output instructions to true or false instruction set The set of general purpose instructions available with a given controller I O Inputs and Outputs Consists of input and output devices that provide and or receive data from the controller jump Change in normal sequence of program execution by executing an instruction that alters the program counter sometimes called a branch In ladder programs a JUMP JMP instruction causes execution to jump to a labeled rung ladder logic A program written in a format resembling a ladder like diagram The program is used by a programmable controller to control devices least significant bit LSB The digit or bit in a binary word code that carries the smallest value of weight For the analog controllers 16 bit two s complement binary codes are used in the I O image in the card LED Light Emitting Diode Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and outputs G 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual G 4 LIFO Last In First Out The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file low byte Bits 0 7 of a word logic A process of solving complex problems through the repeated use of simple functions that can be either true or false General term for digital circuits and programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational
259. lue bit BCD input value S 1 TEQU FPRD EQUAL FROM BCD 15 Source A N7 13 Source N7 14 0 0000 Fey Source B N7 14 Dest N7 12 c 0 0 He SSS Ses eS So sao POSS SSS SS pecs SSS Ss e Math Math Overflow Error Bit Bit S 0 S 5 e a ON e Upsecas eos o 1 0 this a scan s BCD input value MOV a a ATE MOVE Source N7 14 0 Dest N7 13 0 Pies SSS SS SS SS Sees ese MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 7 4 This rung ensures that the operator cannot select a paper thickness of 0 this were allowed the drill bit life calculation could be defeated poor quality holes due to a dull drill bit thickness that is used to calculate drill bit wear is 1 4 debounced BCD value EQU EQUAL Source A N7 12 0 Source B 0 Therefore debounced BCD value MOV MOVE Source 1 Dest N7 12 0 If resulting in the minimum paper Using Program Flow Control Instructions 1 0 Using Program Flow Control Instructions This chapter contains general information about the program flow instructions and explains how they function in your application program Each of the instructions includes information on e what the instruction symbol looks like typical execution time for the instruction
260. m In no event will Allen Bradley Company be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use of application of this information The illustrations charts and examples shown in this appendix are intended solely to illustrate the principles of the controller and some of the methods used to apply them Particularly because of the many requirements associated with any particular installation Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based upon the illustrative uses and applications o o es LU t o _ tc E 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Paper Drilling Machine Application Example E 2 For a detailed explanation of e XIC XIO OTE RES OTU OTL and OSR instructions see chapter 6 e EQU and GEQ instructions see chapter 7 CLR ADD and SUB instructions see chapter 8 MOV and FRD instructions see chapter 9 e JSR and RET instructions see chapter 10 INT and SQO instructions see chapter 11 HSC HSL and RAC instructions see chapter 12 Application Example Programs This machine can drill 3 different hole patterns into bound manuals The program tracks drill wear and signals the operator that the bit needs replacement The machine shuts down if the signal is ignored by the operator OPERATOR PANEL Start I 1 6 Stop I 1 7 XX XX Change Drill Soon Change Drill Now 0 34 3 6 Thumbwheel for Thickn
261. m Bar Middle Bit Color Select Word E 38 Application Example Programs Rung 2 3 When the part carrier actuates the SHIFT LIMIT SWITCH three things happen in this rung 1 the color of the previously painted part is unloaded from the FIFO to make room for the color of the new part 2 the color of the new part is loaded into the FIFO 3 the presence or absence of a part on the part carrier is shifted into the Shift Register Shift Unload color Limit of previously Switch painted part I 0 FFU FIFO UNLOAD EU 0 FIFO N7 0 DN Dest N7 10 EM Control R6 0 Length 4 Position 4 Hea AS Ses at SR PSS Load color of new part TXEB eeAexee RB eee FIFO LOAD EU Source N7 4 DN FIFO N7 0 EM Control R6 0 Length 4 Position 4 HSS eS SSA Ass cS ess Load the presence of the new part FBSDs er NEAR BIT SHIFT LEFT EU File B3 0 DN Control R6 1 Bit Address 4 Length 4 FE NESSER Rung 2 4 If there is a part on the part carrier now entering the spraying area energize the paint sprayer If there is not a part on the part carrier do not energize the sprayer so you can save paint BSL Spray E position 4 Enable c B3 0 0 SSS ils A A a rd r fade rss esate ce ea Cesena 3 3 tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 2 5 Decodes color select word If N7 0 1 t
262. m instruction notifies the application if the interlock bit N7 0 0 remains set for more than 4 seconds MSG instruction status bits 13 DN 15 EN Program File 2 of SLC 5 01 Processor at Node 3 Using the Message Instruction Bit 0 of the message ol ft NU lt I word This is the interlock ad 15 0 bit First Pass Bt lt T4 0 RES TON f 1 TINERSONADELAT EN 4 second Timer Timer T4 0 Time Base 0 01 L DN Preset 400 Accum 0 T4 0 B3 Latch Instruction This 2 E n alarm notifies the DN 10 application if the interlock bit N7 0 0 is not set after 4 N7 0 B3 B3 seconds 3 E OSR gt 0 0 1 B3 N7 0 4 J t U 1 0 Bit 1 of the message word T4 0 Used for fan control NI RES O 1 0 energizes cooling E Y fan N7 0 0 1 0 5 1 t 1 0 6 JEND Operation Notes SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 01 programs Message instruction parameters N7 0 is the message word Itis the target file address SLC 5 01 processor and the local source and destination addresses SLC 5 02 processor in the message instructions N7 0 0 of the message word is the interlock bit it is written to the 5 01 processor as a 1 set and read from SLC 5 01 processor as a 0 reset N7 0 1 of the message word controls cooling fan operation it is written to the SLC 5 01 processor as a 1 set if cooling is required or as a 0 reset if cooling is not required Itis read from the SLC 5 01 pro
263. mes usec when True False 49 64 6 78 Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C always resets 9 4 Using Data Handling Instructions With this Bit The Controller S 0 1 Overflow V sets if non BCD value is contained at the source or the value to be converted is greater than 32 767 otherwise reset On overflow the minor error flag is also set S 0 2 Zero Z sets if destination value is zero S 0 3 Sign S always resets Note Always provide ladder logic filtering of all BCD input devices prior to performing the FRD instruction The slightest difference in point to point input filter delay can cause the FRD instruction to overflow due to e the conversion of a non BCD digit 8 1 EQU FRD i E 4 EQUAL FROM BCD E ou 15 Source A N7 1 Source I 0 0 o 0 0 o Source B I 0 0 Dest N7 2 0 0 MOV MOVE Source I 0 0 0 Dest N7 1 0 The two rungs shown cause the controller to verify that the value I 0 remains the same for two consecutive scans before it will execute the FRD This prevents the FRD from converting a non BCD value during an input value change Note To convert numbers larger than 9999 BCD the source must be the Math Register S 13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S 5 0 to prevent an error 9 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Ex
264. mple described in appendix E You will be adding to the main program in file 2 The new rungs are needed to call the other subroutines containing the logic necessary to run the machine Rung 2 5 This rung calls the drill sequence subroutine This subroutine manages the operation of a drilling sequence and restarts the conveyor upon completion of the drilling sequence JSR SAS aea a A L SE JUMP TO SUBROUTINE SBR file number 6 Rung 2 6 This rung calls the subroutine that tracks the amount of wear on the current drill bit PUSR SSe cose os SSeS M MH JUMP TO SUBROUTINE SBR file number 7 10 10 Using Application Specific Instructions 1 1 Using Application Specific Instructions This chapter contains general information about the application specific instructions and explains how they function in your application program Each of the instructions includes information on e what the instruction symbol looks like typical execution time for the instruction how to use the instruction In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling machine that shows the application specific instructions in use Application Specific Instructions Instruction Purpose Page Mnemonic Name BSLand Bit Shift Left and Loads a bit of data into a
265. mulator is loaded with a value less than or equal to the hardware low preset or the hardware low preset is loaded with a value that is greater than or equal to the hardware accumulator 12 11 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual When the low preset is reached the e LP bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file program file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IL bit is set and the IH IV and IN bits are reset An overflow occurs when the hardware accumulator transitions from 32 767 to 32 768 When an overflow occurs the OV bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file program file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IV bit is set and the IH IL and IN bits are reset An underflow occurs when the hardware accumulator transitions from 32 768 to 432 767 When an underflow occurs the e UN bit is set e High speed counter interrupt file program file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled The IN bit is set and the IH IL and IV bits are reset The following tables summarize what the input state must be for the corresponding high speed counter action to occur Bidirectional Counter Pulse direction 12 12 Input State dapur Input InputHold Be ies one Input Count I 0 aie Reset 1 2 1 3 HSC Rung u Turning Off to On Off NA NA True Count Up Turning Off to On On NA NA True Count Down NA NA NA NA False Hold Count ot On or Tu
266. multipoint topology using half duplex radio modems configure the MicroLogix 1000 controllers for DF1 half duplex slave protocol If these radio modems require RTS CTS handshaking configure the control line parameter to Half Duplex Modem Line drivers also called short haul modems do not actually modulate the serial data but rather condition the electrical signals to operate reliably over long transmission distances up to several miles Allen Bradley s AIC Advanced Interface Converter is a line driver that converts an RS 232 electrical signal into an RS 485 electrical signal increasing the signal transmission distance from 50 to 4000 feet In a point to point line driver topology configure the MicroLogix 1000 controller for DF1 full duplex protocol as long as the line drivers do not require DTR or RTS to be high in order to operate In a point to multipoint line driver topology configure the MicroLogix 1000 controllers for DF1 half duplex slave protocol If these line drivers require RTS CTS handshaking configure the control line parameter to Half Duplex Modem DH 485 Communication Protocol D 10 The information in this section describes the DH 485 network functions network architecture and performance characteristics It will also help you plan and operate the MicroLogix 1000 on a DH 485 network Note Only Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers support
267. n Field Wiring to Logic Isolation 30V rated working 500V test 60 Hz 1s Theanalog input update rate and input resolution are a function of the input filter selection For additional information see page 5 3 Analog Output Specifications Description Specification Voltage Output Range 0 to 10V dc 1LSB Current Output Range 4 to 20 mA 1LSB Type of Data 16 bit signed integer Non linearity 0 02 Step Response 2 5 ms at 95 Load Range Voltage Output 1K Q to Q Load Range Current Output 0 to 500Q Output Coding 4 to 20 mA 1 LSB 0 to 10Vdc 1LSB 0 to 32 767 Voltage Output Miswiring can withstand short circuit Current Output Miswiring can withstand short circuit Output Resolution 15 bit Analog Output Settling Time 3 msec maximum 8 Overall Accuracy 0 C to 55 C 1 0 of full scale o Overall Accuracy Drift 0 C to 55 C max 0 28 2 Overall Accuracy at 25 C 77 F max Current Output 0 2 tc Field Wiring to Logic Isolation 30V rated working 500V isolation A 8 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Input Filter Response Times Discrete The input filter response time is the time from when the external input voltage reaches an on or off state to when the micro controller recognizes that change of state The higher you set the response time the longer it takes for the input state change to reach the micro controller However setting hi
268. nd Idle mode is in effect This pinpoints the condition in the application that caused the Suspend Idle mode This value is not cleared by the control Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting or as runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors 8 8 to 12 Reserved NA NA 8 13 and S 14 Math Register Status Use this double register to produce 32 bit signed divide and multiply operations precision divide or double divide operations and 5 digit BCD conversions These two words are used in conjuction with the MUL DIV DDV FRD and TOD math instructions The math register value is assessed upon execution of the instruction and remains valid until the next MUL DIV DDV FRD or TOD instruction is executed in the user program An explanation of how the math register operates is included with the instruction definitions If you store 32 bit signed data values you must manage this data type without the aid of an assigned 32 bit data type For example combine B3 0 and B3 1 to create a 32 bit signed data value We recommend that you start all 32 bit values on an even or odd word boundary for ease of application and viewing Also we recommend that you design document and view the contents of 32 bit signed data in either the hexadecimal or binary radix When an STI high speed counter or Faults Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of the math register
269. ne RAC instruction per program referencing the same source or different sources Using High Speed Counter Instructions High Speed Counter Interrupt Enable HSE and Disable HSD HSE These instructions enable or disable a high speed counter interrupt when a high COUNTER cs 0 preset low preset overflow or underflow is reached Use the HSD and HSE in pairs to provide accurate execution for your application nep The Counter referenced by these instructions have the same address as the HSC EE 5 0 instruction counter and is fixed at C5 0 Execution Times 2 usec when True False Iz HSE 10 00 7 00 S HSD8 00 7 00 a n Using HSE Operation When the high speed counter interrupt is enabled user subroutine program file 4 is executed when e A high or low preset is reached An overflow or underflow occurs When in Test Single Scan mode and in an idle condition the high speed counter interrupt is held off until the next scan trigger is received from the programming device The high speed counter accumulator counts while idle If the HSE is subsequently executed after the pending bit is set the interrupt is executed immediately The default state of the high speed counter interrupt is enabled the IE bit is set to 1 12 23 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using HSD Operation If the high speed counter interrupt routine is executing and another high sp
270. ng Action Turning Off to On NA Off On or Off True Count Up Turning Off NA NA Off On or On NA Hold Count Turning Off NA NA Off On or NA False Hold Count Turning Off Off On or Turning NA Off On or NA NA Hold Count Off Turning Off NA NA Turning On NA NA Reset to 0 NA Not Applicable Using the Bidirectional Counter and the Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold 12 10 Bidirectional counters are used when the parameter being measured can either increment or decrement For example a package entering and leaving a storage bin is counted to regulate flow through the area The Bidirectional Counters operate identically except for the operation of inputs 1 and 0 For the Pulse and Direction type input 0 provides the pulse and input 1 provides the direction For the Up and Down type input 0 provides the Up count and input provides the Down count Both types are available with and without reset and hold Refer to page 12 7 for more information regarding Bidirectional Counter types For the Bidirectional Counters both high and low presets are used The low preset value must be less than the high preset value or an error INVALID PRESETs LOADED TO HIGH SPEED COUNTER 37H occurs Bidirectional Counters operate in the 32 768 to 32 767 range inclusive and can be reset to zero using the Reset RES instruction Using High Speed Counter Instructions Operation When the HSC instruction is first
271. ng Machine Application ExaITiple 4 reped depu Ep a ER OR BS a ee eS eee ER RE 12 29 13 Using the Message Instruction Types of Communication 0 00 eee 13 2 Message Instruction MSG ssosseesrer reser re cee eee 13 3 Timing Diagram for a Successful MSG Instruction 13 8 MSG Instruction Error CodeS 0 00 eee ee eee 13 10 Application Examples that Use the MSG Instruction 13 13 Troubleshooting 14 Troubleshooting Your System Understanding the Controller LED Status 14 2 Controller Error Recovery Model 00 eee eae eee 14 5 Identifying Controller Faults llli 14 6 Calling Allen Bradley for Assistance annann ers ser rer rt 14 11 toc v MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual toc vi Reference Hardware Reference Controller Specifications 0 0 rer reser rr eee A 2 Controller Dimensions l l A 11 Replacement Parts 2 4 2524 esse reser e rr rr rr rr ee eed v A 12 Programming Reference Controller Status File veia RR ERRARE Bees aes Xx B 1 Instruction Execution Times and Memory Usage B 25 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters Available File Types essc m RR dae ea tbeeiaes C 2 Available Addressing Modes sososseeerrreeers rss ss ss ss ee C 2 Understanding the Communication Protocols RS 232 Communication Interface ssooseseserreerrer rer rer rr ee D 1 DF1 F
272. ng X Instruction Description Parameters Mode s Valid File Types Valid Value Ranges length contained in the 0 2048 control register CLR Clear destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct COP Copy File source indexed direct O I S B T C R N Not Applicable destination indexed direct O I S B T C R N Not Applicable length immediate 1 128 1 42 when destination is T C R CTD Count Down counter direct C element level Not Applicable preset contained in the 32 768 32 767 counter register accum contained in the 32 768 32 767 counter register CTU Count Up counter direct C element level Not Applicable preset contained in the 32 768 32 767 counter register accum contained in the 32 768 32 767 counter register DCD Decode 4to1 source direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable of 16 direct destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct DDV Double Divide source immediate direct O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 indexed direct destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct DIV Divide source A immediate direct O 1 S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max D Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses C4 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters Instruction Valid Addressing Instruction Description
273. ng Your Controller Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive ac load devices include a varistor an RC network or an Allen Bradley surge suppressor all shown below These components must be appropriately rated to suppress the switching transient characteristic of the particular inductive device See the table on page 1 10 for recommended suppressors o Lo G gt o Ln G I Surge Suppression for Inductive ac Load Devices Output Device Output Device Output Device Surge Suppressor Varistor RC Network If you connect a micro controller triac output to control an inductive load we recommend that you use varistors to suppress noise Choose a varistor that is appropriate for the application The suppressors we recommend for triac outputs when switching 120V ac inductive loads are a Harris MOV part number V175 LA10A or an Allen Bradley MOV catalog number 599 K04 or 599 KA04 Consult the varistor manufacturer s data sheet when selecting a varistor for your application For inductive de load devices a diode is suitable An 1N4004 diode is acceptable for most applications A surge suppressor can also be used See the table on page 1 10 for recommended suppressors As shown in the illustration below these surge suppression circuits connect directly across the load device This reduces arcing of the output contacts High transient can cause arcing that occurs when switching off an inductive device Surge Suppression fo
274. ng that it is in the home position Hitting the second limit switch unlatches the drill sequence start bit and causes the conveyor to move the book to the next drilling position Conveyor Operation When the start button is pressed the conveyor moves the books forward As the first book moves close to the drill the book trips a photo eye sensor This tells the machine where the leading edge of the book is Based on the position of the selector switch the conveyor moves the book until it reaches the first drilling position The drill sequence start bit is set and the first hole is drilled The drill sequence start bit is not unlatched and the conveyor moves the same book to the second drilling position The drilling process is repeated until there are the desired holes per book The machine then looks for another book to break the photo eye beam and the process is repeated The operator can change the number of drilled holes by changing the selector switch Drill Calculation and Warning E 4 The program tracks the number of holes drilled and the number of inches of material that have been drilled through using a thumbwheel The thumbwheel is set to the thickness of the book per 1 4 inch If the book is 1 1 2 inches thick the operator would set the thumbwheel to 6 When 25 000 inches have been drilled the Change Drill Soon pilot light flashes When 26 000 inches have been drilled the Change Drill Now pilot light turn on and the machine turns
275. ng the XIO XIC and other instructions For a detailed explanation of e XIC XIO and RES instruction see chapter 6 e SQO and SQC instructions see chapter 11 Event Driven Sequencer Ladder Program Rung 2 0 Ensures that the SQO always resets to step position 1 each REM Run mode entry This rung actually resets the control register s position and EN enable bit to 0 Due to this the following rung sees a false to true transition and asserts step position 1 on the first scan Eliminate this rung for retentive operation Sri R6 0 RES 15 o O c o po 2 o tc E 19 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 2 1 The SQC instruction and SQO instruction share the same Control Register This is acceptable due to the careful planning of the rungstate condition You could cascade branch many more SQO instructions below the SQO if you desired all using the same Control Register R6 0 in this case Notice that we are only comparing Inputs 0 3 and are only asserting Outputs 0 3 per our Mask value R6 0 SQC SEQUENCER COMPARE EN FD File N7 0 DN Mask 000F FD Source I 0 0 Control R6 0 Length 9 Position 2 R6 0 SQ0 SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN FD File N7 10 DN Mask 000F Dest 0 0 0 Control R6 0 Lengt
276. ng when the HSC rung is false HSL High Speed Counter Configures the low and high presets the 12 18 Load output patterns and mask bit patterns RES High Speed Counter Writes a zero to the hardware accumulator 12 21 Reset and image accumulator RAC High Speed Counter Writes the value specified to the hardware 12 22 Reset Accumulator accumulator and image accumulator HSE High Speed Counter Enables or disables execution of the high 12 23 HSD Interrupt Enable speed counter interrupt subroutine when a High Speed Counter high preset low preset overflow or Interrupt Disable underflow is reached OTE Update High Speed Provides you with real time access to the 12 24 Counter Image Accumulator hardware accumulator value by updating the image accumulator 12 1 e2 E E E i fe fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual About the High Speed Counter Instructions The high speed counter instructions used in your ladder program configure control and monitor the controllers hardware counter The hardware counter s accumulator increments or decrements in response to external input signals When the high speed counter is enabled data table counter C5 0 is used by the ladder program for monitoring the high speed counter accumulator and status The high speed counter operates independent of the controller scan When using the high speed counter make sure you adjust your input fil
277. ning Off Off On or Turning Off Off On or Off True Count Down Turning Off to On Turning Off NA NA Off On or NA False Hold Count Turning Off NA NA Off On or On NA Hold Count Turning Off Off On or Off On or Off On or NA NA Hold Count Turning Off Turning Off Turning Off NA NA Turning On NA NA Reset to 0 NA Not Applicable When up and down input pulses occur simultaneously the high speed counter counts up then down Using the Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold with a Quadrature Encoder 12 14 The Quadrature Encoder is used for determining direction of rotation and position for rotating such as a lathe The Bidirectional Counter counts the rotation of the Quadrature Encoder Bidirectional Counters operate in the 32 768 to 32 767 range inclusive and can be reset to zero using the reset RES instruction The following figure shows a quadrature encoder connected to inputs 0 1 and 2 The count direction is determined by the phase angle between A and B If A leads B the counter increments If B leads A the counter decrements The counter can be reset using the Z input The Z outputs from the encoders typically provide one pulse per revolution Using High Speed Counter Instructions Quadrature Encoder Reset input Forward Rotation Reverse Rotation sf _f LIL EA tt t E LI LI LI L cc EN EF EN Ta 13 Fx B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Iz
278. nother Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed condition must also be met before w its fully retracted position home stop button is pressed STOP Button START Drill start the conveyor the drill bit must be in This rung also stops the conveyor when the change Ma drill bit chine Button Home LS NOW Le I 0 LXO 1 Machine RUN Latch Rung 2 4 Applies the above start logic to the conveyor and drill motor Machine Drill Conveyor RUN Home LS Enable Latch B3 I 0 0 0 saddle anew eA d oM ui Rod iapht Gunde Master mun js E 0 5 5 c Drill 5 Motor ON i 0 0 g PEST is nins jessa 3 1 Xx _ This intruction accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Do not include this instruction if you are using a 16 I O controller MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 2 5 Calls the drill sequence subroutine This subroutine manages the operation of a drilling sequence and restarts the conveyor upon completion of the drilling sequence TUSR t FER ENNART SATSEN SERNER SEN JUMP TO SUBROUTINE SBR file number 6 Rung 2 6 Rung 4 0 Calls the subroutine that tracks the amount of wear on the current drill bit JUMP TO SUBROUTINE SBR file number 7 Resets the ho
279. nput channel F 2 CE mark 1 2 Index 4 channel configuration DF1 full duplex D 2 DFI half duplex D 6 Clear CLR 8 11 updates to arithmetic status bits 8 11 clearing faults 14 6 CLR Clear 8 11 Common Techniques Used in this Manual P 5 communication establishing with controller 3 19 types of 13 2 communication protocols DF1 fullduplex D 2 DFI halfduplex D 5 DH485 D 10 comparison instructions 7 1 7 2 about 7 2 Equal EQU 7 3 Greater Than GRT 7 4 Greater Than or Equal GEQ 7 4 Less Than LES 7 3 Less Than or Equal LEQ 7 4 Limit Test LIM 7 6 Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ 7 5 Not Equal NEQ 7 3 overview 7 2 indexed word addresses 7 2 connecting the system 3 1 AIC 3 10 DF1 fullduplex protocol 3 2 DH485 network 3 6 contact protection methods 1 8 contacting AllenBradley for assistance P 5 contactors bulletin 100 surge suppressors for 1 10 Contents of this Manual P 2 controller determining faults 14 2 dimensions A 11 fault messages 14 7 features 1 3 grounding 2 2 installation 1 1 mounting 1 15 mounting template A 11 operating cycle 4 3 replacement parts A 12 spacing 1 14 specifications A 2 status file B 1 troubleshooting 14 2 types 1 2 A 2 16 I O 1 2 32 T O 1 2 wiring for highspeed counter operation 2 25 recommendations 2 4 wire type 2 4 controller faults 14 2 controller operation normal 14 2 controllers analog 1 2 Convert from BCD FRD
280. nstruction Note The DN bit is a reserved bit for all other Counter options modes 3 8 12 4 Overflow Occurred Bit OV bit 12 For the Up Counters modes 1 and 2 this bit is set by the controller when the high preset is reached if the DN bit is set Tip For the Bidirectional Counters modes 3 8 the OV bit is set by the controller after the hardware accumulator transitions from 32 767 to 32 768 You can reset the bit with an OTU instruction or by executing an RAC or RES instruction for both the up and bidirectional counters Underflow Occurred Bit UN bit 11 is a reserved bit for the Up Counters modes 1 and 2 Do not write to this bit Tip For the Bidirectional Counters modes 3 8 the UN bit is set by the controller when the hardware accumulator transitions from 32768 to 32767 You can reset this bit with an OTU instruction or by executing an RAC or RES instruction Update High Speed Counter Accumulator Bit UA bit 10 is used with an OTE instruction to update the instruction image accumulator value with the hardware accumulator value The HSC instruction also performs this operation each time the rung with the HSC instruction is evaluated as true Accumulator gt High Preset Bit HP bit 9 is a reserved bit for all Up Counters modes and 2 Note Forthe Bidirectional Counters modes 3 8 if the hardware accumulator becomes greater than or equal to the high preset the HP bit is set If the hardware accumulator bec
281. nstruction Valid Addressing Instruction Description Parameters Mode s Valid File Types Valid Value Ranges FLL Fill File source direct O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f min f max destination indexed direct O I S B TL C R N Not Applicable element level length immediate 1 128 1 42 when destination is T C R FRD Convert from source direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable BCD direct destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct GEQ Greater Than source A direct indexed O I SB T C R N Not Applicable or Equal direct source B immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max GRT Greater Than source A direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct source B immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max HSC High Speed type immediate 0 7 where Counter 0 up 1 up amp reset hold 2 pulse direction 3 pule direction amp reset hold 4 up down 5 up down amp reset hold 6 encoder 7 encoder amp reset hold counter direct C5 0 C5 1 Not Applicable element level D Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses C 6 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters Wm Instruction Valid Addressing M Instruction Description Parameters Mode s Val
282. nt source input device and has its own data and diagnostic status words communication scan A part of the controller s operating cycle Communication with other devices such as software running on a personal computer takes place controller A device such as a programmable controller used to monitor input devices and control output devices G 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual G 2 controller overhead An internal portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping and set up purposes control profile The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions counter 1 An electro mechanical relay type device that counts the occurrence of some event May be pulses developed from operations such as switch closures interruptions of light beams or other discrete events 2 In controllers a software counter eliminates the need for hardware counters The software counter can be given a preset count value to count up or down whenever the counted event occurs CPU Central Processing Unit The decision making and data storage section of a programmable controller data table The part of the processor memory that contains I O values and files where data is monitored manipulated and changed for control purposes DIN rail Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus DIN standards a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting of your contro
283. nting TT bit is reset If the rung is false DN bit remains in its last state EN bit is reset ACC value remains in its last state Using Basic Instructions Counter Instructions Overview Each Counter address is made of a 3 word data file element Word 0 is the control word containing the status bits of the instruction Word 1 is the preset value Word 2 is the accumulated value The control word for counter instructions includes six status bits as indicated below 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Word Preset Value 1 Accumulator Value 2 CU Count up enable bit CD Count down enable bit DN Done bit OV Overflow bit UN Underflow bit UA Update accumulator HSC only e2 E E E i fe fe n For high speed counter instruction information see chapter 12 Entering Parameters Accumulator Value ACC This is the number of false to true transitions that have occurred since the counter was last reset Preset Value PRE Specifies the value which the counter must reach before the controller sets the done bit When the accumulator value becomes equal to or greater than the preset value the done status bitis set You can use this bit to control an output device Preset and accumulated values for counters range from 32 768 to 32 767 and are stored as signed integers Negative values are stored in two s complement form 6 15 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controller
284. ntrolling the gripper which bin to drop the part into This information is communicated by energizing three outputs that are wired to the controller s inputs Once the controller has this information it grabs the part and moves down the rail When the gripper reaches the appropriate bin it opens and the part falls into the bin The gripper then returns to the conveyor to retrieve another part E 24 Application Example Programs The position of the pick and place head is read by the controller via a 1000 line quadrature encoder wired to the controller s high speed counter inputs When the gripper is in the home position the Z pulse from the encoder resets the high speed counter The number of pulses the head needs to travel to reach each bin location is sorted in a data table starting at address N7 10 and ending at N7 17 The controller uses indexed addressing to locate the correct encoder count from the data table and load the information into the high preset of the high speed counter Pick and Place Machine Ladder Program Rung 2 0 The following 3 rungs take information from the other programmable co ntroller and r of encoder load it into the INDEX REGISTER This will be used to select the proper bin location from the table starting at N7 10 Output from barcode Index Reg T0 8 24 ssee opeeA e 2neveerAMeRICELIS eem erase ones G dx 5 0 Rung 2 1 Output from barcode Index Reg I 0 8 24 as
285. nts fal Match inputs and outputs with actions of the process QJ Add these actions to the functional specifications Do you need QJ Special interrupt routines QJ High speed counting features QJ Sequencing Operations FIFO or LIFO stack operations QJ Use worksheets if necessary to create program QJ Make sure I O addresses match correct input and output devices QJ Enter program using the programming device QJ Review your functional specification and detailed analysis for missing or incomplete information amp Monitor and if necessary troubleshoot the program that you entered Q Resulting programs should match functional specifications Using Analog 5 Using Analog This chapter describes the operation of the MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers Topics include e I O Image e I O Configuration Input Filter and Update Times e Converting Analog Data D pru Oo O sm 5 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual I O Image 5 2 The input and output image files of the MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers have the following format Address Input Image Output Image Address 1 0 0 Discrete Input Word 0 Discrete Output Word 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Discrete Input Word 1 Reserved 0 0 1 1 0 2 Reserved Reserved 0 0 2 1 0 3 Reserved Reserved 0 0 3 1 0 4 Analog Input 0 Voltage Analog Output 0 Voltage or Current 0 0 4 1 0 6 Analog Input 2 Current
286. o be encoded Only one bit of this word should be on at any one time If more than one bit in the source is set the destination bits will be set based on the least significant bit that is set If a source of zero is used all of the destination bits will be reset and the zero bit will be set Destination is the address that contains the bit encode information Bits 4 15 of the destination are reset by the ENC instruction 9 9 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits The arithmetic status bits are found in Word 0 bits 0 3 in the controller status file After an instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C always resets S 0 1 Overflow V sets if more than one bit in the source is set otherwise reset The math overflow bit S 5 0 is not set S 0 2 Zero Z sets if destination value is zero 0 3 Sign S always resets Copy File COP and Fill File FLL Instructions After a COP or FLL instruction is executed index register S 24 is cleared to zero The destination file type determines the number of words that an instruction transfers For example if the destination file type is a counter and the source file type is an integer three integer words are transferred for each element in the counter type file Execution Times usec when True False COP 2731 5 06 word 7 F
287. oduced by other equipment inside or outside the enclosure In this case place blower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to reduce hot spots near the controller Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient temperatures are encountered Note Do not bring in unfiltered outside air Place the controller in an enclosure to protect it from a corrosive atmosphere Harmful contaminants or dirt could cause improper operation or damage to components In extreme cases you may need to use air conditioning to protect against heat build up within the enclosure Controller Spacing The following figure shows the recommended minimum spacing for the controller Refer to appendix A for controller dimensions ATTENTION Explosion Hazard For Class I Division 2 applications this product must be installed in an enclosure All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means Top B Side Side A Greater than or equal to 50 8 mm 2 in E PON B Greater than or equal to 50 8 mm 2 in gt 8 A 000000 A Bottom B 1 14 Installing Your Controller Mounting the Controller This equipment is suitable for Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D or non hazardous locations only when product or packaging is marked ATTENTION Explosion Hazard o Lo G gt o I e Substitution of components may im
288. off The operator changes drill bits and then resets the internal drill wear counter by turning the Drill Change Reset keyswitch Application Example Programs Paper Drilling Machine Ladder Program Rung 2 0 Initializes the high speed counter each time the REM Run mode is entered The high speed counter data area N7 5 N7 9 corresponds with the starting address source address of the HSL instruction The HSC instruction is disabled each entry into the REM run mode until the first time that it is executed as true The high preset was pegged on initialization to prevent a high preset interrupt from occurring during the initialization process Inst Output Mask Pass only use bit O ie O 0 0 Sel MOV Stes pemeeeeeeI e eeecmcne Renee MOVE 5 Source 1 Dest N7 5 0 PHS SSeS oe Ses High Output Pattern turn off O 0 0 MOV MOVE FoF Source 0 Dest N7 6 0 peterem High Preset Value counts to next hole MOV MOVE t Source 32767 Dest N7 7 0 PSS Ci Ee aui Low Output Pattern turn on O 0 0 each reset MOV MOVE Source 1 Dest N7 8 0 PaaS Seo ASS Soe a ae num o o e LU t o _ tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Low preset value cause low preset int at reset MOV MOVE Source 0 Dest N7 9 0
289. omes less than the high preset the HP bit is reset by the controller Do not write to this bit Exception you can set or reset this bit during the initial configuration of the HSC instruction See page 12 6 for more information Accumulator lt Low Preset Bit LP bit 8 is a reserved bit for all Up Counters Using High Speed Counter Instructions Overflow Caused High Speed Counter Interrupt Bit IV bit 7 is set to identify an overflow as the cause for the execution of the high speed counter interrupt routine The IN IH and IL bits are reset by the controller when the IV bit is set Examine this bit at the start of the high speed counter interrupt routine file 4 to determine why the interrupt occurred Note For the Bidirectional Counters if the hardware accumulator becomes less than or equal to the low preset the LP bit is set by the controller If the hardware accumulator becomes greater than the low preset the LP bit is reset by the controller Do not write to this bit Exception you can set or reset this bit during the initial configuration of the HSC instruction See page 12 6 for more information Underflow Caused User Interrupt Bit IN bit 6 is set to identify an underflow as the cause for the execution of the high speed counter interrupt routine The IV TH and IL bits are reset by the controller when the IN bit is set Examine this bit at the start of the high speed counter interrupt routine file 4 to determine why
290. on 3 times each direction each axis Non operating 20g peak acceleration 1141 ms duration 3 times each direction each axis Agency Certification e C UL Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D certified when productor UL listed Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D certified ig is e CE RCM EAC compliant for all applicable directives marked Terminal Screw Torque 0 9 N m maximum 8 0 in lbs 060609020 Refer to page 1 12 for additional information on power supply inrush DC input voltage derated linearly from 30 C 30V to 26 4V DIN rail mounted controller is 1g Refer to page 1 18 for vertical mounting specifications Relays are derated an additional 2 5g on 32 pt controllers A 3 Specification 1761 L Hardware Reference Description 16AWA 20AWA 5A 32AWA 10BWA 16BWA 20BWA 5A 32BWA 32AAA 16BBB 10BWB 16BWB 20BWB 5A 32BWB 32BBB Electrostatic IEC801 2 8K V Discrete I O Discharge 4K V Contact 8k V Air for Analog I O Radiated IEC801 3 10V m 27 Hz 1000 MHz except for Susceptibility 3V m 87 MHz 108 MHz 174 MHz 230 MHz and 470 MHz 790 MHz Fast Transient IEC801 4 2K V Power Supply I O 1K V Comms Isolation eeocoo0 1500V ac DC input voltage derated linearly from 30 C 30V to 26 4V DIN rail mounted controller is 1g Refer to page 1 18 for vertical mounting specifications Input Specifications Refer
291. on about the basic instructions and explains how they function in your application program Each of the basic instructions includes information on what the instruction symbol looks like typical execution time for the instruction e c how to use the instruction i In addition the last section contains an application example for a paper drilling cot d 90 machine that shows the basic instructions in use Bit Instructions 2 o Instruction Purpose Page Mnemonic Name XIC Examine if Closed Examines a bit for an On condition 6 3 XIO Examine if Open Examines a bit for an Off condition 6 4 OTE Output Energize Turns a bit On or Off 6 4 OTL and Output Latch and OTL turns a bit on when the rung is executed 6 5 OTU Output Unlatch and this bit retains its state when the rung is not executed or a power cycle occurs OTU turns a bit off when the rung is executed and this bit retains its state when the rung is not executed or when power cycle occurs OSR One Shot Rising Triggers a one time event 6 6 6 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Timer Counter Instructions Instruction Purpose Page Mnemonic Name TON Timer On Delay Counts timebase intervals when the instruction 6 10 is true TOF Timer Off Delay Counts timebase intervals when the instruction 6 11 is false RTO Retentive Timer Counts timebase intervals when the instruction 6 1
292. on adjusting filters Using High Speed Counter Instructions Rung 4 5 Interrupt occurred due to low preset reached C5 0 RET RETURN IL erue e eter eerie iiec etii Rung 4 6 Signals the main program file 2 to initiate a drilling sequence The high speed counter has already stopped the conveyor at the correct position using its high preset output pattern data clear 0 0 0 This occurred within microseconds of the high preset being reached just prior to entering this high speed counter interrupt subroutine The drill sequence subroutine resets the drill sequence start bit and sets the conveyor drive bit 0 0 0 upon completion of the drilling sequence interrupt occurred Drill Sequence Start due to high preset reached C5 0 B3 12 33 D pru Oo O s A MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Notes 12 34 Using the Message Instruction 1 3 Using the Message Instruction This chapter contains information about communications and the message MSG instruction Specifically this chapter contains information on types of communication e what the MSG instruction symbol looks like typical execution time for the MSG instruction how to use the MSG instruction application examples and timing diagrams Note Only Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers support
293. on the network If you plan to add nodes later provide additional advanced interface converters during the initial installation to avoid recabling after the network is in operation The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219 m 4000 ft This is the total cable distance from the first node to the last node on the network o o es eh i o Y 3 tc D 15 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual D 16 Planning Cable Routes Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from electrical interference Keep the communication cable at least 1 52 m 5 ft from any electric motors transformers rectifiers generators arc welders induction furnaces or sources of microwave radiation If you must run the cable across power feed lines run the cable at right angles to the lines If you do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 15 m 6 in from ac power lines of less than 20A 0 30 m 1 ft from lines greater than 20A but only up to 100k VA and 0 60 m 2 ft from lines of 100k VA or more If you run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 08 m 3 in from ac power lines of less than 20A 0 15 m 6 in from lines greater than 20A but only up to 100k VA and 0 30 m 1 ft from lines of 100k VA or more Running the communication cable through conduit provides
294. ond because requested function is not available 07H Target node does not respond 08H Target node cannot respond 09H Local modem connection has been lost OAH Buffer unavailable to receive SRD reply OBH Target node does not accept this type of MSG instruction OCH Received a master link reset e2 E E E i fe fe n 10H Target node cannot respond because of incorrect command parameters or unsupported command 15H Local channel configuration parameter error exists 18H Broadcast Node Address 255 is not supported 1AH9 Target node cannot respond because another node is file owner has sole file access 1BH Target node cannot respond because another node is program owner has sole access to all files 37H Message timed out in local processor 39H Message was discarded due to a communication protocol switch 3AH Reply from target is invalid 50H Target node is out of memory 60H Target node cannot respond because file is protected E7H Target node cannot respond because length requested is too large EBH Target node cannot respond because target node denies access ECH Target node cannot respond because requested function is currently unavailable FAH Target node cannot respond because another node is file owner has sole file access FBH Target node cannot respond because another
295. onditionally omit the balance of your current program file or subroutines Note If you use this instruction inside a nested subroutine execution of all nested subroutines is terminated Do not execute this instruction form the user error fault routine file 3 high speed counter interrupt routine file 4 or selectable timed interrupt routine file 5 because a fault will occur Suspend SUS SUS SUSPEND Suspend ID Execution Times usec when True False 10 85 7 87 When this instruction is executed it causes the controller to enter the Suspend Idle mode and stores the Suspend ID in word 7 S 7 at the status file All outputs are de energized Use this instruction to trap and identify specific conditions for program debugging and system troubleshooting Entering Parameters Enter a suspend ID number from 32 768 to 32 767 when you program the instruction 10 8 Using Program Flow Control Instructions Immediate Input with Mask IIM IIM IMMEDIATE INPUT w MASK Slot Mask This instruction allows you to update data prior to the normal input scan Data from a specified input is transferred through a mask to the input data file making the data available to instructions following the IIM instruction in the ladder program Execution Times usec when For the mask a 1 in an input s bit position passes data from the source to the destination A 0 inhibits data f
296. one did not i exist False Resets all non retentive output instructions in the MCR zone regardless of each rung s individual input conditions 92 n MCR zones let you enable or inhibit segments of your program such as for recipe applications When you program MCR instructions note that You must end the zone with an unconditional MCR instruction e You cannot nest one MCR zone within another e Do not jump into an MCR zone If the zone is false jumping into it activates the zone Note The MCR instruction is not a substitute for a hard wired master control relay that provides emergency stop capability You still must install a hard wired master control relay to provide emergency I O power shutdown ATTENTION If you start instructions such as timers or counters in an MCR zone instruction operation ceases when the zone is disabled Re program critical operations outside the zone if necessary 10 7 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Temporary End TND TND Execution Times usec when True False 7 78 3 16 This instruction when its rung is true stops the controller from scanning the rest of the program file updates the I O and resumes scanning at rung 0 of the main program file 2 If this instruction s rung is false the controller continues the scan until the next TND instruction or the END statement Use this instruction to progressively debug a program or c
297. ong power source 3 I Set the DC Power Source selector switch to EXTERNAL before connecting the power supply to the AIC Bottom View ATTENTION Always connect the CHS GND chassis ground terminal to the nearest earth ground This connection must be made whether or not an external 24V de supply is used In normal operation with the MicroLogix 1000 programmable controller connected to port 2 of the AIC the controller powers the AIC Any AIC not connected to a controller requires a 24V de power supply The AIC requires 104 mA at 24V dc If both the controller and external power are connected to the AIC the power selection switch determines what device powers the AIC 3 17 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Power Options Below are two options for powering the AIC Use the 24V dc user power supply 200 mA maximum built into the MicroLogix controller The AIC is powered through a hard wired connection using a communication cable 1761 CBL HMO2 or equivalent connected to port 2 Use an external DC power supply with the following specifications operating voltage 24V dc 20 15 output current 200 mA maximum rated NEC D Make a hard wired connection from the external supply to the screw terminals on the bottom of the AIC ATTENTION If you use an external power supply it must be 24V dc Permanent damage will result if miswired with the wrong power source Installing and
298. onnector Port 3 cable straight D E 8 5 TEM Hu A 4 im rm 3 EI man 2 pean O Pin Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 DB 9 RS 232 1761 CBL PM02 cable DH 485 Connector 1 received line signal detector DCD same state as port 1 s DCD signal chassis ground Z received data RxD received data RxD cable shield transmitted data TxD transmitted data TxD signal ground 4 DTE ready DTR 2 DTE ready DTR DH 485 data B S signal common GRD signal common GRD DH 485 data A El DCE ready DSR DCE ready DSR termination E request to send RTS request to send RTS not applicable 8 clear to send CTS clear to send CTS not applicable 3 not applicable not applicable not applicable An 8 pin mini DIN connector is used for making connections to port 2 This connector is not commercially available If you are making a cable to connect to port 2 you must configure your cable to connect to the Allen Bradley cable shown above On por 1 pin 4 is electronically jumpered to pin 6 Whenever the AIC is powered on pin 4 will match the state of pin 6 Inthe 1761 CBL PMO2 cable pins 4 and 6 are jumpered together within the DB 9 connector Connecting the System Powering the AIC 2 ATTENTION If you use an external power supply it must be 24V dc Permanent damage will result if miswired with the wr
299. ons load words into a file and unload them in the same order as they were loaded The first word in is the first word out LIFO instructions load words into a file and unload them in the opposite order as they were loaded The last word in is the first word out Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming these instructions 97 lt Source is a word address or constant 32 768 to 32 767 that becomes the next iz value in the stack Destination Dest is a word address that stores the value that exits from the stack e2 This Instruction Unloads the Value from FIFO s FFU First word LIFO s LFU The last word entered FIFO LIFO is the address of the stack It must be an indexed word address in the bit input output or integer file Use the same FIFO address for the associated FFL and FFU instructions use the same LIFO address for the associated LFL and LFU instructions Length specifies the maximum number of words in the stack Address the length value by mnemonic LEN Position is the next available location where the instruction loads data into the stack This value changes after each load or unload operation Address the position value by mnemonic POS Control is the address of the control structure The control structure stores the status bits the stack length and the position value Do not use the control file address for any other instruction 9 23 M
300. or additional configuration options OV de 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F OV de 14V dc 30V dc 30 C 86 F Off On 1761 L10BWA Output Voltage Range OV ac 5V ac 264V ac OV de 5V dc 125V dc Operating Range 2 10 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L16BWA Wiring Diagrams Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 3 for additional configuration options 8 14 30V DC c o Lo G gt o Ln G I 24V DC 1 Loos J CM Com AA vc I vac I vac I vi l w u N f C voc O0 voc OM voc 92 ypc OB voc O4 Of 1761 L16BWA Input Voltage Range 0V dc 5V dc 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F 0V dc 5V dc 14V dc 30V dc 30 C 86 F Off On 1761 L16BWA Output Voltage Range 0V ac 5V ac 264V ac 0V dc 5V dc 125V dc Operating Range 2 11 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1761 L32BWA Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 4 for additional configuration options 14 30V DC 110 1 1 W2 143 14 1145 ge 1 7 118 9 85 267 VA j 1 A vac I vcl AC vac l vac Li LIN f ypc 00 vpc OM pc 02 O08 voc O04 OF Ol oF voc OB OM ono OM 1761 L32BWA Input Voltage Range 0V dc 5V dc 14V dc 26 4V dc 55 C 131 F 0V dc 5V dc 14V dc 30V dc 30 C 86 F Off On 1761 L32BWA Output Voltage Range 0V ac 5V ac 264V ac 0V dc 5V dc 125V dc Operating Range 2
301. owing pages D pru Oo O sm 13 15 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual I 1 0 N7 0 A 0 I E C Temperature sensing Input 5 1 Device 1 T4 0 1 p s RES 15 First Pass Bt N7 0 4H L 0 B3 U 0 TON 2 TIMER ON DELAY EN Timer T4 0 Time Base 0 01 L DN Preset 400 First Pass Bit eo Accum 0 d s1 MSG 3 3 E READ WRITE MESSAGE EN 15 Read write WRITE Target Device 500CPU L DN 8 4 Control Block N10 0 by H Control Block Length 7 CER 6 1280 ms Clock Bit E 3 B3 9 0 N10 0 MSG 4 1 READ WRITE MESSAGE Ly t Read writ READ EN 13 ead write Message Write Target Device 500CPU DN Done Bit Control Block N11 0 Control Block Length 7 ER T4 0 B3 5 1 E L DN 10 N11 0 N7 0 T4 0 6 LX E E RES Message Read T R N7 0 Done Bit U 0 B3 U 0 N11 0 U 15 N10 0 U 15 7 JEND 13 16 Operation notes appear on the following page Bit 1 or ine message wora Used for fan control Bit 0 of the message word This is the interlock bit 4 second Timer Write message instruction The source and target file addresses are N7 0 Target node 3 Message length 1 word Read message instruction The destination and target file addresses are N7 0 Target node 3 Message length 1 word Latch This alar
302. package 1761 RPL T32X Communications door 1 door per package 1761 RPL COM DIN rail latches 2 per package 1761 RPL DIN 2 00 m 6 56 ft cable DIN to DIN for use with the MicroLogix 1000 HHP 1761 CBL HM02 E Hand Held Programmer includes 1761 CBL HMO02 communication cable 1761 HHP B30 T Memory module for 1761 HHP B30 stores 1 program 1761 HHM K08 E Memory module for 1761 HHP B30 stores 8 programs 1761 HHM K64 Memory module door for 1761 HHP B30 1 door per package 1761 RPL TRM A 12 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual A 13 Programming Reference B Programming Reference This appendix lists the anterior status file instruction execution times and instruction memory usage Controller Status File The status file lets you monitor how your operating system works and lets you direct how you want it to work This is done by using the status file to set up control bits and monitor both hardware and programming device faults and other status information Note Do not write to reserved words in the status file If you intend writing to status file data it is imperative that you first understand that function fully o o es eh i o Y 3 tc B 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual B 2 The status file S contains the following words Word Function Page S 0 Arithmetic Flags
303. pair suitability for Class I Division 2 e Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting holes for your controller Drilled fragments that fall into the controller could cause damage Do not drill holes above a mounted controller if the protective wrap is removed Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off and the area is known to be non hazardous Do not connect or disconnect connectors while circuit is live unless area is known to be non hazardous This product must be installed in an enclosure All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool e For applicable equipment for example relay modules exposure to some chemicals may degrade the sealing properties of the materials used in these devices Relays epoxy It is recommended that you periodically inspect these devices for any degradation of properties and replace the module if degradation is found The controller should be mounted horizontally within an enclosure using a DIN rail or mounting screws 1 15 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using a DIN Rail Use 35 mm 1 38 in DIN rails such as item number 199 DR1 or 1492 DR5 from Bulletin 1492 To install your controller on the DIN rail 1 Mount your DIN rail Make sure that Side View the placement
304. pe and state of the I O but is typically between 20 milliseconds and 3 seconds When the duration of power loss reaches this limit the power supply signals the processor that it can no longer provide adequate dc power to the system This is referred to as a power supply shutdown Input States on Power Down The power supply hold up time as described above is generally longer than the turn on and turn off times of the inputs Because of this the input state change from On to Off that occurs when power is removed may be recorded by the processor before the power supply shuts down the system Understanding this concept is important The user program should be written to take this effect into account Other Types of Line Conditions Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily interrupted It is also possible that the voltage level may drop substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of time Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power for the system Preventing Excessive Heat For most applications normal convective cooling keeps the controller within the specified operating range Ensure that the specified operating range is maintained Proper spacing of components within an enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation 1 13 o Lo G gt o Ln G I MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual In some applications a substantial amount of heat is pr
305. ponded the last time they were polled and which slaves are inactive slaves that did not respond the last time they were polled The active slaves are polled on a regular basis The inactive slaves are only polled occasionally to check if any have come back online DF1 half duplex supports up to 255 devices address 0 to 254 with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts The MicroLogix supports broadcast reception but cannot initiate a broadcast command The MicroLogix supports half duplex modems using Request To Send Clear To Send RTS CTS hardware handshaking o o es eh i o _ 3 tc D 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual DF1 Half Duplex Slave Configuration Parameters When the system mode driver is DF1 half duplex slave the following parameters can be viewed and changed only when the programming software is online with the processor The DF1 half duplex slave parameters are not stored as part of the controller downloadable image with the exception of the baud rate and node address If a failed MicroLogix 1000 controller is replaced and the backed up controller image is downloaded to the replacement controller these parameters will remain at default until manually changed Therefore be sure to fully document any non default settings to the DF1 half duplex slave configuration parameters Parameter Description Default Toggles between the communication rate of 300 600 1200
306. pter explains how to program the MicroLogix 1000 programmable controller Read this chapter for basic information about principles of machine control e understanding file organization and addressing e understanding how processor files are stored and accessed applying ladder logic to your schematics amodel for developing your program e2 lt E i fe fe n 44 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Principles of Machine Control The controller consists of a built in power supply central processing unit CPU inputs which you wire to input devices such as pushbuttons proximity sensors limit switches and outputs which you wire to output devices such as motor starters solid state relays and indicator lights Programming Device User Input Devices User Output Devices 1 99 Memory D edes Programs and Data o 0 Outputs Il CPU G20 w Processor LI LI LI Power Supply MicroLogix 4 2 Programming Overview With the logic program entered into the controller placing the controller in the Run mode initiates an operating cycle The controller s operating cycle consists of a series of operations performed sequentially and repeatedly unless altered by your program logic KN input overhead scan service comms Operating Cycles e2 E E E i fe fe n H input scan the time requi
307. pulses minute 2000pulses 1revolution 60seconds IMEEM Isecond 1000pulses lminute To maintain validity you must ensure that you cannot accumulate more pulses per rate period than counts per revolution For example if you have selected a 1000 pulse encoder you cannot have more than 999 counts occur in any 1 rate measurement period If you determine that you exceed this rule simply lower your Rate Measurement Period T4 0 PRE o o e LU t o _ tc E 29 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual RPM Calculation Ladder Program Rung 2 0 Ensures that the measurement value is initialized each REM Run mode entry Last timeout First value storage Pass register 15 Source C5 0 ACC Dest N7 0 Frequency determination counter C520 RES Counts last rate measurement period Frequency in Hertz period RPM based on counts per turn register N7 2 Application Example Programs Rung 2 1 Sets the rate measurement period In this case we are calculating a new rate value once every 100ms Value N7 1 is updated once every 100ms with the number of counts that have occurred in the last 100mns period Note that the preset value must divide evenly into 100 in order to accurately determine frequency and RPM determined later in this program Rate Period Expiration Rate measurement Bit period T4 0 TON
308. r Counter Accumulated Value Count Down CTD Underflow Overflow Count Up CTU Execution Times usec when True False 29 84 26 67 The CTU is an instruction that counts false to true rung transitions Rung transitions can be caused by events occurring in the program from internal logic or by external field devices such as parts traveling past a detector or actuating a limit switch When rung conditions for a CTU instruction have made a false to true transition the accumulated value is incremented by one count provided that the rung containing the CTU instruction is evaluated between these transitions The ability of the counter to detect false to true transitions depends on the speed frequency of the incoming signal Note The on and off duration of an incoming signal must not be faster than the scan time 2x assuming a 50 duty cycle The accumulated value is retained when the rung conditions again become false The accumulated count is retained until cleared by a reset RES instruction that has the same address as the counter reset 6 17 te E E i o2 fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using Status Bits This Bit Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Count Up Overflow Bit OV bit 12 accumulated value wraps around to 32 768 from 32 767 and continues counting up from there a RES inst
309. r Inductive dc Load Devices Output Device Diode A surge suppressor can also be used 1 9 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Recommended Surge Suppressors We recommend the Allen Bradley surge suppressors shown in the following table for use with Allen Bradley relays contactors and starters Device Coil Voltage Suppressor Catalog Number Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 120V ac 599 K04 Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 240V ac 599 KA04 Bulletin 100 Contactor 120V ac 199 FSMA1 Bulletin 100 Contactor 240V ac 199 FSMA2 Bulletin 709 Motor Starter 120V ac 1401 N10 Bulletin 700 Type R RM Relays ac coil None Required Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 12V de 700 N22 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 12V dc 700 N28 Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 24V de 700 N10 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 24V dc 700 N13 Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 48V dc 700 N16 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 48V dc 700 N17 Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 115 125V dc 700 N11 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 115 125V dc 700 N14 Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 230 250V dc 700 N12 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 230 250V dc 700 N15 Bulletin 700 Type N P or PK Relay 150V max ac or DC 700 N24 Miscellaneous electromagnetic 150V max ac or DC 700 N24 devices limited to 35 sealed VA Safety Considerations 1 10 Safety considerations are an important element of proper system installation Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and others as well as the
310. r controller The following ladder program is for the conveyor controller A conveyor feeds filled bottles past a proximity sensor IN to a holding area The proximity sensor is wired to the I O terminal up count of the conveyor controller The bottles are then sent to another conveyor past a proximity switch OUT to the packing machine The proximity switch is wired to the I 1 terminal down count on the same controller o o es LU t o _ tc E 21 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Bottle Line Ladder Program Rung 2 0 Loads the high speed counter with the following parameters N7 0 0001h Output Mask Effect only O 0 0 N7 1 0001h Output Pattern for High Preset Energize O 0 0 upon high preset N7 2 350d High Preset Maximum numbers of bottles for the holding area N7 3 0000h Output Pattern for Low Preset not used N7 4 0d Low Preset not used First Pass Bit 8 1 HSL e HSC LOAD 15 Counter Source Length KE ARA Rung 2 1 Starts up the high speed counter with the above parameters is evaluated the hardware accumulator is written to C5 0 ACC speed again E 22 Each time the rung HO CH sees SS Sea PSS Sis Pee Serene seas Se SERENA HIGH SPEED COUNTER CU Type Up Down CD Counter C5 0 DN Preset 350 Accum 0 Rung 2 2 Packing machine running too fast for the fill
311. r during a protocol switch It indicates which protocol is currently being used for communication where 0 DF1 1 DH 485 S 0 12 Selected DF1 Protocol Status This bit allows the user to determine which DF1 protocol is configured where 0 DF1 Full Duplex default setting 1 DF1 Half Duplex Slave 0 13 to S 0 15 Reserved NA NA S 1 0 to 1 4 Controller Mode Status Control Status Bits 0 4 function as follows 0 0000 0 Remote Download in progress 0 0001 1 Remote Program mode 0 0011 3 Suspend Idle operation halted by SUS instruction execution 0 0110 6 Remote Run mode 0 0111 7 Remote Test continuous mode 0 1000 8 Remote Test single scan mode 8 1 5 Forces Enabled Status This bit is set by the controller 1 to indicate that forces are always enabled 8 1 6 Forces Installed Status This bit is set by the controller to indicate that forces have been set by the user Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable B 5 o o es eh i o Y 3 tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Classification Description Status This bit is set when the controller receives valid data from the communication port For DF1 protocols the bit is reset if the controller does not receive valid data from the programming port for 10 seconds Note In DF1 half duplex mode simple
312. r sender communication 13 2 math instructions 8 2 32bit addition and subtraction 8 6 about 8 2 Add ADD 8 4 Clear CLR 8 11 Divide DIV 8 9 Double Divide DDV 8 10 in the paper drilling machine application example 8 14 Multiply MUL 8 8 overview 8 2 changes to the math register S 13 and S 14 8 3 overflow trap bit S 5 0 8 3 updates to arithmetic status bits 8 2 using indexed word addresses 8 2 Scale Data SCL 8 12 Square Root SQR 8 11 Subtract SUB 8 5 using arithmetic status bits 9 10 MCR Master Control Reset 10 7 MEQ Masked Comparison for Equal 7 5 Message MSG 13 1 application examples 13 13 control block layout 13 5 entering parameters 13 3 error codes 13 10 timing diagram 13 8 using status bits 13 6 mnemonic using in logical addresses 4 12 model for developing a logic program 4 15 Index modem cable constructing your own 3 13 modems dialup phone D 9 leasedline D 9 line drivers D 10 radio D 10 using with MicroLogix controllers D 9 monitoring controller operation fault recovery procedure 14 6 motor starters bulletin 509 surge suppressors 1 10 motor starters bulletin 709 surge suppressors 1 10 mounting template A 11 mounting the controller using a DIN rail 1 16 using mounting screws 1 17 vertically 1 18 MOV Move 9 15 Move MOV 9 15 entering parameters 9 15 updates to arithmetic status bits 9 15 move and logical instructions And AND 9 18 E
313. rding the number of pulses over a given time period Both types of Up Counters operate identically except that the Up Counter with reset and hold uses external inputs 2 and 3 For the Up Counter each Off to On state change of input I 0 0 adds 1 to the accumulator until the high preset is reached The accumulator is then automatically reset to zero The Up Counter operates in the 0 to 32 767 range inclusive and can be reset to zero using the Reset RES instruction When the HSC instruction is first executed true the e Accumulator C5 0 0 ACC is loaded to the hardware accumulator High preset C5 0 0 PRE is loaded to the hardware high preset If you move data to the high preset without using the RAC instruction with a MOV after the high speed counter has been configured the data is loaded to the instruction image but is not loaded to the hardware The modified high preset value is not loaded to the hardware until the existing hardware high preset is reached or an RAC or RES instruction is executed The high preset value loaded to the hardware must be between 1 and 32 767 inclusive or an error INVALID PRESETs LOADED TO HIGH SPEED COUNTER 37H occurs Any value between 32 768 and 32 767 inclusive can be loaded to the hardware accumulator The Following Condition Occurs when either the hardware accumulator transitions from the hardware high preset 1 to the hardware high preset or A high preset is reached the hard
314. re Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal Shield Drain Non jacketed Terminal 2 Shield l White with Blue Stripe Cut back no connection Blue White Blue with White Stripe Terminal 3 Common White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 Data B Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A To prevent confusion when installing the communication cable cut back the white with blue stripe wire immediately after the the insulation jacket is removed This wire is not used by DH 485 White Orange Grounding and Terminating the DH 485 Network Only one connector at the end of the link must have Terminals 1 and 2 jumpered together This provides an earth ground connection for the shield of the communication cable Both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and 6 jumpered together This connects the termination impedance of 120Q that is built into each AIC as required by the DH 485 specification End of Line Termination Mew 3106A or 49842 Cable 12787 4000ft Maximum Jumper 3 9 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Connecting the AIC 3 10 Note Only Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers support DH 485 connections with the AIC You can connect an unpowered AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC to the network without disrupting network activity In addition if a MicroLogix 1000 controller powers an AIC that is connected
315. re information on the AIC see the Advanced Interface Converter and DeviceNet Interface Installation Instructions Publication 1761 5 11 DH 485 Network with a MicroLogix 1000 Controller MicroLogix 1000 Series C or later ac PC PC to port 1 or connection from port M por t2 Micro og 1761 0BL AM00 J MicroLogix or 1761 CBL HM02 AIC 1761 NET AIC 1761 CBL AP00 or 1761 CBL AP00 1761 CBL PM02 or 1761 CBL PM02 AIC ae 1761 NETAIC 7 24V de user supply needed if not connected to a MicroLogix 1000 controller 1747 CP3 or MicroLogix DH 485 Network 1761 CBL ACO0 D 18 Understanding the Communication Protocols Typical 3 Node Network PanelView 550 MicroLogix 1000 Series C or later 1761 CBL AMOO or 1761 CBL HM02 RJ45 port AIC 1761 NET AIC 1761 CBL AS09 or 1761 CBL AS03 Selection Switch Up Not needed in this configuration since the MicroLogix 1000 provid j 1 DB 9RS 232 port oer tothe on via Bo i TROIS or mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 1761 CBL ACOO DH 485 DF1 port D 19 o o e eh pus o um 3 tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Networked Operator Interface Device and MicroLogix Controller PanelView 550 1761 CBL AS09 or 1761 CBL AS03 PC abo RS 232 port e p port 1 or NULL modem adapter connection from NULL modem a
316. re information regarding the program cycle The controller compares each last scan value to the value contained in S 22 If the controller determines that the last scan value is larger than the value stored at 8 22 the last scan value is written to S 22 Resolution of the maximum observed scan time value is 0 to 10ms For example the value 9 indicates that 80 90 ms was observed as the longest program cycle Interrogate this value if you need to determine or verify the longest scan time of your program 8 23 Reserved NA NA 8 24 Index Register Status This word indicates the element offset used in indexed addressing When an STI high speed counter or Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of this register is restored when execution resumes 8 25 to 8 29 Reserved NA NA 8 30 STI Setpoint Dynamic Configuration You enter the timebase to be used in the selectable timed interrupt STI The time can range from 10 to 2550 ms This is in 10ms increments so valid values are from 0 255 Your STI routine executes per the value you enter Write a zero value to disable the STI To provide protection from inadvertent alteration of your selection program an unconditional MOV instruction containing the setpoint value of your STI to S 30 or program a CLR instruction at S 30 to prevent STI operation If the STI is initiated while in the REM Run mode by
317. red for the controller to scan and read all input data typically accomplished within useconds E program scan the time required for the processor to execute the instructions in the program The program scan time varies depending on the instructions used and each instruction s status during the scan time Note Subroutine and interrupt instructions within your logic program may cause deviations in the way the operating cycle is sequenced 3 output scan the time required for the controller to scan and write all output data typically accomplished within useconds 4 service communications the part of the operating cycle in which communication takes place with other devices such as an HHP or personal computer 5 housekeeping and overhead time spent on memory management and updating timers and internal registers 4 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual You enter a logic program into the controller using a programming device The logic program is based on your electrical relay print diagrams It contains instructions that direct control of your application Understanding File Organization The processor provides control through the use of a program you create called a processor file This file contains other files that break your program down into more manageable parts Processor File Overview Most of the operations you perform with the programming device involve the processor file and the two
318. rforms a bitwise Exclusive OR operation 9 20 NOT Not Performs a NOT operation 9 21 NEG Negate Changes the sign of the source and stores it 9 22 in the destination FFL and FIFO Load and FIFO The FFL instruction loads a word into a FIFO 9 25 FFU Unload stack on successive false to true transitions The FFU unloads a word from the stack on successive false true transitions The first word loaded is the first to be unloaded LFL and LIFO Load and LIFO The LFL instruction loads a word into a LIFO 9 26 LFU Unload stack on successive false to true transitions The LFU unloads a word from the stack on successive false to true transitions The last word loaded is the first to be unloaded About the Data Handling Instructions Use these instructions to convert information manipulate data in the controller and perform logic operations In this chapter you will find a general overview preceding groups of instructions Before you learn about the instructions in each of these groups we suggest that you read the overview This chapter contains the following overviews Move and Logical Instructions Overview FIFO and LIFO Instructions Overview 9 2 Using Data Handling Instructions Convert to BCD TOD Use this instruction to convert 16 bit integers into BCD values o Bc Scirce Dant The source must be a word address The destination parameter can be a word address in a data file or it can be the math reg
319. rgized the output is turned off On Off Circuit Ladder Program Rung 2 0 Does a one shot from the input push button to an internal bit the internal bit is true for only one scan This prevents toggling of the physical output in case the push button is held ON for more than one scan always the case push button OSR 1 push button Input false to true I 0 B3 B3 essem pee OSB ss e 2 5ese eccoeeeeecrcoocbcocueeenoccan P 0 1 0 Rung 2 1 If the push button input has gone from false to true and the output is presently OFF turn the output ON and jump over the following rung to the rest of the programs If the JMP instruction was missing the following run would be true and would turn the output back OFF push button Toggling Toggling false to Output Output true B3 0 0 0 0 cp Ase Ses PAD sass RAR RER ees seeee sees tesse D Rssde 0 0 0 Go to rest of program 1 JMP E 34 Application Example Programs Rung 2 2 If the push button input has gone from false to true and the output is presently ON turns the output OFF push button Toggling Toggling false to Output Output true B3 0 0 0 0 a a E a A A O g 2 0 0 0 Rung 2 3 Contains the label corresponding to the jump instruction in rung 1 The remainder of your actual program would be placed below this rung Go to rest Dummy Bit of program 1 B3 LBL
320. ribed in appendix E You will be adding the main program in file 2 and adding a subroutine to file 6 Adding File 2 The rungs shown on the following page are referred to as the program s start up logic They determine the conditions necessary to start the machine in motion by monitoring the start and stop push buttons When the start push button is pressed it enables the conveyor to move and starts spinning the drill bit When the stop button is pressed it disables the conveyor motion and turns off the drill motor The start up logic also checks to make sure the drill is fully retracted in the home position before allowing the conveyor to move e2 E E E fe fe n Eu CIJI Drill On Off O 1 Manuals with Drilled Holes Conveyor Belt 6 21 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 2 39 Starts the conveyor in motion when the start button is pressed However another condition must also be met before we start the conveyor The drill must be in its fully retracted position home This run also stops the conveyor when the stop button is pressed START Drill STOP Machine Button Home LS Button RUN Latch Telo fn Beye ee I 1 0 B3 0 ae e sees I sss feces SEA RR A en o EAT a RARE 6 5 7 0 Machine RUN Latch B3 0 pese FEAR 0 Rung 2 4 Applies the above start logic to the conveyor and drill motor Machine Drill Conveyor RUN Home LS Enable Latch B
321. rison LFL 33 67 61 13 1 50 LIFO Load Data Handling LFU 35 08 64 20 1 50 LIFO Unload Data Handling MCR 4 07 3 98 0 50 Master Control Program Flow Reset Control MEQ 7 69 28 39 1 50 Masked Comparison Comparison for Equal MOV 6 78 25 05 1 50 Move Data Handling MSG 26 18099 34 75 Message Communication This only includes the amount of time needed to set up the operation requested It does not include the time it takes to service the actual communication as this time varies with each network configuration As an example 144ms is the actual communication service time for the following configuration 3 nodes on DH 485 2 MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers and 1 PLC 500 A I Seriest programming software running at 19 2K baud with 2 words per transfer Add7 3 seconds per word for MSG instructions that perform writes MUL 6 78 57 96 1 50 Multiply Math MVM 6 78 33 28 1 50 Masked Move Data Handling NEG 6 78 29 48 1 50 Negate Data Handling NEQ 6 60 21 52 1 50 Not Equal Comparison NOT 6 78 28 21 1 00 Not Data Handling OR 6 78 33 68 1 50 Or Data Handling OSR 11 48 13 02 1 00 One Shot Rising Basic OTE 4 43 4 43 0 75 Output Energize Basic OTE high 7 00 12 00 0 75 Update High High Speed Counter speed counter Speed Counter Image Accumulator OTL 3 16 4 97 0 75 Output Latch Basic OTU 3 16 4 97 0 75 Output Unlatch Basic B 27 o o es eh i o _
322. rning NA NA NA NA Hold Count NA Not Applicable Using High Speed Counter Instructions Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold Pulse direction Input State Input Hede neon High Speed irecti npu nput no Counter Action Input Count 1 0 un Reset 1 2 1 3 HSC Rung Turning Off to On Off Off On or Off True Count Up Turning Off Turning Off to On On Off On or Off True Count Down Turning Off D NA NA Off On or NA False Hold Count E Turning Off NA NA Off On or On NA Hold Count E Turning Off 5 Off On or Turning NA Off On or NA NA Hold Count o Off Turning Off A NA NA Turning On NA NA Reset to 0 NA Not Applicable Bidirectional Counter Up down count Input State High Speed Input Up Count Input Down Count HSC Rung Counter Action 1 0 1 1 Turning Off to On Off On or Turning Off True Count Up Off On or Turning Off Turning Off to On True Count Down NA NA False Hold Count Off On or Turning Off Off On or Turning Off NA Hold Count NA Not Applicable 12 13 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Bidirectional Counter with Reset and Hold Up down count Input State High Speed Input Up Count oe Input Reset Input Hold ec Rung Counter 1 0 1 1 2 1 3 Action Turning Off to Off On or Off On or Off True Count Up On Turning Off Tur
323. rocessor determines that another node on the network has requested information or supplied a command to it This bit can be set at any time This bit is cleared when the processor services the request or command 8 2 69 Message Reply Pending Bit Status This bit is set when another node on the network has supplied the information you requested in the MSG instruction of your processor This bit is cleared when the processor stores the information and updates your MSG instruction Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable B 11 o o en LU i o Y 3 tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Address Bit Classification Description S 2 79 Outgoing Message Status This bit is set when one or more messages in Command Pending your program are enabled and waiting but no Bit message is being transmitted at the time As soon as transmission of a message begins the bit is cleared After transmission the bit is set again if there are further messages waiting It remains cleared if there are no further messages waiting 2 8 to S 2 13 Reserved NA NA Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable B 12 Programming Reference Address Bit Classification Description S 2 14 Math Overflow Selection Dynamic Configuration Set this bit when you intend to use 32 bit addition and subtraction When S 2 14 is set
324. rogrammable Controllers User Manual Notes 2 26 Connecting the System Connecting the System This chapter describes how to wire your controller system The method you use and cabling required to connect your controller depends on what type of system you are employing This chapter also describes how the controller establishes communication with the appropriate network o Lo G gt o Ln G I For information on See page DF1 protocol connections 3 2 DH 485 network connections 3 6 Establishing communication 3 19 3 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Connecting the DF1 Protocol There are two ways to connect the MicroLogix 1000 programmable controller to your personal computer using the DF1 protocol using an isolated point to point connection or using a modem Descriptions of these methods follow ATTENTION Chassis ground user 24V ground and RS 232 ground are internally connected You must connect the chassis ground terminal screw to chassis ground prior to connecting any devices It is important that you understand your personal computer s grounding system before connecting to the controller An optical isolator is recommended between the controller and your personal computer Making an Isolated Point to Point Connection You can connect the MicroLogix 1000 programmable controller to your personal computer using a serial cable from your personal computer s serial port to the micro
325. rogrammable Controllers User Manual Notes B 32 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters C Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters This appendix lists all of the available programming instructions along with their parameters valid addressing modes and file types o o e LU t o _ tc C 1 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Available File Types The following file types are available Abbreviation FileType O Output Input S Status B Binary T Timer C Counter R Control N Integer All file types are word addresses unless otherwise specified Available Addressing Modes The following addressing modes are available immediate direct indirect Immediate Addressing Indicates that a constant is a valid file type Direct Addressing The data stored in the specified address is used in the instruction For example N7 0 ST20 5 T4 8 ACC C 2 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters Indexed Direct Addressing You may specify an address as being indexed by placing the character in front of the address When an address of this form is encountered in the program the processor takes the element number of the address and adds to it the value contained in the Index Register S 24 then uses the result as the actual address For example N7 10 where S
326. rom passing from the source to the destination True False 35 72 6 78 Entering Parameters For all micro controllers specify I1 0 0 For 16 I O controllers I1 0 0 9 are valid and I1 0 10 15 are considered unused inputs They do not physically exist For 32 I O controllers I1 0 0 15 and I1 1 0 3 are valid Specify I1 1 if you want to immediately update the last four input bits te E E i 5 fe n Mask Specify a Hex constant or register address Immediate Output with Mask IOM ron This instruction allows you to update the outputs prior to the normal output scan IMMEDIATE OUTPUT w MAS Slot Data from the output image is transferred through a mask to the specified outputs Haxk The program scan then resumes Execution Times usec when True False 41 59 6 78 Entering Parameters For all micro controllers specify O0 0 0 For 16 I O controllers O0 0 0 5 are valid and O0 0 6 15 are considered unused outputs They do not physically exist For 32 I O controllers O0 0 0 11 are valid and O0 0 12 15 are considered unused outputs Mask Specify a Hex constant or register address 10 9 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Program Flow Control Instructions in the Paper Drilling Machine Application Example This section provides ladder rungs to demonstrate the use of program flow control instructions The rungs are part of the paper drilling machine application exa
327. rotocol Programming Device Modem Cable 1761 CBL PM02 Cable Modem Null Modem Optical Isolator 9 pin __ 8 pin Mini Din Controller We recommend using an AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as your optical isolator See page 3 13 for specific AIC cabling information 3 4 Connecting the System Constructing Your Own Null Modem Cable If you construct your own null modem cable the maximum cable length is 15 24 m o 50 ft with a 25 pin or 9 pin connector Refer to the following typical pinout G O t Optical Isolator Modem i am 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 3 TXD e TXD 2 3 2 RXD RXD 3 2 5 GND GND 7 5 1 CD je CD 8 1 4 DTR i DTR 20 4 6 DSR DSR 6 6 8 CTS CTS 5 8 7 RIS e p RIS 4 7 3 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Connecting to a DH 485 Network Note Only Series C or later MicroLogix 1000 discrete controllers and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers support DH 485 network connections MicroLogix 1000 Series C or later discrete PC or MicroLogix 1000 analog 4 PC to port 1 or connection from port 2 port 1 or port 2 to TTT 1761 CBL AP00 or 1761 CBL AP00 1761 CBL PM02 or 1761 CBL PM02 3 AlC gt 1761 NET AIC i 1761 CBL AMOO or 1761 CBL HM02 AIC 1761 NET AIC 2
328. ruction having the same address as the CTU instruction is executed OR the count is decremented less than or equal to 32 767 with a CTD instruction Done Bit DN bit 13 accumulated value is equal to or greater than the preset value the accumulated value becomes less than the preset Count Up Enable Bit CU bit 15 rung conditions are true rung conditions go false OR a RES instruction having the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled The accumulated value is retained after the CTU instruction goes false or when power is removed from and then restored to the controller Also the on or off status of counter done overflow and underflow bits is retentive The accumulated value and control bits are reset when the appropriate RES instruction is enabled The CU bits are always set prior to entering the REM Run or REM Test modes Count Down CTD Execution Times usec when True False 32 19 27 22 6 18 The CTD is a retentive output instruction that counts false to true rung transitions Rung transitions can be caused by events occurring in the program such as parts ran traveling past a detector or actuating a limit switch When rung conditions for a CTD instruction have made a false to true transition the accumulated value is decremented by one count provided that the rung containing the CTD instruction is evaluated between these transitions Using Basic Instructions
329. rue the hardware accumulator is loaded to the instruction image accumulator C5 0 ACC Using High Speed Counter Instructions What Happens to the HSC When Going to REM Run Mode Once initialized the HSC instruction retains its previous state when going through a mode change or power cycle This means that the HSC Accumulator C5 0 ACC and High Preset values are retained Outputs under the direct control of the HSC also retain their previous state The Low Preset Reached and High Preset Reached bits CO LP and CO HP are also retained They are examined by the HSC instruction during the high speed counter s first true evaluation in the REM Run mode to differentiate a retentive REM Run mode entry from an external or initial Accumulator C5 0 ACC modification At the first true HSL instruction execution after going to run the Low Preset is initialized to 32 768 and the output mask and high and low output patterns are initialized to zero Use the HSL instruction during the first pass to restore any values necessary for your application You can modify the behavior of the high speed counter at REM Run mode entry by adjusting the HSC parameters prior to the first true execution of the HSC instruction The following example ladder rungs demonstrate different ways to adjust the HSC parameters D Nd D 12 25 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Example 1 To enter the REM Run mode and have the HSC
330. rung containing the designated LBL instruction and True False continues executing You can jump forward or backward JMP 9 04 6 78 False Does not execute the JMP instruction LBL 1 45 0 99 Jumping forward to a label saves program scan time by omitting a program segment until needed Jumping backward lets the controller execute program segments repeatedly Note Be careful not to jump backwards an excessive number of times The watchdog timer could time out and fault the controller Use a counter timer or the program scan register system status register word S 3 bits 0 7 to limit the amount of time you spend looping inside of JMP LBL instructions Entering Parameters Enter a decimal label number from 0 to 999 You can place up to 1 000 labels in each subroutine file Using JMP The JMP instruction causes the controller to skip rungs You can jump to the same label from one or more JMP instruction 10 2 Using Program Flow Control Instructions Using LBL This input instruction is the target of JMP instructions having the same label number You must program this instruction as the first instruction of a rung This instruction has no control bits You can program multiple jumps to the same label by assigning the same label number to multiple JMP instructions However label numbers must be unique Note Do not jump JMP into a MCR zone Instructions that are programmed within the MCR zone starting at
331. s incremented every 10 ms thereafter Application note You can write any value to 84 It will begin incrementing from this value You can use any individual bit of this word in your user program as a 50 duty cycle clock bit Clock rates for S 4 0 to S 4 15 are 20 40 80 160 320 640 1280 2560 5120 10240 20480 40960 81920 163840 327680 and 655320 ms The application using the bit must be evaluated at a rate more than two times faster than the clock rate of the bit In the example below bit S 4 3 toggles every 80 ms producing a 160 ms clock rate To maintain accuracy of this bit in you application the instruction using bit S 4 3 O 1 0 in this case must be evaluated at least once every 79 999 ms S 4 O 1 160 ms gt E z Both S 4 3 and S 4 3 cycles in 160 ms Output O 1 0 toggle every 80 ms O 1 0 must be evaluated at least once every 79 999 ms Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable o S co i o _ tc B 15 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Address Bit Classification Description S 5 Minor Error Bits The bits of this word are set by the controller to indicate that a minor error has occurred in your ladder program Minor errors bits 0 to 7 revert to major error 0020H if any bit is detected as being set at the end of the scan These bits are automatically cleared on a power cycle
332. s User Manual Addressing Structure Address bits and words using the format Cf e s b Format Explanation C Counter file f File number The only valid file number is 5 Element delimiter Cf e e Element Ranges from 0 39 These are 3 word elements See number figure on page 6 15 Word element S subelement Delimiter b bit Note If assigned to a high speed counter instruction C5 0 is not available as Addressing Examples 6 16 an address for any other counter instructions For more information on high speed counter instructions see chapter 12 C5 0 15 or C5 0 CU Count up enable bit C5 0 14 or C5 0 CD Count down enable bit C5 0 13 or C5 0 DON Done bit C5 0 12 or C5 0 0V Overflow bit C5 0 11 or C5 0 UN Underflow bit C5 0 10 or C5 0 UA Update accumulator bit C5 0 1 or C5 0 PRE Preset value of the counter C5 0 2 or C5 0 ACC Accumulator value of the counter C5 0 1 0 or C5 0 PRE 0 Bit 0 of the preset value C5 0 2 0 or C5 0 ACC 0 Bit 0 of the accumulated value Using Basic Instructions How Counters Work The figure below demonstrates how a counter works The count value must remain in the range of 32 768 to 32 767 If the count value goes above 32 767 or below 32 768 a counter status overflow OV or underflow UN bit is set A counter can be reset to zero using the reset RES instruction See page 6 20 32 768 432 767 CTU 0 Count Up o
333. s is too large X for the file The subroutine nesting exceeds 0030 alimit of 8 file 2 X 0031 An unsupported instruction was X detected 0032 An SQO SQC instruction X crossed data file boundaries The LFU LFL FFU FFL BSL 0033 OR BSR instruction crossed X data file boundaries A negative value for a timer 0034 accumulator or preset value was X detected Valid for Series A C discrete only B 20 Programming Reference Fault Classification User Error Code Non Address Hex Run Errors Non User R covarabl Recoverable 8 6 0035 An illegal instruction TND X occurred in the interrupt file Invalid presets were loaded to on the high speed counter 5 Invalid presets were loaded to 9087 the high speed counter 0040 An output verify write occurred X 00419 Extra output bit s turned on X Valid for Series A C discrete only Fault Classification User Non Address Error Code Hex Download Errors Non User R c verabie Recoverable 6 6 0018 The user program is incompatible X with the operating system B 21 o o es LU t o tje tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Address S7 Bit Suspend Code Classification Status Description When a non zero value appears in S 7 it indicates that the SUS instruction identified by this value has been evaluated as true and the Suspe
334. s of the LED indicators __ Indicates the LED is OFF B ndicates the LED is ON LCL Indicates the LED is FLASHING Status of LED does not matter 14 4 Troubleshooting Your System Controller Error Recovery Model Use the following error recovery model to help you diagnose software and hardware problems in the micro controller The model provides common questions you might ask to help troubleshoot your system Refer to the recommended pages within the model and to S 6 of the status file on page B 18 for further help Identify the error code No and description Is the error hardwar Start related Yes Refer to appendix B for probable cause and recommended action Are the wire Tighten wire connections tight 9 connections Claer fault using either function key F9 or F10 Does the controller have power supplied Is the Power LED On Check power Place the controller in REM PROGram mode Refer to page 14 3 for Is the Run LED On probable cuase and constantly recommended action Correct the condition causing the fault Is an input o output LED showing proper status Return controller to REM Is the Fault LED On RUN or any of the REM tTest modes Refer to page 14 3 for Refer to page 14 4 for Test and verify system probable cuase and probable cuase and operation recommended action recommended action 14
335. s on this Manual P 6 If you find a problem with this manual or you have any suggestions for how this manual could be made more useful to you please contact us at the address below Allen Bradley Company Inc Control and Information Group Technical Communication Dept 602V T122 P O Box 2086 Milwaukee WI 53201 2086 or visit our internet page at http www ab com micrologix Installing Your Controller Installing Your Controller This chapter shows you how to install your controller system The only tools you require are a Flat head or Phillips head screwdriver and drill Topics include o z o A G I compliance to European Union Directives e hardware overview master control relay surge suppressors safety considerations power considerations preventing excessive heat controller spacing mounting the controller MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Compliance to European Union Directives EMC Directive If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives This product is tested to meet Council Directive 89 336 EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC and the following standards in whole or in part documented in a technical construction file EN 50081 2 EMC Generic Emission Standard Part 2 Industrial Environment EN 50082 2 EM
336. se HRe Aree sr sasear pees He eee AIR eee eS eee ET C yes 6 1 Rung 2 2 Output from barcode Index Reg I 0 8 24 Fel e 9 e uewueear See set oe ceo ese 7 2 Rung 2 3 Indexes into the table of bin locations and places the correct numbe counts into the high preset of the high speed counter MOV A a EN Moe EE MOVE Source N7 10 100 Dest N7 2 100 ges Sete cmm oe o o e LU t o _ tc E 25 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 2 4 Loads the high speed counter with the following parameters N7 0 0001h Output Mask high speed counter control only 0 0 0 gripper N7 1 000h Output Pattern for High Preset turn OFF gripper release part N7 2 100d High Preset loaded from table in the rung above N7 3 0001h Output Pattern for Low Preset turn ON gripper grab part N7 4 Od Low Preset home position when encoder triggers Z reset Home Position Reached C5 0 TrHSL t 4 HSC LOAD LP Counter C5 0 Source N7 0 Length 5 First Pass Bit Sed pesce Wena 15 Rung 2 5 Start up the high speed counter with the above parameters Each time this rung is evaluated the hardware accumulator is written to C5 0 ACC XHSC R HEUS Sue ice a del Br SE eec HET HIGH SPEED COUNTER gt EN
337. shift register and FIFO they are shifted to new memory locations each time another part carrier actuates the SHIFT limit switch After three additional shifts the first part carrier is in front of the spray guns ready for its part to be painted At this point the part presence data has been shifted into B3 3 and the color data has been shifted into N7 0 The program now checks B3 3 if there is a 1 in this location that means that there is a part hanging on the part carrier and the SPRAY ENABLE output is energized The program also checks N7 0 to determine which color to paint the part As the program is checking the shift register for the presence of a part at the spray guns it is also decoding the color information at N7 0 and energizing the appropriate spray guns Since we are only using three colors the only valid color codes are 1 2 and 3 If any other number is in N7 0 when a part is ready to be painted the color defaults to BLUE Since our program accesses the data while it is still in the two data structures after the part has been painted the presence and color information for the part is shifted out of the data structures and lost Spray Booth Ladder Program Rung 2 0 These three rungs read the color information coming from the barcode decoder outputs and load this into integer N7 4 This color is loaded into the FIFO when the part carrier actuates the SHIFT LIMIT SWITCH Low Bit from Bar Code Decoder fro
338. stored information is accessed If there is a part on the carrier it is painted according to its bar code and if the carrier is free paint is not dispensed The bit shift and FIFO instructions store the part presence and color information before each carrier enters the spray booth Both of these instructions place data into their data structures every time a part carrier actuates the shift limit switch If the proximity switch senses a part on the carrier a 1 is shifted into the shift register If the carrier is free as it passes the shift limit switch a 0 is shifted into the shift register The shift register tracks the part carriers approaching the spraying area The FIFO does the same type of shifting except rather than shifting one bit at a time the FIFO shifts an entire word at a time Just before the part carrier actuates the SHIFT limit switch the barcode reader reads the barcode on the part to determine what color the part should be painted The barcode reader has three outputs that it sets according to what color the part should be These outputs are e wired to the controller as inputs I 0 2 I 0 3 and I 0 4 combined together to form an integer which is decoded later in the program This integer is then shifted into the FIFO when the carrier actuates the SHIFT limit switch o o es LU t o tje tc E 37 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Once the presence and color data is loaded into the
339. sults Program the user fault routine logic accordingly When executing the startup protection fault routine S 6 major error fault code will contain the value 0016H S 1 10 to S 1 11 Reserved NA NA Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable o o e LU t o _ tc B 7 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Address Bit Classification Description S 1 12 Run Always Static Configuration When set this bit causes the controller to clear S 1 13 before attempting to enter RUN mode when power is applied or if an unexpected reset occurs If this bit is not set the controller powers up in the previous mode it was in before losing power unless the controller was in REM test mode If the controller was in REM test mode when power was removed the controller enters REM program mode when power is applied This bit overrides any faults existing at power down A Setting the Run Always bit causes the controller to enter the REM Run mode if an unexpected reset occurs regardless of the mode that the controller is in before the reset occurred Unexpected resets may occur due to electromagnetic noise improper grounding or an internal controller hardware failure Make sure your application is designed to safely handle this situation Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable B 8 Programming Reference Address Bit Classific
340. t Applicable direct NEQ Not Equal source A direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct source B immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f indexed direct min f max NOT Logical NOT source direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct destination direct indexed O I SB T C R N Not Applicable direct OR Logical OR source A direct indexed O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 direct source B direct indexed O I S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 direct destination direct indexed O I S B T C R N Not Applicable direct OSR One Shot bit address direct O I S B T C R N Not Applicable Rising OTE Output bit address direct O I S B T C R N Not Applicable Energize OTL Output Latch bit address direct O I S B T C R N Not Applicable OTU Output Unlatch bit address direct O I S B T C R N Not Applicable RAC HSC Reset counter direct C Not Applicable Accumulator source immediate direct O l S B T C R N 32 768 32 767 f min f max RES Timer Counter structure direct T C R element Not Applicable Reset level D Indexed addressing is not allowed when using T C or R addresses C 10 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types for Instruction Parameters i i Instruction Valid Addressing TM Instruction Description Parameters Mode s Valid File Types Valid Value Ranges RES
341. t Shift Left BSL 11 5 Bit Shift Right BSR 11 6 Selectable Timed Interrupt STI function overview 11 17 sequencer instructions overview 11 7 applying ladder logic to your schematics 4 14 automatic protocol switching 3 19 basic instructions 6 2 about 6 2 bit instructions overview 6 3 counter instructions overview 6 15 timer instructions overview 6 7 baud rate DF1 B 23 DH 485 B 23 limitations for autoswitching 3 19 bidirectional counter operation 12 11 bidirectional counter with quadrature encoder Index 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual operation 12 15 bidirectional counter with reset and hold operation 12 11 bidirectional counter with reset and hold with quadrature encoder operation 12 15 bit file B3 4 6 bit instructions Examine if Closed XIC 6 3 Examine if Open XIO 6 4 OneShot Rising OSR 6 6 Output Energize OTE 6 4 Output Latch OTL 6 5 Output Unlatch OTU 6 5 overview 6 3 bit shift instructions overview 11 3 effects on index register S 24 11 3 Bit Shift Left BSL 11 5 effect on index register S 24 11 4 entering parameters 11 3 using operation 11 5 Bit Shift Right BSR 11 6 effects on index register S 24 11 4 entering parameters 11 3 using operation 11 6 BSL Bit Shift Left 11 5 BSR Bit Shift Right 11 6 C cables planning routes for DH485 connections D 16 selection guide for the AIC 3 14 calibating an analog i
342. t Software Calibration Calculating the Software Calibration Use the following equation to perform the software calibration Scaled Value input value x slope offset Slope scaled max scaled min input max input min Offset Scaled min input min x slope Calibration Procedure 1 Heat up cool down your MicroLogix 1000 system to the temperature in which it will normally be operating 2 Determine the scaled high and low values you wish to use in your application In this example scaled high value which corresponds to 20 mA is 31207 and scaled low value which corresponds to 4 mA is 6241 3 Using an analog calibration source connected to the analog input channel or your system s input device placed at the 4 mA position capture the low value by setting and then resetting the CAL LO ENABLE bit Ensure that your low value lies within the conversion range of your analog input 4 Using an analog calibration source connected to the analog input channel or your system s input device placed at the 20 mA position capture the high value by setting and then resetting the CAL HI ENABLE bit Ensure that your high value lies within the conversion range of your analog input 5 Setand then reset the CALIBRATE bit This causes the MicroLogix to calculate the slope and offset values used to perform the error correction to the analog input The analog channel is now calibrated to 5 LSB at the calibration temperature T
343. t bit of the array or to the UL True False pit 53 714 19 80 97 5 24 word 3 E Operation Oo 2 The following figure shows the operation of the BSL instruction shown above A Source Bit 1 22 12 Data block is shifted one bit at a time from bit 16 to bit 73 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 2019 18 17 16 47146 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 3332 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 5655 54 53 5251 50 49 48 RESERVED 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 i Unload Bit R6 14 10 58 Bit Array B3 1 If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions 11 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Bit Shift Right BSR 252 BIT mur aram File 423 2 Control 26 15 Bit AddrexxI 23 06 Length 30 When the rung goes from false to true the controller sets the enable bit EN bit 15 and the data block is shifted to the right to a lower bit number one bit position The specified bit at the bit address is shifted into the last bit position The first bit is shifted out of the array and stored in the unload bit UL bit 10 The shift is Execution Times completed immediately usec when EH For wraparound operation set the bit address to the first bit of the array or to the UL True Fals
344. t that it is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 5 hole position hole hole 5 hole selector selector preset switch switch sequencer bit 0 bit 1 I 0 I 0 rSQ0 c c 222 SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN 9 10 File N7 55 DN Mask FFFF Dest N7 7 Control R6 5 Length 7 Position 0 drew uec eec ue force the lt b sequencer O to increment c on next scan o R6 5 qpe se U e e 8 22 5 g EN 5 This rung accesses I O only available with 32 1 O controllers Do not include it if you are using a 16 I O a controller Q This instruction accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Do not include it if you are using a 16 1 O controller MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 4 39 Is identical to the 2 previous rungs except that it is only active when the hole selector switch is in the 7 hole position hole hole 7 hole selector selector preset switch switch sequencer bit 0 bit 1 1 30 I 0 rSQO SEQUENCER OUTPUT EN 9 10 File N7 62 DN Mask FFFF Dest N7 7 Control R6 6 Length 9 Position ol force the sequencer to increment on the next scan R6 6 U EN Rung 4 4 Ensures that the high speed counter preset value N7 7 is immediately applied to the HSC instr
345. t the network can be initialized Automatic Protocol Switching The MicroLogix 1000 Series D or later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog controllers perform automatic protocol switching between DH 485 and the configured DF1 protocol The controller cannot automatically switch between DF1 full duplex and DF1 half duplex slave This feature allows you to switch from active communication on a DF1 half duplex network to the DH 485 protocol to make program changes Simply disconnect the MicroLogix controller from the DF1 half duplex network and connect it to your personal computer The controller recognizes the computer is attempting to communicate using the DH 485 protocol and automatically switches to it When your program changes are complete you can disconnect your computer reconnect the modem and the controller automatically switches back to the configured DF1 protocol For example if you are using the DH 485 protocol to make program changes and you connect an HHP you can switch to active communication on a DF1 full duplex network The following baud rate limitations affect autoswitching Ifthe configured DH 485 baud rate is 19200 the configured DF1 baud rate must be 4800 or greater Ifthe configured DH 485 baud rate is 9600 the configured DF1 baud rate must be 2400 or greater 3 19 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Notes 3 20 Programming Overview 4 Programming Overview This cha
346. t voltage ranges 1761L10BWA 2 10 1761L10BWB 2 13 1761L16AWA 2 8 1761L16BBB 2 17 1761L16BWA 2 11 1761L16BWB 2 14 1761L20A WASA 2 19 1761L20BWASA 2 20 1761L20BWBSA 2 21 1761L32AAA 2 16 1761L32AWA 2 9 1761L32BBB 2 18 1761L32BWA 2 12 1761L32BWB 2 15 analog 2 24 overflow trap bit S 5 0 8 3 overview bit instructions 6 3 comparison instructions 7 2 counter instructions 6 15 FIFO and LIFO instructions 9 23 highspeed counter instructions 12 2 math instructions 8 2 move and logical instructions 9 13 Selectable Timed Interrupt STI function 11 17 timer instructions 6 7 ownership timeout D 8 P Power Considerations Input States on Power Down 1 13 Isolation Transformers 1 12 Loss of Power Source 1 13 other line conditions 1 13 overview 1 12 Power Supply Inrush 1 12 Power Distribution 1 11 preventing excessive heat 1 13 principles of machine control 4 2 processor files organization 4 4 overview 4 4 data files 4 6 program files 4 5 storing and accessing 4 6 download 4 7 normal operation 4 8 power down 4 8 power up 4 9 program constants 4 13 program development model 4 15 program faults determining 14 2 program files 4 4 4 5 program flow control instructions 10 2 about 10 2 Immediate Input with Mask IIM 10 9 Immediate Output with Mask IOM 10 9 in the paper drilling machine application example 10 10 Jump JMP 10 2 Jump to Subroutine JSR 10 4 Label LBL 10
347. tage range 2 20 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 20 preventing excessive heat 1 13 spacing 1 14 type 1 2 wiring diagram 2 20 1761L20BWB5A features 1 3 input voltage range 2 21 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 21 preventing excessive heat 1 13 spacing 1 14 type 1 2 wiring diagram 2 21 1761L32AAA features 1 3 grounding 2 2 input voltage range 2 16 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 16 preventing excessive heat 1 13 spacing 1 14 troubleshooting 14 2 type 1 2 wiring 2 4 wiring diagram 2 16 1761L32AWA features 1 3 grounding 2 2 input voltage range 2 9 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 9 preventing excessive heat 1 13 spacing 1 14 Index 2 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual troubleshooting 14 2 type 1 2 wiring 2 4 1761L32BBB features 1 3 grounding 2 2 input voltage range 2 18 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 18 preventing excessive heat 1 13 spacing 1 14 troubleshooting 14 2 type 1 2 wiring 2 4 wiring diagram 2 18 1761L32BWA features 1 3 grounding 2 2 input voltage range 2 12 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 12 preventing excessive heat 1 13 spacing 1 14 troubleshooting 14 2 type 1 2 wiring 2 4 wiring diagram 2 12 1761L32BWB features 1 3 grounding 2 2 input voltage range 2 15 mounting 1 15 output voltage range 2 15 preventing excessive heat 1 13 spacing
348. ter Interrupt file 4 This file is executed when an HSC interrupt occurs It can also be used for a subroutine ladder program Selectable Timed Interrupt file 5 This file is executed when an STI occurs It can also be used for a subroutine ladder program e Subroutine Ladder Program files 6 15 These are used according to subroutine instructions residing in the main ladder program file or other subroutine files 4 5 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Data Files Data files contain the status information associated with external I O and all other instructions you use in your main and subroutine ladder program files In addition these files store information concerning processor operation You can also use the files to store recipes and look up tables if needed These files are organized by the type of data they contain The data file types are Output file 0 This file stores the state of the output terminals for the controller Input file 1 This file stores the status of the input terminals for the controller Status file 2 This file stores controller operation information This file is useful for troubleshooting controller and program operation Bit file 3 This file is used for internal relay logic storage Timer file 4 This file stores the timer accumulator and preset values and status bits Counter file 5 This file stores the counter accumulator and preset values and
349. ters accordingly See page A 9 for more information on input filters Before you learn about these instructions read the overview that follows on the next page Refer to page 2 25 for information on wiring your controller for high speed counter applications High Speed Counter Instructions Overview 12 2 Use the high speed counter to detect and store narrow fast pulses and its specialized instructions to initiate other control operations based on counts reaching preset values These control operations include the automatic and immediate execution of the high speed counter interrupt routine file 4 and the immediate update of outputs based on a source and mask pattern you set Using High Speed Counter Instructions Counter Data File Elements The high speed counter instructions reference counter C5 0 The HSC instruction is fixed at C5 0 It is comprised of three words Word 0 is the status word containing 15 status bits Word 1 is the preset value Word 2 is the accumulated value Once assigned to the HSC instruction C5 0 is not available as an address for any other counter instructions 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Word CU CD DN OV UN UA HP LP IV IN JH IL PE LS IE 0 Preset Value 1 Accumulator Value 2 CU Counter Up Enable Bit CD Counter Down Enable Bit DN High Preset Reached Bit OV Overflow Occurred Bit UN Underflow Occurred Bit UA Update High Speed Counter Accumulator Bit
350. the LBL instruction and ending at the END MCR instruction will always be evaluated as though the MCR zone is true regardless of the true state of the Start MCR instruction e2 lt E i fe fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Jump to Subroutine JSR Subroutine SBR and Return RET zs H AN H Execution Times usec when True False JSR 22 24 4 25 SBR 1 45 0 99 RET 31 11 3 16 10 4 The JSR SBR and RET instructions are used to direct the controller to execute a separate subroutine file within the ladder program and return to the instruction following the JSR instruction Note If you use the SBR instruction the SBR instruction must be the first instruction on the first rung in the program file that contains the subroutine Use a subroutine to store recurring sections of program logic that must be executed from several points within your application program A subroutine saves memory because you program it only once Update critical I O within subroutines using immediate input and or output instructions IIM IOM especially if your application calls for nested or relatively long subroutines Otherwise the controller does not update I O until it reaches the end of the main program after executing all subroutines ATTENTION Outputs controlled within a subroutine remain in their last state until the subroutine is executed again Using Pro
351. ting features and shows where to find this new information For This New Information See Updated explosion hazard information page 1 15 Added 1761 CBL AH02 and 1761 CBL PH02 page 3 14 to cable selection Removed catalog 1761 NET DNI Chapter 3 Updated relay life specifications page A 6 Added relay life chart page A 6 Updated Information Changes from the previous release of this manual that require you to reference information differently are as follows The DeviceNet communications information has been updated see chapter 3 Connecting the System For updated information on automatic protocol switching see chapter 3 Connecting the System The MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers VA ratings and power supply inrush specifications have been updated see appendix A Hardware Reference SOC ix MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual The DF1 Full Duplex and DH 485 configuration parameters have been updated see appendix D Understanding Communication Protocols SOC x Preface Preface Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual It provides information concerning e who should use this manual the purpose of this manual conventions used in this manual e Allen Bradley support Who Should Use this Manual Use this manual if you are responsible for designing installing programming or troubleshooting control systems that use MicroLogix
352. tion in the sequencer file and loads the contents of source I 0 0 into the corresponding location in the file The SQL instruction continues to load the current data into this location each scan that the rung remains true When the rung goes false the enable bit EN is reset 11 16 Using Application Specific Instructions The instruction loads data into a new file element at each false to true transition of the rung When step 4 is completed the done bit DN is set Operation cycles to position 1 at the next false to true transition of the rung after position 4 If the source were a file address such as N7 40 files N7 40 and N7 30 would both have a length of 5 0 4 and would track through the steps together per the position value Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function Overview The Selectable Timed Interrupt STI function allows you to interrupt the scan of the application program automatically on a periodic basis to scan a subroutine file Afterwards the controller resumes executing the application program from the point where it was interrupted Basic Programming Procedure for the STI Function e2 E E E i fe fe n To use the STI function in your application file 1 Enter the desired ladder rungs in File 5 File 5 is designated for the STI subroutine 2 Enter the setpoint the time between successive interrupts in word S 30 of the status file The range is 10 2550 ms entered in10 ms
353. tional Analog Input Software Calibration This appendix helps you calibrate an analog input channel using software offsets to increase the expected accuracy of an analog input circuit Examples of equations and a ladder diagram are provided for your reference Software calibration reduces the error at a given temperature by scaling the values read at calibration time o o es eh i o Y 3 tc F4 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Calibrating an Analog Input Channel F 2 The following procedure can be adapted to all analog inputs current or voltage For this example the 1761 L20BWA 5A with a 4 mA to 20 mA input is used The overall error for the MicroLogix 1000 is guaranteed to be not more than 0 525 at 25 C The overall error of 0 525 at 20 mA equates to 164 LSB of error or a code range of 31043 to 31371 Any value in this range is returned by an analog input channel at 20 mA The expected nominal value at 20 mA is 31207 After performing a software calibration the overall error is reduced to 5 LSB 0 018 or a code range of 31202 to 31212 The graph shown below shows the linear relationship between the input value and the resulting scaled value The values in this graph are from the example program 20 mA 31207 scale Hi Scaled Value 40 mA 6241 scale low 6292 31352 Low Value from card Hi Value from card Input Value Scaled Value vs Input Value Optional Analog Inpu
354. tional configuration options Sinking Configuration Sourcing Configuration st 14 30V DC 3 14 30 VDC VDC VDC VDC COM COM NOT NOT DC 1 0 Vt 1 2 v3 DC 1 4 1 5 1 6 Vy 1 8 1 9 Wo Vt m2 43 114 65 we 147 14 8 qe USED USED COM COM E A vac l vwc l NOT D DC voc O0 voc OM 24V 0 2 O3 O4 Ob Ol OF OB O9 OMO O 1 24v USED 1761 L32BBB Input Voltage Range OV dc 5V de 14V de 26 4V de 55 C 131 F Off On 1761 L32BBB Output Voltage Range 0V dc 20 4V dc 26 4V dc Operating Range 2 18 Wiring Your Controller 1761 L20AWA 5A Wiring Diagram Note Refer to pages 2 23 through 2 25 for additional information on analog wiring o Lo G gt o Ln G I EE 79 132Vac 3 A 79 12 ac Vg a Analog MA L2 N L1 L2 N L1 Channels D vio m A TATA ATA N2 TA A SHD v Vit O SHD IG IG Q aed NOT OA OAM OAD oO O7 USED SHD v lI 5 pees EN v C Vc 1 VC 1 Wc Lt OLIN F 4 ypc O0 voc OM vpc O2 O3 ypg O4 Ob O16 Analog Channel 1761 L20AWA 5A Input Voltage Range 0V ac 20V ac 79V ac 132V ac On 1761 L20AWA 5A Output Voltage Range 0V ac 5V ac 264V ac 0V dc 5V dc 125V dc Operating Range 2 19 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1761 L20BWA 5A Wiring Diagram Sinking Input Configuration Note Refer to page 2 4 for additional discrete configuration options
355. to 9600 amp N 255for MicroLogix 1000 Series A and B discrete N 6 for MicroLogix 1000 Series C and later discrete and all MicroLogix 1000 analog o o e eh i o Y 3 tc D 3 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Example DF1 Full Duplex Connections For information about required network connecting equipment see chapter 3 Connecting the System Micro Controller Optical Isolator recommended 1761 CBL PM02 Personal Computer Optical Isolator Micro Controller recommended 1761 CBL PM02 We recommend using an AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as your optical isolator See page 3 14 for specific AIC cabling information D 4 Understanding the Communication Protocols DF1 Half Duplex Slave Protocol DF1 half duplex slave protocol provides a multi drop single master multiple slave network In contrast to DF1 full duplex communication takes place in one direction at atime You can use the RS 232 port on the MicroLogix as both a half duplex programming port as well as a half duplex peer to peer messaging port The master device initiates all communication by polling each slave device The slave device may only transmit message packets when it is polled by the master It is the master s responsibility to poll each slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slaves to send message packets back to the master During a polling sequence the master polls a slave
356. to ensure that the backup data is the same for every micro controller you are using save the program to disk before downloading it to a micro controller 4 7 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Normal Operation Power Down 4 8 During normal operation both the micro controller and your programming device can access the processor files stored in the RAM Any changes to retentive data that occur due to program execution or programming commands affect only the retentive data in the RAM The program files are never modified during normal operation However both the CPU and your programming device can read the program files stored in RAM EEPROM RAM Backup Data CPU Workspace Retentive Data Retentive Data Program Files Program Files x Programming Device When a power down occurs only the retentive data is transferred from the RAM to the EEPROM The program files do not need to be saved to the EEPROM since they cannot be modified during normal operation If for some reason power is lost before all of the retentive data is saved to the EEPROM the retentive data is lost This may occur due to an unexpected reset or a hardware problem EEPROM RAM Backup Data CPU Workspace Retentive Data Retentive Data Program Files Program Files CPU Programming Device Programming Overview Power Up During power up the micro controller transfers
357. to page 1 12 for additional information on power supply inrush Relays are derated an additional 2 5g on 32 pt controllers Specification Description 100 120V ac Controllers 24V dc Controllers Voltage 79 to132V ac Range 47 to 63 Hz IUDA 14V dc min On Voltage 79V ac min 24V de nominal 99 I 132V ac max 26 4V dc max 55 C 131 F 30 0V de max 30 C 86 F Off Voltage 20V ac 5V de 5 0 mA min 79V ac 47 Hz 2 5 mA min 14V de On Current 12 0 mA nominal 120V ac 60 Hz 8 0 mA nominal 24V dc 16 0 mA max 132V ac 63 Hz 12 0 mA max 30V dc Off Current 2 5 mA max 1 5 mA max Nominal 12K ohms 50 Hz 3K ohms Impedance 10K ohms 60 Hz Inrush Maximum 250 mA max Not Applicable To reduce the inrush maximum to 35 mA apply a 6 8K ohm 5w resistor in series with the input The on state voltage increases to 92V ac as a result A4 o o es 3 i o Y 3 tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual de Input Derating Graph 30 25 20 V dc General Output Specifications 20 30 68 86 0 0 6 104 122 140 Type Relay MOSFET Triac Voltage See Wiring Diagrams page 2 8 Maximum Load Refer to the Relay 1 0A per point 55 C 131 F 0 5A per point 55 C 131 F Current Contact Rating 1 5A per point 30 C 86 F 1 0A per point 30 C 86 F Table Minimum
358. to the True False REM Program mode 38 34 27 49 e The controller loses power e A fault occurs Using Status Bits e2 E E E i fe fe n And Remains Set Until This Bit Is Set When One of the Following Timer Done Bit DN bit 13 accumulated value is equal the appropriate RES to or greater than the instruction is enabled preset value Timer Timing Bit TT bit 14 rung conditions are true rung conditions go false or and the accumulated value when the done bit is set is less than the preset value Timer Enable Bit EN bit 15 rung conditions are true rung conditions go false Note To reset the retentive timer s accumulated value and status bits after the RTO rung goes false you must program a reset RES instruction with the same address in another rung 6 13 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual 6 14 When the controller changes from the REM Run or REM Test mode to the REM Program or REM Fault mode or user power is lost while the timer is timing but not yet at the preset value the following occurs Timer Enable EN bit remains set Timer Timing TT bit remains set e Accumulated value ACC remains the same On returning to the REM Run or REM Test mode or when power is restored the following can happen Condition Result TT bit remains set If the rung is true EN bit remains set ACC value remains the same and resumes increme
359. to the network network activity will not be disrupted should the MicroLogix 1000 controller be removed from the AIC The figure that follows shows the external wiring connections and specifications of the AIC AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 NET AIC Connecting the System Item Description 1 Port 1 DB 9 RS 232 DTE 2 Port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 LH Port 3 DH 485 Phoenix plug 4 DC Power Source selector switch cable port 2 power source external external power source connected to item 5 5 Terminals for external 24V dc power supply and chassis ground For additional information on connecting the AIC see the Advanced Interface Converter AIC and DeviceNet Interface DNI Installation Instructions Publication 1761 5 11 DF1 Isolated Point to Point Connection 1761 CBL AMOO or 1761 CBL HM02 MicroLogix 1000 AIC 1761 NET AIC Not needed in this configuration since the MicroLogix 1000 provides 1747 CP3 or 1761 CBL AC00 power to the AIC via port 2 3 11 o Lo G gt o Ln G I MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual DH 485 Network Connection MicroLogix 1000 Series C or later discrEte 4 PC and all analog PC to port 1 or port 2 connection from port 1 or port 2 to MicroLogix 1761 CBL AMOO or 1761 CBL HM02 AIC 1761 NET
360. trollers User Manual Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD When executed this instruction sets one bit of the destination word The particular bit that is turned On depends on the value of the first four bits of the source word See the table below Use this instruction to multiplex data in applications such as rotary switches keypads and bank switching Execution Times usec when True False 27 67 6 78 Source Destination Bit 15 04 03 02 01 00 15 14 18 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 X 0 000 000000000000000 1 X 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X 0 0 1 010 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X 0 0 1 110 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 110 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 1 0 110 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Entering Parameters e Source is the address that contains the information to be decoded Only the first four bits 0 3 are used by the DCD instruction The remaining bits may be used for other application specific needs Destination is the address of the word where the decoded data is to
361. ts With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C always resets S 0 1 Overflow V always resets S 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets S 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative most significant bit is set otherwise resets 9 19 te z E i o2 fe n MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Exclusive Or XOR The value at source A is Exclusive ORed bit by bit with the value at source B and then stored in the destination xoa BITWISE EXCLOS of Sosrce A Source B Dent Execution Times usec when True False 33 64 6 92 Truth Table Dest A XOR B A B Dest 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 Source A and B can either be a word address or a constant however both sources cannot be a constant The destination must be a word address Updates to Arithmetic Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry C always resets S 0 1 Overflow V always resets S 0 2 Zero Z sets if result is zero otherwise resets S 0 3 Sign S sets if result is negative most significant bit is set otherwise resets 9 20 Using Data Handling Instructions Not NOT The source value is NOTed bit by bit and then stored in the destination one s complement Execution Times usec when True False 28 21 6 92 Truth Table Dest NOT A A Dest 0 1 1 0 The
362. turn off the forward signal so the drill can retract Drill Drill Subr Drill Sequence OSR Forward Start B3 B3 0 0 sec npee m2 OSR set re se frn NAR eee eee eas See eee eas eee as Li 23 555 32 48 3 Rung 6 1 When the drill has drilled through the book When this happens off and the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned on DRILL DEPTH limit switch the body of the drill actuates the the DRILL FORWARD signal is turned The drill is also retracted automatically on power up if it is not actuation the DRILL HOME limit switch Drill Drill Depth LS Forward 29 0 0 U 4 3 qst Drill Drill Pass Home LS Retract Dr IQ 0 0 tases rsexe 4 22 DL 15 5 2 o o e eh i o Y 3 tc MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 6 2 When the drill is retracting after drilling a hole the body of the drill actuates the DRILL HOME limit switch When this happens the DRILL RETRACT signal is turned off the DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is turned off to indicate the drilling process is complete and the conveyor is restarted Drill Drill Drill Home LS Retract Retract I 0 0 0 0 0 U Drill Sequence Start B3 U 32 Conveyor Start Stop 0 0 L Rung 7 0 Examines the number of 1 4 in thousands that have accumu
363. uction High Speed Counter HSL Sas SSS SS SSS SNES TANNER EE SERNER SSS ees IX Ss HSC LOAD t Counter C5 0 Source N7 5 Length 5 qemeeAe TEE IIS Rung 4 5 Interrupt occurred due to low preset reached C5 0 RET RETURN IL deme eec Thisrung accesses I O only available with 32 I O controllers Do not include this rung if you are using a 16 1 0 controller E 10 Application Example Programs Rung 4 6 Signals the main program file 2 to initiate a drilling sequence The high speed counter has already stopped the conveyor at the correct position using its high preset output pattern data clear 0 0 0 This occurred within microseconds of the high preset being reached just prior to entering this high speed counter interrupt subroutine sequence interrupt occurred due to high preset reached C50 Rung 6 0 The drill sequence subroutine resets the drill sequence start bit and sets the conveyor drive bit 0 0 0 upon completion of the drilling Drill Sequence Start This section of ladder logic controls the up down motion of the drill for the book drilling machine operation When the conveyor positions the book under the drill DRILL SEQUENCE START bit is set the This rung uses that bit to begin the drilling Because the bit is set for the entire drilling operation the ISR is required to be able to
364. ue of N7 0 the amount of change can be increased or decreased The constants in the LES and GRT instructions and in the source and destination of the ADD and SUB instructions could be changed easily to integers for even greater flexibility Adjustable Timer Ladder Program Rung 2 0 Adds 2 5 seconds to Timer delay each time the increment push button is depressed Do not exceed 120 0 seconds delay Note that N7 0 250 Increment Timer preset I 0 LES B3 ADD LESS THAN OSR ADD 8 Source A T4 0 PRE 0 Source A T4 0 PRE 500 500 Source B 11750 Source B N7 0 0 Dest T4 0 PRE 500 RER Ske E o o es eh i o Y 3 tc E 41 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Rung 2 1 Subtracts 2 5 seconds from Timer delay each time the decrement push button is depressed Do not go below 5 0 seconds delay Decrement Timer preset I 0 TGRT B3 XSUB eeAA AIATHAeAS sell npe GREATER THAN OSR SUBTRACT 8 Source A T4 0 PRE 0 Source A T4 0 PRE 500 500 Source B 750 Source B N7 0 0 decenter Dest T4 0 PRE 500 ps SS es Soe Resse Sb 5S Rung 2 2 TON SSS S56 S2es esses Input condition to allow TIMER ON DELAY dwell time on the drill Timer T4 0 Timebase 0 01 Preset 500 Accum 0 quee SE E 42 Optional Analog Input Software Calibration F Op
365. uld actuate the DRILL Integer N7 12 is the integer how many 1000 1 4 increments accumulator to how Application Example Programs 1 4 in increments MOV MOVE Source N7 20 0 Dest N7 10 0 BENEN RR Rung 7 7 END Time Driven Sequencer Application Example The following application example illustrates the use of the TON and SQO instructions in a traffic signal at an intersection The timing requirements are e Red light 30 seconds e Yellow light 15 seconds e Green light 60 seconds The timer when it reaches its preset steps the sequencer that in turn controls which traffic signal is illuminated For a detailed explanation of e XIC XIO and TON instructions see chapter 6 e SQO and SQC instructions see chapter 11 o o e LU t o _ tc E 17 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Time Driven Sequencer Ladder Program Rung 2 0 The function of this rung is called a regenerative timer Every time the timer reaches its preset the DONE bit is set for one scan this causes this rung to become FALSE for one scan and resets the timer On the following scan when this rung becomes TRUE again the timer begins timing Timer Timer Enable T4 0 4TON Sen e teense Sree ssc On on N TIMER ON DELAY EN DN Timer T4 0 DN Time Base 0 01 Preset 1
366. ull Duplex Protocol 29i RR RE ERR rss rss D 2 DF1 Half Duplex Slave Protocol lslslles ers rr rr eee D 5 DH 485 Communication Protocol 00 002 eee ee re ra D 10 Application Example Programs Paper Drilling Machine Application Example E 2 Time Driven Sequencer Application Example s E 17 Event Driven Sequencer Application Example E 19 Bottle Line Example sossosesessssr rss rr rr ene TREE EE ER E 21 Pick and Place Machine Example 00000 sees E 24 RPM Calculation Application Example 0000 eee E 28 On Off Circuit Example 00 00 re rr rer rr ees E 34 Spray Booth Application Example 00 rr rr ere rr rs E 36 Adjustable Timer Application Example 0000 eee E 41 Optional Analog Input Software Calibration Calibrating an Analog Input Channel 00200 rer ret F 2 Glossary 2c e cr ctr etter teeter eee eee eee eees G 1 Index mem mmm mem eee eee eens H 1 Summary of Changes Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since the last printing as Publication 1761 6 3 July 1998 To help you find new information and updated information in this release of the manual we have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph New Information The table below lists sections that document new features and additional information about exis
367. um update for each channel is equal to one ladder scan time plus the channel s Update Time plus Settling Time When only one analog input channel is enabled the maximum update for the channel is equal to the Update Time plus one ladder scan time Update Examples Example 1 All 4 channels enabled with 60 Hz filter selected default settings Maximum Update Time 4 x ladder scan time 4 x 16 67 ms 4 x 66 67 ms 333 36 4 x ladder scan times Each channel will be updated approximately three times per second Example 2 1 channel enabled with 250 Hz filter selected Maximum Update Time ladder scan time 4ms Input Channel Filtering 5 4 The analog input channels incorporate on board signal conditioning The purpose of this conditioning is to reject the AC power line noise that can couple into an analog input signal while passing the normal variations of the input signal Frequency components of the input signal at the filter frequency are rejected Frequency components below the filter bandwidth 3 dB frequency are passed with under 3 dB of attenuation This pass band allows the normal variation of sensor inputs such as temperature pressure and flow transducers to be input data to the processor Noise signals coupled in at frequencies above the pass band are sharply rejected An area of particular concern is the 50 60 Hz region where pick up from power lines can occur Using Analog Converting
368. umulated counts The following terminology is used in the following table to indicate the status of counting UpT increments by 1 when the input energizes edge Down decrements by 1 when the input energizes edge ResetT resets the accumulator to zero when the input energizes edge Hold disables the high speed counter from counting while the input is energized level Count increments or decrements by 1 when the input energizes edge Direction allows up counts when the input is de energized and down counts while the input is energized level A input pulse in an incremental quadrature encoder edge level B input pulse in an incremental quadrature encoder edge level Z reset pulse in an incremental quadrature encoder edge level T the signal is active on the rising edge only off to on Using High Speed Counter Instructions The table below lists the function key you press to choose the type of high speed counter you want High Speed Counter Type High Speed Counter Functionality Input Terminal Used and Function Key 1 0 n 1 2 13 F1 Up Up Counter operation uses a single UpT Not Used Not Used Not Used ended input F2 Up Up Counter operation uses a single UpT Not Used Reset Hold with reset and hold input with external reset and hold inputs F3 Pulse and direction Bidirectional operation uses both pulse CountT Direction Not Used Not Used
369. unloads the contents of the element at stack position 0 into the Destination N7 11 All data in the stack is shifted one element toward position zero True False and the highest numbered element is zeroed The position value then decrements 73 78 4 34 word 34 90 The FFU instruction unloads an element at each false to true transition of the rung until the stack is empty The controller then sets the empty bit EM LIFO Load LFL and LIFO Unload LFU LFL and LFU instructions are used in pairs The LFL instruction loads words into a user created file called a LIFO stack The LFU instruction unloads words from the LIFO stack in the opposite order as they were entered Operation Instruction parameters have been programmed in the LFL LFU instruction pair shown below ann Destination Position LIFO LOAD EN N7 11 N7 12 0 Source N7 10 DN LIFO N7 12 gy N7 13 1 a peee LFU instruction unloads N7 14 2 Position 9 data from stack N7 12 at 3 position 8 4 LFU 5 34 words are allocated LIFO UNLOAD EU 6 for FIFO stack starting at LIFO N7 12 DN N7 12 ending at N7 45 Dest N7 11 L EM 7 Control R6 0 Length 34 Source 8 Position 9 N7 10 EN 9 LFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next available position 9 in this case N7 45 33 Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 LFL Instruction
370. uted Elements are copied in ascending order If your destination file type is a timer counter or control file be sure the source words corresponding to the status elements of your destination file contain zeros The following figure shows how file instruction data is manipulated The instruction fills the words of a file with a source value It uses no status bits If you need an enable bit program a parallel output that uses a storage address Destination Source Word to File Entering Parameters 9 12 Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Source is a constant or element address The file indicator is not required for an element address Destination is the starting address of the file you want to fill You must use the file indicator in the address Length is the number of words or elements in the file to be filled If the destination file type is a then you can specify a maximum length of Discrete Analog Output 1 5 Input 2 8 Status 33 33 Bit 32 32 Timer 40 40 Counter 32 32 Control 16 16 Integer 105 105 Using Data Handling Instructions All elements are filled from the source value typically a constant into the specified destination file each scan the rung is true Elements are filled in ascending order Move and Logical Instructions Overview The following general information applies to move an
371. ware accumulator is loaded with a value greater than or equal to the hardware high preset or the hardware high preset is loaded with a value that is less than or equal to the hardware accumulator 12 8 Using High Speed Counter Instructions When a high preset is reached no counts are lost Hardware and instruction accumulators are reset Instruction high preset is loaded to the hardware high preset Ifthe DN bit is not set the DN bit is set The IH bit is also set and the IL IV and IN bits are reset Ifthe DN bit is already set the OV bit is set The IV bit is also set and the IL IV and IN bits are reset e High speed counter interrupt file program file 4 is executed if the interrupt is enabled 97 The following tables summarize what the input state must be for the corresponding a high speed counter action to occur Up Counter 92 z 2 Input State High Speed a peut Input Input Hold Counter Input Count I O Direction 1 1 Reset V2 U3 HSC Rung Action Turning Off to On NA NA NA True Count Up NA NA NA NA False Hold Count Off On or Turning NA Off On or NA NA Hold Count Off Turning Off NA Not Applicable 12 9 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Up Counter with Reset and Hold Input state um High Speed npu Counter UE Input Input Hold i Input Count 1 0 ar Reset 1 2 U3 HSC Ru
372. witch op l C MCR Lee eee eee eee eee ewe we co oe E A MCR MCR 115V ac Circuits ae E ee Listing MCR 24 V dc Lo Hi Output gt Circuits Line Terminals Connect to 115V ac terminals of Power Supply Line Terminals Connect to 24V de terminals of Power Supply 1 7 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Using Surge Suppressors Inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids require the use of some type of surge suppression to protect the controller output contacts Switching inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the lifetime of relay contacts By adding a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive device you will prolong the life of the switch contacts You will also reduce the effects of voltage transients caused by interrupting the current to that inductive device and will prevent electrical noise from radiating into system wiring The following diagram shows an output with a suppression device We recommend that you locate the suppression device as close as possible to the load device dc or L1 VAC DC ac or de Outputs de COM or L2 If you connect a micro controller FET output to an inductive load we recommend that you use an IN4004 diode for surge suppression as shown in the illustration that follows 24V de Relay or Solid State de Outputs IN4004 Diode i 24V dc common Installi
373. wn in the following table 12 18 Using High Speed Counter Instructions Parameter Image Location Up Counter Bidirectional Only Counters Description N7 5 Output Mask Output Mask Identifies which group of bits in the output file word 0 are controlled 000F bits 3 0 00F0 bits 7 4 0003 bits 0 and 1 00FF bits 7 0 N7 6 Output Source Output High Up count The status of bits in this Source word are written through the mask to the actual outputs N7 7 High Preset High Preset Up count When the accumulator reaches this value the output source is written through the output mask to the actual outputs and the HSC subroutine file 4 is scanned N7 8 Reserved Output Low Down count The status of bits in this Source word are written through the mask to the actual outputs N7 9 Reserved Low Preset Down count When the accumulator reaches this value the output source is written through the output mask to the actual outputs and the HSC subroutine file 4 is scanned The bits in the output mask directly correspond to the physical outputs If a bit is set to 1 the corresponding output can be changed by the high speed counter If a bit is set to 0 the corresponding output cannot be changed by the high speed counter The bits in the high and low sources also directly correspond to the physical outputs The high source is applied when the high preset is reached The low source is app
374. x 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave on a Multi drop Link When communication is between either your programming software and a MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controller or between two MicroLogix Programmable Controllers via a slave to slave connection on a larger multi drop link the devices depend on a DF1 Master to give each of them polling permission to transmit in a timely manner As the number of slaves increases on the link up to 254 the time between when your programming software or the MicroLogix Controller is polled also increases This increase in time may become larger if you are using low baud rates As these time periods grow the following values may need to be changed to avoid loss of communication programming software increase poll timeout and reply timeout values e MicroLogix Programmable Controller increase poll timeout Ownership Timeout D 8 When a program download sequence is started by a software package to download a ladder logic program to a MicroLogix controller the software takes file ownership of the processor File ownership prevents other devices from reading from or writing to the processor while the download is in process If the controller were to respond to a device s read commands during the download the processor could respond with incorrect information Similarly if the controller were to accept information from other devices the
375. xample you would enter the value 1000 into N7 2 for a 1000 count A B Z encoder T4 0 PRE The Rate Measurement Period 1 e the amount of time in which to sample the accumulation of counts This value is entered in 01 second intervals For example enter the value 10 into T4 0 PRE for a 1 second rate measurement period For an accurate frequency and RPM calculation to occur the value entered must divide evenly into 100 For example valid 20 10 5 4 2 1 and invalid 11 9 8 7 6 3 Once you have entered these 2 values the following information is provided N7 1 Counts per last Rate Measurement Period This value is updated each end of Rate Measurement Period with the number of counts that have elapsed Use this value if your application requires high speed calculations such as velocity N7 4 Frequency This value is updated once per second with the number of pulses that occurred in the last second This value frequency is calculated pulses Frequency Hz second Application Example Programs e N7 5 RPM This value is calculated once per second using the frequency value N7 4 together with the counts per revolution value N7 2 For example if N7 4 contained the value 2000 indicates 2000 Hz and you had specified a 1000 count encoder in N7 2 the RPM calculation for N7 5 would be 120 This equates to 2 encoder revolutions per second Refer to the following calculation RPM pulses _ lrevolution 60sec onds 1 second
376. xclusive Or XOR 9 20 Masked Move MVM 9 16 Move MOV 9 15 Negate NEG 9 22 Not NOT 9 21 Or OR 9 19 overview 0 13 changes to the math register S 13 and S 14 9 14 entering parameters 9 13 overflow trap bit S 5 0 9 14 updates to arithmetic status bits 9 13 using indexed word addresses 9 13 MSG Message 13 1 Index 9 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual MUL Multiply 8 8 Multiply MUL 8 8 changes to the math register 8 8 updates to arithmetic status bits 8 8 MVM Masked Move 9 16 N NEG Negate 9 22 Negate NEG 9 22 updates to arithmetic status bits 9 22 NEQ Not Equal 7 3 nesting subroutine files 10 5 node address S 15L B 23 nominal transfer function 5 5 Not NOT 9 21 updates to arithmetic status bits 9 21 Not Equal NEQ 7 3 NOT Not 9 21 null modem cable 3 5 number systems 4 13 radices used 4 13 numeric constants 4 13 O OneShot Rising OSR 6 6 entering parameters 6 6 example rung 6 7 operating cycle controller s 4 3 Or OR 9 19 updates to arithmetic status bits 9 19 OR Or 9 19 OSR OneShot Rising 6 6 OTE Output Energize 6 4 OTL Output Latch 6 5 OTU Output Unlatch 6 5 output contact protection selecting 1 8 output current range analog 2 24 Index 10 Output Energize OTE 6 4 output file O 4 6 Output Latch OTL 6 5 using 6 5 output specifications A 5 Output Unlatch OTU 6 5 using 6 6 outpu
377. yond file boundaries LARGE FOR boundary FILE 002B TOO MANY There are more than 3 subroutines nested Correct the user program to meet JSRs IN HSC in the high speed counter routine file 4 the requirements and restrictions for the JSR instruction Reload the program and enter the REM Run mode 0030 SUBROUTINE There are more than 8 subroutines nested Correct the user program to meet NESTING in the main program file file 2 the requirements and restrictions EXCEEDS LIMIT for the main program file OF8 Reload the program and enter the REM Run mode 14 9 22 O fe ie o B 2 2 MicroLogix 1000 Programmable Controllers User Manual Error Code RR Description Recommended Action essage Hex 0031 UNSUPPORTED The program contains an instruction s that Modify the program so that all INSTRUCTION is not supported by the micro controller instructions are supported by the DETECTED For example SVC or PID controller Reload the program and enter the REM Run mode 0032 SQO SQC A sequencer instruction length position Correct the program to ensure that CROSSED DATA parameter points past the end of a data file the length and position FILE parameters do not point past the BOUNDARIES data file Reload the program and enter the REM Run mode 0033 BSL BSR FFL The length parameter of a BSL BSR FFL Correct the program to ensure that FFU LFL LFU FFU LFL
378. you how much time elapses in a program cycle A program cycle includes scanning the ladder program housekeeping scanning the I O servicing of the communication channel The byte value is zeroed by the controller each scan immediately preceding the execution of rung 0 of program file 2 main program file The byte is incremented every 10 ms thereafter and indicates in 10 ms increments the amount of time elapsed in each scan If this value ever equals the value in S 3H Watchdog a user watchdog major error will be declared code 0022 The resolution of the scan time value is 0 to 90 ms 10 ms Example The value 9 indicates that 80 90 ms has elapsed since the start of the program cycle S 3H Watchdog Scan Time Dynamic Configuration This byte value contains the number of 10 ms ticks allowed to occur during a program cycle The default value is 10 100 ms but you can increase this to 255 2 55 seconds or decrease it to 1 as your application requires If the program scan S 3L value equals the watchdog value a watchdog major error will be declared code 0022 Valid for Series A C discrete only NA Not applicable B 14 Programming Reference Address Bit Classification Description S4 Timebase Status All 16 bits of this word are assessed by the controller The value of this word is zeroed upon power up in the REM Run mode or entry into the REM Run or REM Test mode It i

1761-UM003 - Rockwell Automation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents